Honeywell Universal Remote UDC 3300 User Manual
UDC 3300  
Universal Digital Controller  
Product Manual  
51-52-25-55D  
4/00  
Sensing and Control  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Document  
Abstract  
This manual describes the installation, configuration, operation, and maintenance of the UDC3300  
Controller.  
References  
Publication Title  
Publication Number  
51-52-25-56  
UDC 3300 Limit Controller  
UDC 3000/UDC 3300/UDC5000/UDC6000U/DC6300  
RS422/485 Communications Option Manual  
51-51-25-35  
UDC 3000/3300 DMCS Communications Option Section of the Gateway Manual  
82-50-10-23  
51-52-25-66  
51-52-25-70  
Modbus® RTU Serial Communications User Manual  
Modbus® RTU Serial Communications User Manual Configuration Interface for  
UDC 3300  
UDC 3300 Controller Specification Sheet  
51-52-03-23  
51-52-25-38  
51-52-05-01  
UDC 3000 Modbus 485RTU Communications Option  
How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments  
Contacts  
World Wide Web  
The following lists Honeywell’s World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our customers.  
Honeywell Organization  
WWW Address (URL)  
http://www.honeywell.com  
Corporate  
Sensing and Control  
International  
http://www.honeywell.com/sensing  
http://www.honeywell.com/Business/global.asp  
Telephone  
Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below.  
Organization  
Phone Number  
United States and Canada  
Asia Pacific  
Honeywell  
1-800-423-9883 Tech. Support  
1-888-423-9883 Q&A Faxback  
(TACFACS)  
1-800-525-7439 Service  
Honeywell Asia Pacific  
Hong Kong  
(852) 2829-8298  
Europe  
Honeywell PACE, Brussels, Belgium  
Honeywell, Sunrise, Florida U.S.A.  
[32-2] 728-2111  
(854) 845-2600  
Latin America  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symbol Definitions  
The following table lists those symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions.  
Symbol  
Definition  
This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for  
additional information. This symbol appears next to required information in the  
manual.  
WARNING  
PERSONAL INJURY: Risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns the user of a  
potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms,  
42.4 Vpeak, or 60 Vdc may be accessible. Failure to comply with these  
instructions could result in death or serious injury.  
ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for  
handling electrostatic sensitive devices  
Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth (green  
or green/yellow) supply system conductor.  
Functional earth terminal. Used for non-safety purposes such as noise immunity  
improvement. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the  
source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements.  
Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded  
to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local  
electrical code requirements.  
Chassis Ground. Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment  
shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with  
national and local electrical code requirements.  
iv  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
SECTION 1 – OVERVIEW.................................................................................................. 1  
1.1 Introduction...................................................................................................... 1  
1.2 Operator Interface ........................................................................................... 3  
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION........................................................................................... 7  
2.1 Overview.......................................................................................................... 7  
2.2 Model Number Interpretation......................................................................... 12  
2.3 Mounting........................................................................................................ 13  
2.4 Wiring ............................................................................................................ 15  
2.5 Wiring Diagrams............................................................................................ 18  
2.6 Control and Alarm Relay Contact Information............................................... 34  
SECTION 3 – CONFIGURATION .................................................................................... 35  
3.1 Overview........................................................................................................ 35  
3.2 Configuration Prompts................................................................................... 36  
3.3 How To Get Started....................................................................................... 38  
3.4 Configuration Tips ......................................................................................... 39  
3.5 Configuration Procedure................................................................................ 40  
3.6 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group..................................................... 42  
3.7 Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group (Cascade or Two Loops.............. 44  
3.8 SP Ramp, SP Rate, or SP Programming Set Up Group............................... 45  
3.9 Accutune Set Up Group................................................................................. 47  
3.10 Algorithm Data Set Up Group........................................................................ 49  
3.11 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group................................................. 53  
3.12 Input 1 Parameters Set Up Group................................................................. 54  
3.13 Input 2 Parameters Set Up Group................................................................. 56  
3.14 Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group................................................................. 57  
3.15 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group .................................................... 58  
3.16 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group .................................................... 60  
3.17 Options Set Up Group................................................................................... 62  
3.18 Communications Set Up Group..................................................................... 64  
3.19 Alarms Set Up Group .................................................................................... 66  
3.20 Display Parameters Set Up Group ................................................................ 69  
3.21 Calibration Group .......................................................................................... 70  
3.22 Maintenance Set Up Group........................................................................... 71  
3.23 Status Group ................................................................................................. 72  
3.24 Configuration Record Sheet Basic Model: DC330B-XX-XXX  
DMCS Model: DC330D-XX-XXX................................................................... 73  
3.25 Configuration Record Sheet Expanded Model: DC330E-XX-XXX .............. 75  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 4 – CONFIGURATION PROMPT DEFINITIONS............................................ 79  
4.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 79  
4.2 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group..................................................... 80  
4.3 Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group..................................................... 84  
4.4 Setpoint Ramp/Rate/Programming Set Up Group ........................................ 85  
4.5 Accutune Set Up Group ................................................................................ 88  
4.6 Algorithm Data Set Up Group........................................................................ 92  
4.7 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group............................................... 109  
4.8 Input 1 Parameters Set Up Group............................................................... 112  
4.9 Input 2 Parameters Set Up Group............................................................... 116  
4.10 Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group............................................................... 117  
4.11 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group .................................................. 118  
4.12 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group .................................................. 124  
4.13 Options Set Up Group................................................................................. 129  
4.14 Communications Set Up Group................................................................... 135  
4.15 Alarms Set Up Group .................................................................................. 139  
4.16 Display Parameters Set Up Group.............................................................. 143  
4.17 Calibration Data........................................................................................... 144  
4.18 Maintenance Group..................................................................................... 144  
4.19 Status Test Data.......................................................................................... 146  
SECTION 5 – OPERATION............................................................................................ 147  
5.1 Overview ..................................................................................................... 147  
5.2 How to Power Up the Controller.................................................................. 148  
5.3 Entering a Security Code............................................................................. 150  
5.4 Monitoring Your Controller .......................................................................... 151  
5.5 Start-up Procedure ...................................................................................... 155  
5.6 Operating Modes......................................................................................... 156  
5.7 Setpoints...................................................................................................... 160  
5.8 Setpoint Ramp Rate.................................................................................... 163  
5.9 Single Setpoint Ramp.................................................................................. 164  
5.10 Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants.......................................................... 168  
5.11 Alarm Setpoints........................................................................................... 171  
5.12 Two Loops of Control Overview .................................................................. 172  
5.13 Configuring Two Loops of Control............................................................... 177  
5.14 Monitoring Two Loops of Control ................................................................ 180  
5.15 Operating Two Loops of Control ................................................................. 181  
5.16 Three Position Step Control Algorithm ........................................................ 182  
5.17 Input Math Algorithms.................................................................................. 183  
5.18 Digital Input Option (Remote Switching)...................................................... 186  
5.19 Auto/Manual Station .................................................................................... 190  
5.20 Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression .................................................................... 193  
5.21 Accutune...................................................................................................... 194  
5.22 Carbon Potential.......................................................................................... 202  
5.23 HealthWatch................................................................................................ 204  
SECTION 6 – SETPOINT RAMP/SOAK PROGRAMMING OPTION............................ 205  
6.1 Overview ..................................................................................................... 205  
6.2 Program Contents ....................................................................................... 206  
6.3 Drawing a Ramp/Soak Profile ..................................................................... 209  
6.4 Entering the Setpoint Program Data ........................................................... 211  
6.5 Run/Monitor the Program............................................................................ 214  
vi  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 7 – INPUT CALIBRATION ............................................................................ 219  
7.1 Overview...................................................................................................... 219  
7.2 Minimum and Maximum Range Values....................................................... 220  
7.3 Preliminary Information................................................................................ 221  
7.4 Input #1, #2, or #3 Set Up Wiring ................................................................ 223  
7.5 Input #1, #2, or #3 Calibration Procedure.................................................... 229  
7.6 Restoring Factory Calibration...................................................................... 231  
SECTION 8 – OUTPUT CALIBRATION ........................................................................ 233  
8.1 Overview...................................................................................................... 233  
8.2 Current Proportional Output Calibration...................................................... 234  
8.3 Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output Calibration.............. 236  
8.4 Auxiliary Output Calibration......................................................................... 240  
SECTION 9 – TROUBLESHOOTING / SERVICE ......................................................... 243  
9.1 Overview...................................................................................................... 243  
9.2 Troubleshooting Aids................................................................................... 245  
9.3 Power-up Tests ........................................................................................... 247  
9.4 Status Tests................................................................................................. 248  
9.5 Background Tests........................................................................................ 250  
9.6 Controller Failure Symptoms....................................................................... 252  
9.7 Troubleshooting Procedures ....................................................................... 253  
9.8 Parts Replacement Procedures................................................................... 261  
9.9 Maintenance................................................................................................ 270  
SECTION 10 – PARTS LIST.......................................................................................... 271  
10.1 Exploded View............................................................................................. 271  
SECTION 11 – APPENDIX A – MANUAL TUNING....................................................... 273  
11.1 Overview...................................................................................................... 273  
11.2 Time, Position, or Current Proportional Simplex Control............................. 274  
11.3 Time Proportional Duplex or Current Proportional Duplex Control.............. 276  
11.4 Two Sets of Tuning Parameters for Single Output Operation..................... 276  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
Figure 1-1  
Figure 2-1  
Figure 2-2  
Figure 2-3  
Figure 2-4  
Figure 2-5  
Figure 2-6  
Figure 2-7  
Figure 2-8  
Figure 2-9  
Operator Interface Displays and Indicators......................................................................3  
Model Number Interpretation .........................................................................................12  
Dimensions ....................................................................................................................13  
Mounting Method ...........................................................................................................14  
Composite Wiring Diagram ............................................................................................18  
Line Voltage Wiring........................................................................................................19  
Input #1/Input #2 Connections .......................................................................................20  
Two HLAI Replace 2nd LLAI Connections.....................................................................21  
Electromechanical Relay Output—Model DC330X-EE-XXX..........................................22  
Solid State Relay Output—Model DC330X-AA-XX........................................................23  
Figure 2-10 10-amp Solid State Relay Output—Model DC330X-SS-XX...........................................24  
Figure 2-11 Open Collector Output—Model DC330X-TT-XXX .........................................................25  
Figure 2-12 Current Output—Current /Time Duplex, Time/Current Duplex, Position  
Proportional, or Three Position Step Control .................................................................26  
Figure 2-13 Auxiliary Output and Three Relay Outputs.....................................................................27  
Figure 2-14 Position Proportional Output or Three Position Step—Models  
DC330X-EE-XXX-X2, DC330X-AA-XXX-X2..................................................................28  
Figure 2-15 Auxiliary Output Connections—Models DC330X-XX-2XX, DC330X-XX-5XX................29  
Figure 2-16 Digital Inputs Connections—Model DC330X-XX-XX3....................................................29  
Figure 2-17 RS422/485/Modbus Communications Option Connections...........................................30  
Figure 2-18 DMCS Communications Option Connections ................................................................31  
Figure 2-19 Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA 2-wire Transmitter Using Open Collector  
Alarm 2 Output—Model DC330X-XT-XXX.....................................................................32  
Figure 2-20 Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA 2-wire Transmitter Using Auxiliary Output—  
Model DC330X-XX-2XX or DC330X-XX-5XX................................................................33  
Figure 3-1  
Figure 4-1  
Figure 4-2  
Figure 5-1  
Figure 5-2  
Overview of UDC 3300 Prompt Hierarchy .....................................................................36  
Example of Mass Flow Compensation using Multiplier/Divider Algorithm....................102  
Example of Eight Segment Characterizer....................................................................106  
Operator Interface........................................................................................................151  
Functional Overview Block Diagram of a Single Loop (Loop #1) or Dual  
Loop Controller (Loop #1 and Loop #2) .......................................................................173  
Functional Overview Block Diagram of Internal Cascade of a 2-loop Controller..........174  
Hi/Lo Override Selector................................................................................................175  
Auto/Manual Station and Backup Control Feature.......................................................190  
Carbon Potential Control..............................................................................................203  
Ramp/Soak Profile Example ........................................................................................209  
Program Record Sheet ................................................................................................210  
Inputs #1, #2, and #3 Wiring Terminals .......................................................................221  
Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath.................................223  
Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Precision Resistor...................224  
Wiring Connections for RTD ........................................................................................225  
Wiring Connections for Radiamatic, Millivolts, or Volts (except 0 to 10 Volts) .............226  
Wiring Connections for 0 to 10 Volt Inputs...................................................................227  
Wiring Connections for 4 to 20 mA inputs....................................................................228  
Wiring Connections for Calibrating Current Proportional Output .................................234  
Wiring Connections for Calibrating Auxiliary Output ....................................................240  
Chassis Removal .........................................................................................................262  
Display/Keyboard Replacement...................................................................................263  
Removing the Printed Wiring Boards...........................................................................264  
Printed Wiring Board Identification...............................................................................265  
Figure 5-3  
Figure 5-4  
Figure 5-5  
Figure 5-6  
Figure 6-1  
Figure 6-2  
Figure 7-1  
Figure 7-2  
Figure 7-3  
Figure 7-4  
Figure 7-5  
Figure 7-6  
Figure 7-7  
Figure 8-1  
Figure 8-2  
Figure 9-1  
Figure 9-2  
Figure 9-3  
Figure 9-4  
Figure 10-1 UDC 3300 Exploded View............................................................................................271  
viii  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tables  
Table 1-1  
Table 2-1  
Table 2-2  
Table 2-3  
Table 2-4  
Table 2-5  
Table 2-6  
Table 2-7  
Table 2-8  
Table 3-1  
Table 3-2  
Table 3-3  
Table 3-4  
Table 3-5  
Table 3-6  
Table 3-7  
Table 3-8  
Table 3-9  
Table 3-10  
Table 3-11  
Table 3-12  
Table 3-13  
Table 3-14  
Table 3-15  
Table 3-16  
Table 3-17  
Table 3-18  
Table 4-1  
Table 4-2  
Table 4-3  
Table 4-4  
Table 4-5  
Table 4-6  
Table 4-7  
Table 4-8  
Table 4-9  
Table 4-10  
Table 4-11  
Table 4-12  
Table 4-13  
Table 4-14  
Table 4-15  
Table 4-16  
Table 5-1  
Table 5-2  
Table 5-3  
Figure 5-1  
Table 5-4  
Function of Keys...............................................................................................................4  
Specifications ...................................................................................................................8  
Procedure for Mounting the Controller...........................................................................14  
Permissible Wiring Bundling...........................................................................................16  
Input 2 Jumper Selections..............................................................................................21  
Universal Output Wiring Functionality and Restrictions for Figure 2-12.........................26  
Universal Output Wiring Functionality and Restrictions for Figure 2-13.........................27  
Control Relay Contact Information.................................................................................34  
Alarm Relay Contact Information ...................................................................................34  
Configuration Tips..........................................................................................................39  
Configuration Procedure ................................................................................................40  
Tuning Group Function Prompts....................................................................................42  
Tuning Loop 2 Group Function ......................................................................................44  
SP Ramp Group Function Prompts................................................................................45  
Accutune Group Function Prompts................................................................................48  
Algorithm Group Function Prompts................................................................................49  
Output Algorithm Group Function Prompts....................................................................53  
Input 1 Group Function Prompts....................................................................................54  
Input 2 Group Function Prompts....................................................................................56  
Input 3 Group Function ..................................................................................................57  
Control Group Function Prompts ...................................................................................58  
Control 2 Group Function Prompts ................................................................................60  
Options Group Function Prompts...................................................................................62  
Communications Group Function Prompts ....................................................................64  
Alarms Group Function Prompts....................................................................................66  
Display Group Function Prompts ...................................................................................69  
Maintenance Group Function Prompts ..........................................................................71  
Tuning Group Prompt Definitions...................................................................................80  
Loop 2 Tuning Group Prompt.........................................................................................84  
Setpoint Ramp/Rate Group Definitions..........................................................................85  
Accutune Group Definitions............................................................................................88  
Algorithm Group Definitions ...........................................................................................92  
Output Algorithm Group Definitions .............................................................................109  
Input 1 Group Definitions .............................................................................................112  
Input 2 Group Definitions .............................................................................................116  
Input 3 Group Definitions .............................................................................................117  
Control Group Definitions.............................................................................................118  
Control 2 Group Definitions..........................................................................................124  
Options Group Definitions............................................................................................129  
Communications Group Definitions..............................................................................135  
Alarms Group Definitions .............................................................................................139  
Display Group Definitions.............................................................................................143  
Maintenance Group Definitions....................................................................................144  
Power Up Diagnostic Tests..........................................................................................148  
Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys ..............................................................149  
Procedure for Entering a Security Code ......................................................................150  
Operator Interface........................................................................................................151  
Lower Display Key Parameter......................................................................................153  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5-5  
Table 5-6  
Table 5-7  
Table 5-8  
Table 5-9  
Table 5-10  
Table 5-11  
Table 5-12  
Table 5-13  
Table 5-14  
Table 5-15  
Table 5-16  
Table 5-17  
Table 5-18  
Table 5-19  
Table 5-20  
Table 5-21  
Table 5-22  
Error Messages............................................................................................................154  
Procedure for Starting Up the Controller......................................................................155  
Operating Mode Definitions..........................................................................................156  
Changing Operating Modes .........................................................................................157  
Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode....................................................158  
Procedure for Selecting the Local Setpoint Source......................................................160  
Procedure for Changing the Local Setpoints ...............................................................161  
Procedure for Enabling (or Disabling) the Remote Setpoint ........................................162  
Setpoint Selection Indication........................................................................................162  
Procedure for Configuring a Setpoint Ramp ................................................................164  
Procedure for Running a Setpoint Ramp .....................................................................166  
Procedure for Selecting Two Sets of Tuning Constants ..............................................168  
Procedure for Setting Switchover Values.....................................................................169  
Procedure for Setting Tuning Constant Values............................................................169  
Procedure for Switching PID SETS from the Keyboard...............................................170  
Procedure for Displaying or Changing the Alarm Setpoints.........................................171  
Control Loop Selections...............................................................................................172  
Two-loop Functionality and Restrictions (Model DC330E-EE-2XX or  
Model DC330E-EE-5XX)..............................................................................................175  
Two-loop Functionality and Restrictions (Model DC330E-KE-2XX or  
Table 5-23  
Model DC330E-KE-5XX)..............................................................................................176  
Procedure for Selecting 2-loop Algorithm ....................................................................177  
Procedure for Selecting Output Algorithm....................................................................177  
Procedure for Selecting Control Parameters ...............................................................178  
Procedure for Selecting Tuning Parameters................................................................179  
Digital Display Indication—Two Loops.........................................................................180  
Procedure for Displaying the 3PSTEP Motor Position .................................................182  
Digital Input Option Action on Contact Closure............................................................186  
Digital Input Combinations “DIG IN1” or “DIG IN2” ......................................................188  
Digital Inputs 1 and 2 Combination ..............................................................................189  
Auto/Manual Station Mode Configuration Procedure...................................................191  
Accutune Rules and Regulations.................................................................................195  
Procedure for Starting TUNE (Demand) Tuning ..........................................................196  
Procedure for Using TUNE at Start-up for Duplex .......................................................197  
Procedure for Using SP Tuning at Start-up..................................................................198  
Procedure for Using SP Tuning at Start-up for Duplex ................................................199  
Accutune* Error Prompt Definitions .............................................................................201  
Setpoint Program Data Entry Procedure......................................................................211  
Prompt Hierarchy and Available Selections .................................................................212  
Run/Monitor Functions.................................................................................................214  
Procedures for Changing a Running Setpoint Program...............................................217  
Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0% and 100% Range Values........................220  
Equipment Needed ......................................................................................................222  
Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath........................223  
Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Precision Resistor ..........224  
Input #1, #2, or #3 Calibration Procedure ....................................................................229  
Restoring Factory Calibration.......................................................................................231  
Set Up Wiring Procedure Current Proportional Output ................................................234  
Current Proportional Output Calibration Procedure .....................................................235  
Position Proportional and 3 Position Step Output Calibration Procedure ....................237  
Set Up Wiring Procedure for Auxiliary Output..............................................................240  
Auxiliary Output Calibration Procedure........................................................................241  
Error Message Prompts ...............................................................................................245  
Table 5-24  
Table 5-25  
Table 5-26  
Table 5-27  
Table 5-28  
Table 5-29  
Table 5-30  
Table 5-31  
Table 5-32  
Table 5-33  
Table 5-34  
Table 5-35  
Table 5-36  
Table 5-37  
Table 5-38  
Table 5-39  
Table 6-1  
Table 6-2  
Table 6-3  
Table 6-4  
Table 7-1  
Table 7-2  
Table 7-3  
Table 7-4  
Table 7-5  
Table 7-6  
Table 8-1  
Table 8-2  
Table 8-3  
Table 8-4  
Table 8-5  
Table 9-1  
x
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 9-2  
Table 9-3  
Table 9-4  
Table 9-5  
Table 9-6  
Table 9-7  
Table 9-8  
Table 9-9  
Table 9-10  
Table 9-11  
Table 9-12  
Table 9-13  
Table 9-14  
Table 9-15  
Table 9-16  
Table 9-17  
Table 9-18  
Table 9-19  
Table 9-20  
Table 9-21  
Table 9-22  
Table 9-23  
Table 10-1  
Table 10-2  
Table 11-1  
Table 11-2  
Procedure for Identifying the Software Version............................................................246  
Power-up Tests............................................................................................................247  
Procedure for Displaying the Status Tests Results......................................................248  
Status Tests .................................................................................................................249  
Background Tests ........................................................................................................250  
Controller Failure Symptoms........................................................................................252  
Troubleshooting Power Failure Symptoms ..................................................................253  
Troubleshooting Current Proportional Output Failure ..................................................254  
Troubleshooting Position Proportional Output Failure..................................................255  
Troubleshooting Time Proportional Output Failure ......................................................256  
Troubleshooting Time/Current or Current/Time Proportional Output Failure...............257  
Troubleshooting Alarm Relay Output Failure...............................................................258  
Troubleshooting a Keyboard Failure............................................................................259  
Troubleshooting a Communications Failure.................................................................260  
How to Remove the Chassis........................................................................................262  
Display/Keyboard Assembly Replacement Procedure.................................................263  
Printed Wiring Board Removal from Chassis...............................................................264  
Second Input Board Replacement Procedure..............................................................266  
Power Input Board Replacement Procedure................................................................266  
Digital Input Board Replacement Procedure................................................................267  
Aux.Out/Communications Board Replacement Procedure ..........................................268  
MCU/Output Board Replacement Procedure...............................................................269  
Parts Identification........................................................................................................272  
Parts Not Shown ..........................................................................................................272  
Manual Tuning Procedure for Simplex Control ............................................................274  
Manual Tuning Formulas .............................................................................................275  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xii  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1 – Overview  
1.1  
Introduction  
Function  
The UDC 3300 is a microprocessor-based stand alone controller. It  
combines the highest degree of functionality and operating simplicity  
offered in a 1/4 DIN size controller.  
With a typical accuracy of ± 0.20 % of span, the UDC 3300 is an ideal  
controller for regulating temperature and other process variables in  
numerous heating and cooling applications, in metal working, food, and  
pharmaceuticals, and testing and environmental work.  
Easy to read displays  
Easy to operate  
The dedicated vacuum fluorescent displays with multi-language prompts  
make the operator interface easy to read, understand and operate.  
Programmed sequences of displays assure quick and accurate entry of all  
configurable parameters.  
Simple keystrokes let you select input and range configuration, set the  
operating parameters that meet your process control needs now, and  
change them later to meet new ones.  
The tactile keyboard provides positive operator feedback. Self diagnostics,  
fault tolerant design and keyboard security provide maximum assurance  
of trouble-free operation.  
Mount anywhere  
The UDC is industrial control equipment that must be panel mounted.  
The wiring terminals must be enclosed within the panel. The UDC is  
environmentally hardened and, when suitably enclosed, can be mounted  
virtually anywhere in plant or factory; on the wall, in a panel, or even on  
the process machine. It withstands ambient temperatures up to 55 °C  
(133 °F) and resists the effects of vibration and mechanical shock.  
CE Conformity (Europe)  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the  
following European Council Directives: 73/23/EEC, the Low Voltage  
Directive, and 89/336/EEC, the EMC Directive. Conformity of this  
product with any other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be assumed.  
Product Classification: Class I: Permanently connected, panel-mounted  
Industrial Control Equipment with protective earthing (grounding).  
(EN61010-1).  
Enclosure Rating: Panel-mounted equipment, IP 00. This controller must  
be panel-mounted. Terminals must be enclosed within the panel. Front  
panel IP 65 (IEC 529).  
Installation Category (Overvoltage Category): Category II: Energy-  
consuming equipment supplied from the fixed installation, local level  
appliances, and Industrial Control Equipment. (EN61010-1)  
Pollution Degree: Pollution Degree 2: Normally non-conductive pollution  
with occasional conductivity caused by condensation. (Ref. IEC 664-1)  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMC Classification: Group 1, Class A, ISM Equipment (EN55011,  
emissions), Industrial Equipment (EN50082-2, immunity)  
Method of EMC Assessment: Technical File (TF)  
Declaration of Conformity: 51309602-000  
Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual, and  
the special conditions for CE conformity in Section 2.1, may invalidate  
this product’s conformity with the Low Voltage and EMC Directives.  
ATTENTION: The emission limits of EN 50081-2 are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an  
industrial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause  
harmful interference. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when  
the equipment is used closer than 30 meters (98 feet) to the antenna(e). In special  
cases, when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity, the user may  
have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic  
emissions of this equipment.  
2
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1.2  
Operator Interface  
Displays and indicators  
Figure 1-1 shows the operator interface and defines the displays and  
indicators. The function of the keys is shown in Table 1-1.  
Figure 1-1  
Operator Interface Displays and Indicators  
Upper Display - six characters  
• Normal Operation - four digits dedicated to display the process variable  
• Configuration Mode - displays parameter value or selection  
Lower Display - eight characters  
• Normal Operation - displays operating parameters and values  
• Configuration Mode - displays function groups and parameters  
T - Accutune in progress  
t - PV tune in progress  
L" - Loop 2 display  
Indicator definition when lit  
I - Cascade control  
F - °Fahrenheit being used  
C - °Centigrade being used  
MAN - controller in manual mode  
A - controller in automatic mode  
MAN and A off —  
communications  
option active  
C - Computer setpoint active  
O - Output override active  
R - Run SP ramp/program  
H - Hold SP ramp/program  
Indicator definition when lit  
ALM - Alarm conditions exist  
DI - Digital input active  
3 - LSP 3 active  
RSP - Remote SP or SP2 active  
F C  
1 2  
MAN  
ALM  
DI 1 2 3R  
Deviation Bargraph  
%
3300  
RSP  
OUT  
• Center bar indicates PV is  
within ±1% of setpoint.  
• Next bar will light if PV is  
between ±1% but less than  
±2% in deviation.  
• If PV is equal to or greater than  
±10% deviation, the center bar  
plus all ten deviation bars will  
light.  
OUT - Control relay 1 or 2 on  
1 2  
SP 3300  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
SETPOINT  
SELECT  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Keys - See Table 1-1  
RUN  
HOLD  
SET UP  
24157  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function of keys  
Table 1-1 shows each key on the operator interface and defines its  
function.  
Table 1-1  
Function of Keys  
Function  
Key  
SET UP  
• Places the controller in the Configuration Set Up group  
select mode. Sequentially displays Set Up groups and  
allows the FUNCTION key to display individual functions in  
each Set Up group.  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
• Used in conjunction with the SET UP key to select the  
individual functions of a selected Configuration Set Up  
group.  
• Used to switch the display between Loop 1 and Loop 2  
when the controller has a 2-Loop or Cascade configuration.  
• Used during field calibration procedure.  
LOWER  
• Selects an operating parameter to be shown in the  
DISPLAY  
lower display:  
OUT  
OT2  
= Output (Note 1)  
= Output 2 (Cascade or 2-Loop  
applications  
SP  
= Local Setpoint (also current SP value  
when using SP ramp) (Note 2)  
= Local Setpoint 2 (Note 2)  
= Local Setpoint 3 (Note 2)  
= Remote Setpoint  
2SP  
3SP  
RSP  
1IN  
= Input 1—when used with combinational  
input algorithms  
2IN  
= Input 2  
3IN  
= Input 3  
POS  
= 3 Position Step motor position when  
slidewire is connected  
CSP  
DEV  
= Computer Setpoint Override  
= Deviation  
PIDSETX  
2PIDSETX  
ET_XX.XX  
TR_XX.XX  
= Tuning Parameter Set X=1 or 2 (Note 3)  
= Loop 2 Tuning Parameter Set X=1 or 2  
= Elapsed Time  
= Time Remaining  
RAMPXXOM = Minutes Remaining in Setpoint Ramp  
*Or estimated Three Position Step motor position when no slidewire  
exists.  
4
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key  
Function  
LOWER  
1PV  
= For Cascade or 2 Loops  
DISPLAY  
2PV  
= For Cascade or 2 Loops  
AUX  
= Auxiliary Output  
OC1  
= Characterized Output 1  
OC2  
= Characterized Output 2  
SPn  
• (Sigma)  
BIA  
TUNE OFF  
TUNE RUN  
= Setpoint Now (for setpoint rate)  
= Current Totalizer Value  
= Output Bias/Manual Reset Value  
= Appears when Limit Cycle tuning is disabled  
= Press ▲ and LOWER DISPLAY to initiate  
Limit Cycle tuning.  
Display will read TUNE RUN.  
ToBEGIN  
OTI  
= Reset SP Program to start of first segment  
= Internal Loop 1 Output Value is being  
displayed (Override has been selected and  
Loop 1 is in Automatic mode.)  
Note 1: Value can be changed if in manual mode  
Note 2: Value can be changed via increment/decrement keys.  
Note 3: The selected set can be changed via increment/decrement  
keys.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
• Alternately selects:  
AUTO Lower display automatically displays setpoint  
value in engineering units.  
MAN  
Lower display automatically indicates output in %.  
SETPOINT  
SELECT  
• Hold key down to cycle through configured setpoints.  
RUN  
• Alternate action switch initiates or holds the Setpoint Ramp  
HOLD  
or Setpoint Program.  
• Acknowledges a latched alarm 1.  
• Increases the selected parameter value.  
• Decreases the selected parameter value.  
▲
▲
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2 – Installation  
2.1 Overview  
Introduction  
Installation of the UDC 3300 Controller consists of mounting and wiring  
the controller according to the instructions given in this section.  
Read the pre-installation information, check the model number  
interpretation and become familiar with your model selections, then  
proceed with installation.  
What’s in this section?  
This section contains the following information:  
Topic  
See Page  
2.1  
Overview  
Specifications  
7
8
2.2  
2.3  
2.4  
2.5  
Model Number Interpretation  
12  
13  
15  
Mounting  
Wiring  
Wiring Diagrams  
18  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
26  
27  
28  
29  
29  
30  
30  
31  
32  
32  
33  
Composite Wiring Diagram  
Line Voltage  
Input #1/Input #2  
Two HLAI  
Time Proportional Output  
Electromechanical  
Solid State  
10-amp Solid State  
Open Collector  
Current Output/Universal Output  
Two Current or Two Relay  
One Current (Auxiliary) and Three Relay  
Position Proportional Output  
Auxiliary Output  
Digital Inputs  
Communications  
RS422/485/Modbus  
DMCS  
Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA 2-wire Transmitter  
Using Open Collector Alarm 2 Output  
Using Auxiliary Output  
2.6  
Control and Alarm Relay Contact Information  
34  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pre-installation  
information  
If the controller has not been removed from its shipping carton, inspect  
the carton for damage and remove the controller. Inspect the unit for any  
obvious shipping damage and report any damage due to transit to the  
carrier.  
Make sure that the carton with the controller includes  
• a bag containing mounting hardware and  
• a bag containing input resistors.  
Check that the model number shown on the inside of the case agrees with  
what you have ordered.  
CE conformity special  
conditions (Europe)  
Shielded twisted pair cables are required for all Analog I/O, Process  
Variable, RTD, Thermocouple, dc millivolt, low level signal, 4-20 mA,  
Digital I/O, and computer interface circuits. Refer to the Severe Electrical  
Noise Environments document (51-52-05-01) for additional information.  
Specifications  
We recommend that you review the specifications and adhere to the  
operating limits listed in Table 2-1 when you install your controller.  
Table 2-1  
Specifications  
Design  
Input Accuracy  
± 0.20 % of span typical (± 1 digit for display)  
Field calibratable to ± 0.05 % of span typical  
15 bit resolution typical  
Sampling Rate  
Inputs sampled six times a second  
Temperature Stability  
± 0.01 % of Full Scale/°C change typical  
Input Signal Failure  
Protection  
Thermocouple Inputs: Upscale or downscale burnout  
Burnout Current: 0.13 microamps  
Failsafe Output Level: Configurable 0-100 %  
Input Impedance  
4-20 Milliampere Input: 250 ohms  
0-10 Volt Input: 200K ohms  
All Other: 10 megohms  
Maximum Lead Wire  
Resistance  
Thermocouples: 100 ohms/leg  
100, 200, and 500 RTD: 100 ohms/leg  
100 ohm Low RTD: 10 ohms/leg  
Stray Rejection  
Common Mode  
AC (50 or 60 Hz): 120 dB (with maximum source impedance of 100 ohms) or ± 1 LSB  
(least significant bit) whichever is greater with line voltage applied.  
DC: 120 dB (with maximum source impedance of 100 ohms) or a ±1 LSB whichever is  
greater with 120 Vdc applied.  
DC (to 1 KHz): 80 dB (with maximum source of impedance of 100 ohms) or ±1 LSB  
whichever is greater with 50 Vac applied.  
Normal Mode  
AC (50 or 60 Hz): 60 dB (with 100 % span peak-to-peak maximum)  
8
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Design (continued)  
Isolation (Functional)  
AC Power: Is electrically isolated from all other inputs and outputs to withstand a HIPOT  
potential of 1900 Vdc for 2 seconds per Annex K of EN61010-1.  
Analog Inputs and Outputs: Are isolated from each other and all other circuits at 850 Vdc  
for 2 seconds.  
Digital Input and Digital Output: Are isolated from all other circuits at 850 Vdc for 2  
seconds.  
Relay Contacts: With a working of 115/230 Vac, isolated from each other and all other  
circuits at 345 Vdc for 2 seconds.  
Alarm Outputs  
One SPDT electromechanical relay.  
A second alarm is available using the second control relay. This is not available with Relay  
Duplex, Position Proportional, or Three Position Step control.  
Alarm Relay Contacts Rating  
Resistive Load: 5 ampere at 120 Vac or 30 Vdc, 2.5 A at 240 Vac.  
Controller Output  
Types  
Current Output (Isolated)  
Range can be set anywhere between 0 to 21 mA, and as direct or reverse action.  
Resolution: 11 bits for 0 to 21 mA  
Accuracy: 0.5 % full scale  
Temperature Stability: 0.1 % F.S./°C  
Load Resistance: 0 to 1000 ohms  
Electromechanical Relays (One or Two)  
SPDT contacts. Both Normally Open and Normally Closed contacts are brought out to the  
rear terminals.  
Internally socketed  
Resistive Load: 5 amps @ 120 Vac or 30 Vdc, 2.5A at 240 Vac  
Inductive Load: 50 VA @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac  
Motor: 1/6 H.P.  
Solid State Relays (One or Two)  
SPST solid state contacts consisting of a triac N.O. output.  
Internally socketed  
Resistive Load: 1.0 amp @ 25 °C and 120 or 240 Vac  
0.5 amp @ 55 °C and 120 or 240 Vac  
Inductive Load: 50 VA @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac  
Minimum Load: 20 milliamps  
Open Collector Outputs (One or Two)  
Maximum Sink Current: 20 mA  
Overload Protection: 100 mA  
Internally powered @ 30 Vdc  
Opto-isolated from all other circuits except current output, but not from each other.  
Socketed jumper assembly replaces relay.  
Solid State Relays (10 amps)  
One or two externally mounted SPST triac N.O. outputs for use with open collector outputs.  
Resistive Load: 15 amps @ 25 °C and 120 or 240 Vac  
10 amps @ 55 °C and 120 or 240 Vac  
Inductive Load: 50 VA @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac  
Motor Rating:  
1 HP @ 25 °C  
0.75 HP @ 55 °C  
Controller Output  
Algorithms  
See Section 4.7.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Design (continued)  
Digital Inputs  
(Optional) (Isolated)  
+15 Vdc source for external dry contacts or isolated solid state contacts. The  
Digital Input option detects the state of external contacts for either of the two inputs.  
On contact closure the controller will respond according to how each digital input is  
configured. Opening contact causes return to previous state.  
Auxiliary Linear  
Output (Optional)  
(Isolated)  
21 mA dc maximum into a negative or positive grounded load or non-grounded load of 0 to  
1000 ohms.  
Output range can be set anywhere between 0 mA to 21 mA, and as direct or reverse  
action. It can be configured to represent either Input, PV, Setpoint, Deviation, or Control  
output. The range of the auxiliary output, as a function of the selected variable, can be  
scaled. This output can be used as a second current output for current duplex outputs.  
Resolution: 12 bits over 0 mA to 21 mA  
Accuracy: 0.05 % of full scale  
Temperature Stability: 0.0075 % F.S./°C  
Load Resistance: 0 to 1000  
Communications  
Interface (Optional)  
DMCS  
Baud Rate: 19200 baud  
Length of Link: 4000 ft. maximum  
Link Characteristics: Two-wire, multi-drop proprietary protocol, 31 drops maximum  
RS422/485 ASCII  
Baud Rate: 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 baud selectable  
Parity: Odd or Even  
Length of Link: 4000 ft. maximum  
Link Characteristics: Two-wire or four-wire, multi-drop RS422 ASCII, 15 drops maximum or  
up to 31 drops for shorter link length.  
RS422/485 Modbus  
RTU  
Baud Rate: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 baud selectable  
Data Format: Floating point or integer  
Length of Link: 4000 ft. maximum  
Link Characteristics: Two-wire, multi-drop Modbus RTU protocol, 15 drops maximum or up  
to 31 drops for shorter link length.  
Power Consumption  
Power Inrush Current  
18 VA maximum (90 Vac to 264 Vac); 12 VA maximum (24 Vac/dc)  
10A maximum for 4 ms (under operating conditions)  
CAUTION When applying power to more than one UDC 3300, make sure that sufficient  
power is supplied. Otherwise, the controllers may not start up normally due to voltage drop  
from the inrush current.  
Weight  
1.3 kg (3 lb.)  
10  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Environmental and Operating Conditions  
Parameter  
Reference  
Rated  
Operative  
Limits  
Transportation and  
Storage  
Ambient Temperature  
Relative Humidity  
25 ± 3 °C  
15 to 55 °C  
58 to 131 °F  
0 to 55 °C  
32 to 131 °F  
–40 to 66 °C  
–40 to 151 °F  
77 ± 5 °F  
10 to 55*  
10 to 90*  
5 to 90*  
5 to 95*  
Vibration  
Frequency (Hz)  
Acceleration (g)  
0
0
0 to 70  
0.4  
0 to 200  
0.6  
0 to 200  
0.5  
Mechanical Shock  
Acceleration (g)  
Duration (ms))  
0
0
1
30  
5
30  
20  
30  
Voltage (Vdc)  
+24 ± 1  
20 to 27  
90 to 240  
20 to 27  
20 to 27  
90 to 264  
20 to 27  
- -  
Voltage (Vac)  
90 to 240 Vac  
120 ± 1  
240 ± 2  
- -  
- -  
24 Vac  
24 ± 1  
- -  
Frequency (Hz)  
50 ± 0.2  
60 ± 0.2  
49 to 51  
59 to 61  
48 to 52  
58 to 62  
- -  
- -  
(For Vac)  
* The maximum rating only applies up to 40 °C (104 °F). For higher temperatures, the RH specification is derated to  
maintain constant moisture content.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.2 Model Number Interpretation  
Model number  
The model number interpretationis shown in Figure 2-1. Write the model  
number into the spaces provided and compare it to the model number  
interpretation. This information will also be useful when you wire your  
controller.  
Figure 2-1  
Model Number Interpretation  
Key Number  
Table I  
Table II  
Table III  
Table IV  
Table V  
Table VI  
D C 3 3 0  
0
Manuals  
B
E
L
= Basic Controller Model  
0 –  
F –  
G –  
T –  
S –  
= English  
= French  
= German  
= Italian  
= Expanded Controller Model  
= Limit Controller Model  
= Basic Model with UDC 3000 DMCS  
Functionality  
D
= Spanish  
Certificate  
– 0  
– C  
= None  
= Certificate of Conformance  
(F3391)  
Output #1  
C0  
=
Current without Alarms or Output 2  
K –  
E –  
A –  
S –  
T –  
= Current with Alarm 1  
= Relay, E-M with Alarm 1  
= Relay, SS 1 amp with Alarm 1  
= Relay, SS 10 amp with Alarm 1  
= Open Collector Output  
Options  
0 – – – – –  
1 – – – – –  
– 0 – – – –  
– A – – – –  
– F – – – –  
=
=
90 to 264 Vac Power  
24 Vac/dc Power  
Output #2 or Alarm #2  
= None  
= CSA, FM, and UL  
= FM and UL  
– 0  
– E  
– A  
– S  
– T  
= None  
= Relay, E-M  
= Relay, SS 1 amp  
= Relay, SS 10 amp  
= Open Collector Output  
– – 0 – – –  
=
Gray Elastomer Bezel  
= Blue Elastomer Bezel  
= Tan Elastomer Bezel  
= None  
– – B – – –  
– – T – – –  
– – – 0 – –  
– – – P – –  
– – – T – –  
– – – U – –  
– – – – 0 –  
– – – – D –  
= Rear Terminal Cover  
= Customer ID Tag  
= Rear Terminal Cover & Tag  
= None  
External Interface  
0 – –  
1 – –  
2 – –  
4 – –  
5 – –  
=
=
=
=
=
None  
RS422/485 ASCII / Modbus  
Auxiliary Output (Loop 2 Current Output)  
DMCS Communications  
= DIN Cutout Adapter  
– – – – – 0  
=
None  
Auxiliary Output + RS422/485 /Modbus  
Software Options  
PV Input  
– 0 –  
– 1 –  
=
=
Standard Functions (includesAccutune II)  
Standard Functions (includesAccutune II  
and HealthWatch)  
1 –  
2 –  
3 –  
= T/C, RTD, Radiamatic, mV, 0-5V, 1-5V  
= T/C, RTD, Radiamatic, mV, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20 mA  
= T/C, RTD, Radiamatic, mV, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20 mA,  
0-10V  
– A –  
– B –  
– C –  
– D –  
– E –  
= Setpoint Programming (SPP)—DMCS Model  
= SPP  
= Math Option + SPP  
= 2 Loops/Internal Cascade + SPP  
= Math Option + 2 Loops/Internal Cascade +  
SPP  
1 5  
1 6  
= Relative Humidity (includes optional input)  
= Carbon, Oxygen, orDewpoint (includes optional input)  
Optional Input(s)  
– 0  
– 1  
– 2  
– 3  
= None  
= T/C, RTD, Radiamatic, mV, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20 mA  
= Slidewire Input  
= T/C, RTD, Radiamatic, mV, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20 mA,  
0-10V  
– F –  
– G –  
= Math Option + SPP + HealthWatch  
= 2 Loops/Internal Cascade + SPP +  
HealthWatch  
= Math Option + 2 Loops/Internal Cascade +  
SPP + HealthWatch  
– H –  
– 4  
= Two High Level AIs instead of 2nd Universal AI  
24151  
Digital Inputs  
– – 0  
– – 3  
=
=
None  
Two Digital Inputs  
12  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.3 Mounting  
Physical considerations  
The controller can be mounted on either a vertical or tilted panel using the  
mounting kit supplied. Adequate access space must be available at the  
back of the panel for installation and servicing activities.  
The overall dimensions and panel cutout requirements for mounting the  
controller are shown in Figure 2-2.  
Overall dimensions  
Figure 2-2 shows the overall dimensions for mounting the controller.  
Figure 2-2  
Dimensions  
+0.008  
-0.0  
+0.03  
-0.0  
92  
3.622  
96  
3.780  
L
L
ALM  
F C  
MAN  
1 2  
DI  
123  
%  
RSP  
OUT  
1 2  
96  
+0.008  
-0.0  
+0.03  
-0.0  
92  
3.622  
Panel Cutout  
3.780  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
FUNCTION  
L1/L2  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
SETPOINT  
SELECT  
RUN  
HOLD  
SET UP  
24 Max Panel  
.945 Thickness  
2.4  
.093  
with optional  
rear cover  
10  
.394  
Max (2)  
90.7  
3.57  
21.6  
.850  
147.3  
5.82  
24152  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mounting method  
Before mounting the controller, refer to the nameplate on the inside of the  
case and make a note of the model number. It will help later when  
selecting the proper wiring configuration.  
Figure 2-3 shows you the mounting method for the UDC 3300 controller.  
Figure 2-3  
Mounting Method  
Panel  
22605  
Mounting procedure  
Refer to Figure 2-3 and follow the procedure in Table 2-2 to mount the  
controller.  
Table 2-2  
Procedure for Mounting the Controller  
Action  
Step  
1
Mark and cut out the controller hole in the panel according to the dimension  
information in Figure 2-2.  
2
Remove the screw cover and loosen the screw on the front of the controller.  
Pull the chassis out of the case.  
3
4
Orient the case properly and slide it through the panel hole from the front.  
Remove the mounting kit from the shipping container, and install the kit as  
follows:  
•
•
Install the screws into the threaded holes of the clips.  
Insert the prongs of the clips into the two holes in the top and  
bottom of the case.  
•
•
Tighten both screws to secure the case against the panel.  
Carefully slide the chassis assembly into the case, press to close and  
tighten the screw. Replace the screw cover.  
14  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4 Wiring  
Electrical  
considerations  
The controller is considered “rack and panel mounted equipment” per  
EN 61010-1, Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for  
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 1: General  
Requirements. Conformity with 72/23/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive  
requires the user to provide adequate protection against a shock hazard.  
The user shall install this controller in an enclosure that limits  
OPERATOR access to the rear terminals.  
Controller grounding  
PROTECTIVE BONDING (grounding) of this controller and the  
enclosure in which it is installed shall be in accordance with National and  
local electrical codes. To minimize electrical noise and transients that may  
adversely affect the system, supplementary bonding of the controller  
enclosure to a local ground, using a No. 12 (4 mm2) copper conductor, is  
recommended.  
Control/alarm circuit  
wiring  
The insulation of wires connected to the Control/Alarm terminals shall be  
rated for the highest voltage involved. Extra Low Voltage (ELV) wiring  
(input, current output, and low voltage Control/Alarm circuits) shall be  
separated from HAZARDOUS LIVE (>30 Vac, 42.4 Vpeak, or 60 Vdc)  
wiring per Table 2-3.  
Electrical Noise  
Precautions  
Electrical noise is composed of unabated electrical signals which produce  
undesirable effects in measurements and control circuits.  
Digital equipment is especially sensitive to the effects of electrical noise.  
Your controller has built-in circuits to reduce the effect of electrical noise  
from various sources. If there is a need to further reduce these effects:  
• Separate External Wiring - separate connecting wires into bundles (see  
Table 2-3) and route the individual bundles through separate conduits  
or metal trays.  
• Use Suppression Devices - for additional noise protection, you may  
want to add suppression devices at the external source. Appropriate  
suppression devices are commercially available.  
ATTENTION For additional noise information, refer to document  
number 51-52-05-01, How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe  
Electrical Noise Environments.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Permissible wire  
bundling  
Table 2-3 shows which wire functions should be bundled together.  
NOTE  
For installation where high EMI/RFI noise cannot be avoided, we  
recommend you use shielded twisted pair wires for the signals in bundle 2.  
Table 2-3  
Permissible Wiring Bundling  
Wire Functions  
Bundle No.  
1
• Line power wiring  
• Earth ground wiring  
• Control relay output wiring  
• Line voltage alarm wiring  
2
Analog signal wire, such as:  
• Input signal wire (thermocouple, 4 to 20 mA, etc.)  
• 4-20 mA output signal wiring  
• Slidewire feedback circuit wiring  
• Digital input signals  
• Communications  
3
• Low voltage alarm relay output wiring  
• Low voltage wiring to solid state type control circuits  
Identify your wiring  
requirements  
To determine the appropriate diagrams for wiring your controller, refer to  
the model number interpretation in this section. The model number of the  
controller can be found on the inside of the case.  
16  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring the controller  
Using the information contained in the model number, select the  
appropriate wiring diagrams from the figures listed below and wire the  
controller accordingly.  
Wiring Requirements  
Composite Wiring Diagram  
Figure  
2-4  
Line Power 90–264 Vac or 24Vac/dc  
Input #1 and Input #2 Wiring  
Two HLAI Wiring  
2-5  
2-6  
2-7  
Time Proportional Output  
• Electromechanical Relay Output  
2-8  
2-9  
2-10  
2-11  
• Solid State Relay Output  
• 10-amp Solid State Relay Output  
• Open Collector Output  
Current Output/Universal Output  
• Two Current and Two Relay Outputs  
• One Current (Auxiliary) and Three Relay Outputs  
2-12  
2-13  
Position Proportional Output  
2-14  
2-15  
2-16  
Auxiliary Output Wiring  
Digital Inputs Wiring  
Communications Wiring  
• RS422/485/Modbus  
• DMCS  
2-17  
2-18  
Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA 2-wire Transmitters  
• Open Collector Alarm 2 Output  
• Auxiliary Output  
2-19  
2-20  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.5 Wiring Diagrams  
Composite wiring  
diagram  
Figure 2-4 is a composite wiring diagram of the UDC 3300 controller. It  
identifies the terminal designations and their functions. Refer to the  
individual diagrams listed to wire the controller according to your  
requirements.  
Figure 2-4  
Composite Wiring Diagram  
Digital Inputs  
Terminals  
See Figure 2-16  
Outputs and Alarms  
Terminals  
• Time Proportional Output  
See Figures 2-8, 2-9, 2-10,  
2-11  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AC Line Voltage  
Terminals  
See Figure 2-5  
L1  
L2/N  
22  
• Current Output/Universal  
Output  
See Figures 2-12, 2-13  
Input #2 Terminals  
See Figure 2-6  
Two HLAI Terminals  
See Figure 2-7  
23  
• Position Proportional  
Output  
24  
25  
See Figure 2-14  
Input #1  
Terminals  
See Figure 2-6  
26  
For Control and Alarm Relay  
Contact information, See  
Tables 2-7 and 2-8.  
27  
Transmitter Power for  
4-20 mA 2-wire  
Auxiliary Output  
Terminals  
See Figure 2-15  
I/O shield ground  
(Do not use for  
Communications shield)  
Transmitters  
• Using Alarm 2 Output  
See Figure 2-19  
Communications  
Terminals  
See Figures  
2-17, 2-18  
• Using Auxiliary Output  
See Figure 2-20  
24158  
18  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line voltage wiring  
This equipment is suitable for connection to 90-264 Vac or 24 Vac/dc,  
50/60 Hz, power supply mains. It is the user’s responsibility to provide a  
switch and non-time delay (North America), quick-acting, high breaking  
capacity, Type F, (Europe) 1/2 A, 250 V fuse(s) or circuit-breaker for 90-  
264 V; or 1 A, 125 V fuse or circuit breaker for 24 Vac/dc operation, as  
part of the installation. The switch or circuit-breaker should be located  
close to the controller, within easy reach of the operator. The switch or  
circuit-breaker should be marked as the disconnecting device for the  
controller (4 mm2).  
CAUTION  
Applying 90-264 Vac to a controller rated for 24 Vac/dc  
will severely damage the controller and is a fire and smoke hazard.  
When applying power to multiple instruments, make sure that sufficient  
current is supplied. Otherwise, the instruments may not start up normally  
due to the voltage drop caused by the in-rush current.  
Figure 2-5 shows the wiring connections for line voltage.  
Figure 2-5  
Line Voltage Wiring  
1
Ground  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
Hot  
AC/DC  
Line  
Voltage  
L1  
L2/N  
22  
Neutral  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
22607  
PROTECTIVE BONDING (grounding) of this controller and the enclosure in which it is installed, shall be  
in accordance with National and local electrical codes. To minimize electrical noise and transients that  
may adversly affect the system, supplementary bonding of the controller enclosure to a local ground,  
using a No. 12 (4 mm 2) copper conductor, is recommended.  
1
Provide a switch and non-time delay (North America), quick-acting, high breaking capacity, Type F, (Europe)  
1/2 A, 250 V fuse(s) or circuit-breaker for 90-264 V; or 1 A, 125 V fuse or circuit breaker for 24 Vac/dc  
operation, as part of the installation.  
2
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input #1/Input #2  
connections  
Figure 2-6 shows the wiring connections for Input #1 and Input #2.  
Figure 2-6  
Refer to Table 2-4 for Input 2 Jumper selections.  
mV or Volts  
Input #1/Input #2 Connections  
3
INPUT #2  
Thermocouple  
RTD  
except 0-10 Volts  
Use Thermocouple  
extension wire only  
mV or Volt  
source  
1
1
22 R  
23 +  
22 R  
23 +  
The 250Ω load resistor for  
4-20 mA or the voltage divider  
for 0-10 volts or the 500 ohm  
C/J compensation resistor is  
supplied with the controller  
when the input is specified.  
These items must be installed  
when you wire the controller  
before start-up.  
22 R  
23  
+
–
+
24  
24  
–
–
24 –  
Remove screw and  
install C/J on the "R" terminal,  
connect tang to "–" terminal.  
2
0-10 Volts  
4-20 milliamps  
–
Input #2 is not  
available with  
Position  
Proportional  
Output.  
22 R  
23  
22 R  
+
1
100K  
0–10  
Xmitter  
1
Volt  
source  
2
+
1
23  
+
+
250Ω  
Power  
100K 3  
–
24 –  
1
24 –  
10  
11  
L2/N 12  
+
–
Supply  
L1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
R
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
+
–
R
+
8
9
–
3
INPUT #1  
2
When installing the cold  
junction (Part number  
30757088-001) for a T/C  
input, remove the screws  
from terminals 25 and 27  
(Input 1) or 22 and 24 (Input  
2), and install the assembly  
into place.  
Carbon, mV or Volts  
except 0-10 Volts  
Thermocouple  
RTD  
Use Thermocouple  
extension wire only  
Carbon,  
1
mV or Volt  
source  
25 R  
26 +  
25 R  
26 +  
25 R  
26  
+
+
27  
27  
–
–
27 –  
Remove screw and  
install C/J on the "R" terminal,  
connect tang to "–" terminal.  
–
3
2
For Relative Humidity  
option, use Input 1 as the  
0-10 Volts  
4-20 milliamps  
–
wet bulb input and Input 2  
as the dry bulb input.  
For Carbon Potential  
option, use Input 1 as the  
25 R  
26  
25 R  
+
1
100K  
0–10  
Xmitter  
1
Volt  
source  
2
Carbon Probe input.  
+
1
26  
+
+
250Ω  
Power  
100K 3  
–
27 –  
27 –  
+
–
Supply  
24159  
20  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Two HLAI replace  
second LLAI  
connections  
Figure 2-7 shows the wiring connections for replacing the second LLAI  
with two HLAI.  
Figure 2-7  
Two HLAI Replace 2nd LLAI Connections  
10  
11  
1
L1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ATTENTION:  
Remove Input 2 jumper when  
High Level  
Analog Input  
Connections  
See Below  
L2/N 12  
+
+
–
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
replacing second LLAI with two  
HLAI. Refer to Table 2-4.  
1-5V Connections  
4-20 mA Connections  
Transmitter 3  
22  
+
+
1
250Ω  
Input 3 Source  
22  
+
+
23 +  
–
250Ω  
1
23 +  
–
–
Transmitter 2  
24  
+
–
24  
Input 2 Source  
–
+
+ –  
Power  
Supply  
–
24161  
1
The 250Ω load resistors are supplied by Honeywell with the controller when the input is  
specified. These items must be installed when you wire the controller before start-up.  
Input 2 jumper  
Table 2-4 shows the location of the second input jumper and the input  
types available for each jumper position.  
Table 2-4  
Input 2 Jumper Selections  
Jumper  
Location  
2nd Input  
Power/Input PWA  
W2  
W1  
24162  
Jumper  
Position  
W1  
W2  
None (remove jumper)  
Two HLAI replace LLAI  
Input Types  
Available  
Slidewire  
Thermocouple, RTD, mV,  
Radiamatic, Carbon, Oxygen,  
4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, 1-5 V, 0-5 V  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Time proportional  
output  
There are three types of Time Proportional outputs available on the  
UDC 3300.  
• Electromechanical Relay Output (Model DC330X-EE-XXX)–Figure 2-8  
• Solid State Relay Output (Model DC330X-AA(SS)-XXX)–Figure 2-9  
• Open Collector Output (Model DC330X-TT-XXX)–Figure 2-11  
The Alarm wiring connections are the same for all three outputs.  
For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information, see Tables 2-7 and 2-8.  
Figure 2-8 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models  
with Electromechanical Relay Output.  
Figure 2-8  
Electromechanical Relay Output—Model DC330X-EE-XXX  
Time Proportional Simplex  
1
N.C.  
Output  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
L1  
L2/N  
22  
N.O2.  
3
Relay#1  
To terminal  
1 or 3  
2
4
N.C.  
Alarm  
Relay#2  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Alarm Relay #2 Load  
23  
N.O5.  
6
24  
To terminal  
4 or 6  
2
2
25  
7
N.C.  
Alarm  
Relay#1  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Alarm Relay #1 Load  
26  
N.O8.  
9
27  
To terminal  
7 or 9  
Time Proportional Duplex  
1
N.C.  
Output  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
L1  
L2/N  
22  
Relay#1  
N.O2.  
3
To terminal  
1 or 3  
2
4
N.C.  
Output  
Relay#2  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
23  
N.O5.  
6
1
To terminal  
4 or 6  
24  
2
25  
7
N.C.  
Alarm  
Relay#1  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Alarm Relay #1 Load  
26  
N.O8.  
9
27  
To terminal  
7 or 9  
2
1
2
Alarm #2 is not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control or Position Proportional Control.  
Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @120 Vac or 30 Vdc and 2.5 Amps at 240 Vac.  
24163  
Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
22  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Time proportional  
output, continued  
Figure 2-9 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models  
with Solid State Relay Output (Model DC330X-AA-XX).  
For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information, see Tables 2-7 and 2-8.  
Figure 2-9  
Solid State Relay Output—Model DC330X-AA-XX  
Time Proportional Simplex  
1
2
AC Load  
Supply  
Power  
L1  
L2/N  
22  
Output  
Relay#1  
N.O.  
3
Relay Load  
3
4
Dummy Resistor  
1
N.C.  
Alarm  
Relay#2  
AC Load  
Supply  
Power  
Alarm Relay #2 Load  
23  
5
N.O.  
24  
6
7
To terminal  
4 or 6  
4
25  
N.C.  
Alarm  
Relay#1  
AC Load  
Supply  
Power  
Alarm Relay #1 Load  
26  
8
N.O.  
27  
9
4
To terminal  
7 or 9  
Time Proportional Duplex  
1
2
AC Load  
Supply  
Power  
L1  
L2/N  
22  
Output  
Relay#1  
3
3
N.O.  
Relay Load  
3
4
5
1
1
Dummy Resistor  
AC Load  
Supply  
Power  
23  
Output  
Relay#2  
N.O.  
2
Relay Load  
24  
6
7
25  
Dummy Resistor  
N.C.  
Alarm  
Relay#1  
AC Load  
Supply  
Power  
Alarm Relay #1 Load  
26  
8
N.O.  
27  
9
To terminal  
7 or 9  
4
1
If the load current is less than the minimum rated value of 20 mA, there may be a residual voltage across both ends of  
the load even if the relay is turned off. Use a dummy resistor as shown to counteract this. The total current through the  
resistor and the load current must exceed 20 mA.  
2
3
4
Alarm #2 not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control or Position Proportional control.  
Solid State relays are rated at 0.5 amps. Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @120 Vac or 30 Vdc and 2.5 Amps at 240 Vac.  
Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
24164  
WARNING: Only connect Vac to solid state relays.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Time proportional  
output, continued  
Figure 2-10 shows the wiring connections for the external 10-amp Solid  
State Relay Output (Model DC330X-SS-XX).  
Figure 2-10  
10-amp Solid State Relay Output—Model DC330X-SS-XX  
L2/N  
L1  
LOAD  
HOT  
1
AC  
Solid  
State  
Relay  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
1
2
3
4
Black  
White  
+
–
L1  
Output 1  
Output 2  
L2  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
–
+
+ 5  
–
6
7
8
9
24165  
Green  
1
External solid state relays are rated at 15 amps @25°C derated to 10 amps at 55°C.  
Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
24  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Time proportional  
output, continued  
Figure 2-11 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models  
with Open Collector Output (DC330X-TT-XXX)  
For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information, see Tables 2-7 and 2-8.  
Figure 2-11  
Open Collector Output—Model DC330X-TT-XXX  
Time Proportional Simplex  
Customer Supplied  
Electromechanical Relay  
Customer Supplied  
Solid State Relay  
3
1
1
+
+
–
2
3
4
+
–
2
3
4
+
–
Output #1  
1
Output #1  
1
–
N.C  
.
N.C  
.
Alarm  
Relay#2  
Alarm Relay  
#2 Load  
Alarm Relay  
#2 Load  
Alarm  
Relay#2  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
5
5
N.O.  
N.O.  
6
6
To terminal  
4 or 6  
To terminal  
4 or 6  
4
4
7
N.C  
8
N.O.  
7
N.C  
8
N.O.  
Alarm Relay  
#1 Load  
Alarm  
Relay#1  
Alarm  
Relay#1  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
.
.
Alarm Relay  
#1 Load  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
9
9
To terminal  
7 or 9  
4
To terminal  
7 or 9  
4
Time Proportional Duplex  
Customer Supplied  
Electromechanical Relay  
Customer Supplied  
Solid State Relay  
3
1
1
+
–
+
–
+
+
2
3
2
+
–
Output #1  
Output #1  
1 –  
–
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
4
+
+
–
5
+
–
Output #2  
Output #2  
1
2 –  
6
1
2
N.C7  
N.C  
.
Alarm  
Relay#1  
Alarm Relay  
#1 Load  
Alarm  
Relay#1  
Alarm Relay  
#1 Load  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
.
N.O8.  
N.O.  
9
9
To terminal  
7 or 9  
To terminal  
7 or 9  
4
4
Open collector outputs are internally powered.  
Connecting an external supply will damage the controller.  
1
2
3
CAUTION  
24166  
Alarm #2 not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control or Position Proportional control.  
Can also use10 amp solid state relay, Part Number 30756018-003  
Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @120 Vac or 30 Vdc and 2.5 Amps at 240 Vac.  
Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
4
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Current output/  
universal output  
connections  
Figure 2-12 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models  
with Current Output (Model DC330X-KE-XXX and Model  
DC330X-C0-XXX). See Table 2-5 for wiring restrictions.  
For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information, see Tables 2-7 and 2-8.  
Figure 2-12  
Current Output—Current /Time Duplex, Time/Current Duplex, Position Proportional,  
or Three Position Step Control  
See Table 2-7 for relay  
terminal connections for  
Output Algorithm selected.  
10  
11  
12  
1
2
3
4
+
L1  
L2/N  
22  
Current Output  
4–20 mA  
Controller Load  
0–1000 Ohms  
–
Output#1  
or  
Alarm#2  
Relay  
N.C.  
Output or Alarm  
Relay 2 Load  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
23  
5
N.O.  
24  
6
7
To terminal  
4 or 6  
1
1
Output#2  
or  
Alarm#1  
Relay  
25  
N.C.  
Output or Alarm  
Relay 3 Load  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
26  
8
N.O.  
27  
9
To terminal  
7 or 9  
For Duplex Current Output use Auxiliary Output for Output 2 (cool) (see Figure 2-14).  
ATTENTION:  
All current outputs are isolated from each other, case ground, and all inputs.  
Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @120 Vac or 2.5 Amps at 240 Vac.  
1
Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
Relays are NOT available on DC330X-C0-XXX.  
24167  
Table 2-5  
Universal Output Wiring Functionality and Restrictions for Figure 2-12  
Controller with Two Current Outputs and Two Relay Outputs  
SINGLE LOOP OR CASCADE CONTROL OUTPUT  
Output Type  
Time Simplex  
Current  
Current  
Not used  
Output 1  
Auxiliary  
Not used  
Relay #1  
N/A  
Relay #2  
Output 1  
Relay #3  
Alarm 1  
Not used  
Not used  
N/A  
N/A  
Alarm 2  
Alarm 1  
Position (not available on Not used  
Output 1  
Output 2  
Cascade Control)  
Time Duplex or TPSC  
Current Duplex 100%  
Current Duplex 50%  
Not used  
Output 1  
Not used  
Not used  
Output 2  
Not used  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Output 1  
Alarm 2  
Output 2  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Output 1  
Alarm 2  
Current/Time or  
Time/Current  
Output 1 or 2  
Output 1 or 2  
26  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Current output/  
universal output  
connections, continued  
Figure 2-13 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models  
with a Current Output (Auxiliary Output) and three Relay Outputs (Model  
DC330X-EE-2XX). See Table 2-6 for wiring restrictions.  
For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information, see Tables 2-7 and 2-8.  
Figure 2-13  
Auxiliary Output and Three Relay Outputs  
1
–
Auxiliary  
Load  
0-1000  
N.C.  
Output  
Relay#1  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
2
N.O.  
+
To terminal  
1 or 3  
3
4
2
Output  
Relay#2  
N.C.  
Connect  
shield to  
ground at  
one end  
only  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
5
N.O.  
1
To terminal  
4 or 6  
6
7
Alarm  
Relay#1  
2
16 +  
17 –  
N.C.  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Alarm Relay #1 Load  
8
N.O.  
9
To terminal  
7 or 9  
2
1
2
Alarm #2 is not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control or Position Proportional Control.  
Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @120 Vac or 2.5 Amps at 240 Vac.  
Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
All current outputs are isolated from each other, case ground, and all inputs.  
24160  
Table 2-6  
Universal Output Wiring Functionality and Restrictions for Figure 2-13  
Controller with One Current Output (Auxiliary Output) and Three Relay Outputs  
SINGLE LOOP OR CASCADE CONTROL OUTPUT  
Output Type  
Time Simplex  
Current  
Current  
N/A  
N/A  
Auxiliary  
Not used  
Relay #1  
Output 1  
Relay #2  
Alarm 2  
Relay #3  
Alarm 1  
Output 1  
Not used  
Not used  
Output 1  
Alarm 2  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Position (not available on N/A  
Output 2  
Cascade Control)  
Time Duplex or TPSC  
Current Duplex 100%  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Not used  
Output  
N/A  
Output 1  
N/A  
Output 2  
Alarm 2  
N/A  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
N/A  
Current Duplex 50%  
N/A  
(N/A)  
Current/Time or  
Time/Current  
N/A  
Output 1 or 2  
Output 1 or 2  
Alarm 2  
Alarm 1  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Position proportional  
output connections  
Figure 2-14 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models  
with Position Proportional Output or Three Position Step Control (Models  
DC330X-EE-XXX-X2, DC330X-AA-XXX-X2).  
For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information, see Tables 2-7 and 2-8.  
Calibration  
Position Proportional Output or Three Position Step models must have the  
output calibrated after installation (see Section 8—Position Proportional  
Output Calibration) to ensure that the displayed output (slidewire  
position) agrees with the actual final control element position.  
Three Position Step models only require that the motor time be entered.  
Full calibration is not required.  
Figure 2-14  
Position Proportional Output or Three Position Step—Models DC330X-EE-XXX-X2,  
DC330X-AA-XXX-X2  
Motor Power  
Supply  
4
Neutral  
Hot  
5 Amp Fast Blo fuse  
3
Slidewire 100 to 1000 Ω  
mechanically linked  
to motor  
Open Closed  
1
N.C.  
2
Output  
2
L1  
L2/N  
22  
Relay#1  
N.O.  
3
4
N.C.  
Output  
Relay#2  
5
23  
N.O.  
1
6
24  
7
Connect shield to ground  
at one end only  
25  
N.C.  
Alarm  
Relay#1  
Alarm Relay  
#1 Load  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
8
N.O9.  
26  
27  
To terminal  
7 or 9  
5 Amp Fast Blo fuse  
1
2
3
4
Alarm #2 is not available with Position Proportional output or Three Position Step control.  
Do not run slidewire cable in the same conduit as AC power.  
Electrical noise suppression may be required. Refer to Section 12.  
Slidewire input is not required for Three Position Step control but can be used for motor position indication.  
24168  
28  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auxiliary output  
connections  
Figure 2-15 shows the wiring connections for the Auxiliary Output option  
(Models DC330X-XX-2XX, DC330X-XX-5XX).  
Figure 2-15  
Auxiliary Output Connections—Models DC330X-XX-2XX, DC330X-XX-5XX  
For Duplex Current Output use Control Output for Output 1 (heat)  
Attention:  
L1  
Both current outputs (control and auxiliary) are isolated from  
each other, case ground, and all inputs.  
L2/N  
22  
23  
24  
15  
16  
+
Auxiliary Load  
25  
+
0 –1000Ω  
26 – 17  
27  
–
22619  
Connect shield to  
ground at one end only  
Digital inputs  
connections  
Figure 2-16 shows the wiring connections for the Digital Inputs option  
(Model DC330X-XX-XX3).  
Figure 2-16  
Digital Inputs Connections—Model DC330X-XX-XX3  
Digital Input  
Switch #1  
Digital Input  
Switch #2  
Connect shield  
to ground at  
one end only  
10  
11  
L1  
L2/N 12  
22 13  
Switch  
Common  
22620  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications option  
connections  
There are two types of Communications option available:  
• RS422/485/Modbus (Model DC330X-XX-1XX or  
DC330X-XX-5XX)—Figure 2-17 [also refer to Document  
#51-51-25-35 (RS422/485 ASCII) or #51-52-25-66 and #51-52-25-70  
(Modbus)]  
• DMCS (Model DC330X-XX-4XX)—Figure 2-18 (also refer to  
Document #82-50-10-23)  
Figure 2-17  
RS422/485/Modbus Communications Option Connections  
MODBUS OR  
RS422/485  
HALF DUPLEX  
L1  
Master  
L2/N 12  
1
SHD  
SHD  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
TX+/RX+  
TX–/RX–  
TX+/RX+  
TX–/RX–  
120 Ohm  
Resistor  
To Other  
Communication  
Instruments  
Do not run these  
lines in the same  
conduit as AC power  
CAUTION  
Do not mix half and  
full duplex wiring.  
(maximum 15)  
120 Ohm Resistor  
on Last Leg  
MODBUS OR  
RS422/485  
FULL DUPLEX  
L1  
Master  
SHD  
L2/N 12  
1
SHD  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
TX+  
RX+  
RX–  
TX+  
TX–  
120 Ohm  
Resistor  
TX–  
RX+  
RX–  
120 Ohm  
Resistor  
Do not run these  
lines in the same  
conduit as AC power  
Use shielded twisted pair cables  
(Belden 9271 Twinax or equivalent)  
To Other  
Communication  
Instruments  
1
120 Ohm Resistor  
on Last Leg  
(maximum 15)  
24169  
30  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 2-18 shows the wiring connections for the DMCS Communications  
option (Model DC330X-XX-4XX).  
Figure 2-18  
DMCS Communications Option Connections  
DMCS  
Communications  
DMCS is a proprietary  
protocol. Host computer  
must be either the  
Master  
L1  
L2/N  
22  
Honeywell Gateway 500  
or LPM Series 9000.  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
1
SHD  
SHD  
D +  
D +  
D –  
23  
D –  
24  
120 Ohm  
Resistor  
25  
26  
Do not run these  
lines in the same  
27  
conduit as AC power  
Use shielded twisted pair cables  
(Belden 9271 Twinax or equivalent)  
1
To Other  
Communication  
Instruments*  
*DMCS: Maximum 31 drops.  
120 Ohm Resistor  
on Last Leg  
24170  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmitter power for  
4-20 mA 2-wire  
transmitter—open  
collector alarm 2 output  
The wiring diagram example shown in Figure 2-19 (Model  
DC330X-XT-XXX) provides 30 Vdc at terminals 5 and 6 with the  
capability of driving up to 22 mA, as required by the transmitter which is  
wired in series.  
If the transmitter terminal voltage must be limited to less than 30 volts,  
you can insert a zener diode between the positive transmitter terminal and  
terminal 5. For example, an IN4733A zener diode will limit the voltage at  
the transmitter to 25 Vdc.  
Configure:  
A2S1TYPE = NONE  
A2S2TYPE = NONE  
Figure 2-19  
Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA 2-wire Transmitter Using Open Collector Alarm 2  
Output—Model DC330X-XT-XXX  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
1
2
L1  
If necessary, install zener diode here to  
reduce voltage at transmitter.  
L2/N  
22  
3
4
23  
+ 5  
2-wire  
Transmitter  
–
24  
6
7
8
9
25  
+
+
–
26  
27  
–
250 ohm  
resistor  
24171  
32  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmitter power for  
4-20 mA 2-wire  
transmitter—auxiliary  
output  
The wiring diagram example shown in Figure 2-20 (Model  
DC330X-XX-2XX or DC330X-XX-5XX) provides 30 Vdc at terminal 16  
with the capability of driving up to 22 mA, as required by the transmitter  
which is wired in series.  
If the transmitter terminal voltage must be limited to less than 30 volts,  
you can insert a zener diode between the positive transmitter terminal and  
terminal 16. For example, an IN4733A zener diode will limit the voltage  
at the transmitter to 25 Vdc.  
Configure:  
AUX OUT = OUTPUT  
Calibrate the Auxiliary Output using the procedure given in Section 8.4 –  
Auxiliary Output Calibration.  
ZERO VAL = 4095  
SPAN VAL = 4095  
Figure 2-20  
Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA 2-wire Transmitter Using Auxiliary Output—  
Model DC330X-XX-2XX or DC330X-XX-5XX  
L1  
L2/N  
22  
If necessary, install zener  
23  
24  
25  
26  
2-wire  
Transmitter  
diode here to reduce  
voltage at transmitter.  
15  
+16  
+
–
–
17  
+
27 –  
250 ohm  
resistor  
24172  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.6 Control and Alarm Relay Contact Information  
Control relays  
Table 2-7 lists the Control Relay contact information.  
ATTENTION Control relays operate in the standard control mode;  
i.e., energized when output state is on.  
Table 2-7  
Control Relay Contact Information  
Unit Power Control Relay  
Control Relay  
Contact  
#1 or #2 Output  
Indicator Status  
Wiring  
N.O.  
Open  
Off  
On  
Off  
N.C.  
Closed  
N.O.  
Open  
Closed  
Off  
On  
N.C.  
Closed  
Open  
Off  
On  
Alarm relays  
Table 2-8 lists the Alarm Relay contact information.  
ATTENTION Alarm relays are designed to operate in a failsafe mode;  
i.e., de-energized during alarm state. This results in alarm actuation  
when power is OFF or when initially applied, until the unit completes self  
diagnostics. If the unit loses power, the alarms will function.  
Table 2-8  
Alarm Relay Contact Information  
Variable NOT  
in Alarm State  
Variable  
in Alarm State  
Unit  
Alarm  
Power  
Relay  
Wiring  
Relay  
Contact  
Indicators  
Relay  
Contact  
Indicators  
N.O.  
N.C.  
N.O.  
N.C.  
Open  
Open  
Off  
On  
Off  
Off  
Closed  
Closed  
Open  
Closed  
Open  
Off  
On  
Closed  
34  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3 – Configuration  
3.1  
Overview  
Introduction  
Configuration is a dedicated operation where you use straightforward  
keystroke sequences to select and establish (configure) pertinent control  
data best suited for your application.  
What’s in this section?  
The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section.  
Topic  
Page  
35  
36  
38  
39  
40  
42  
44  
45  
47  
49  
53  
54  
56  
57  
58  
60  
62  
64  
66  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
75  
3.1  
Overview  
3.2  
Configuration Prompts  
How to Get Started  
Configuration Tips  
Configuration Procedure  
3.3  
3.4  
3.5  
3.6  
Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group  
Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group  
Setpoint Ramp/Rate/Programming Set Up Group  
Accutune Set Up Group  
3.7  
3.8  
3.9  
3.10  
3.11  
3.12  
3.13  
3.14  
3.15  
3.16  
3.17  
3.18  
3.19  
3.20  
3.21  
3.22  
3.23  
3.24  
3.25  
Algorithm Data Set Up Group  
Output Algorithm Set Up Group  
Input 1 Parameters Set Up Group  
Input 2 Parameters Set Up Group  
Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group  
Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group  
Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group  
Options Parameters Set Up Group  
Communications Parameters Set Up Group  
Alarms Parameters Set Up Group  
Display Parameters Set Up Group  
Calibration Group  
Maintenance Group  
Status Group  
Configuration Record Sheet for Basic and DMCS Models  
Configuration Record Sheet for Extended Model  
Prompts  
To assist you in the configuration process, there are prompts that appear in  
the upper and lower displays. These prompts let you know what group of  
configuration data (Set Up prompts) you are working with and also, the  
specific parameters (Function prompts) associated with each group.  
Figure 3-1 shows you an overview of the prompt hierarchy.  
As you will see, the configuration data is divided into 15 main Set Up  
groups plus prompts for calibration and prompts that show the status of  
the continuous background tests that are being performed.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.2  
Configuration Prompts  
Diagram: prompt  
hierarchy  
Figure 3-1 shows an overview of the UDC 3300 Set Up prompts and their  
associated Function prompts. Read from left to right.  
Figure 3-1  
Overview of UDC 3300 Prompt Hierarchy  
Function Prompts  
Set Up Group  
PROP BD  
or GAIN  
GAINVALn  
RATE MIN  
RSET MIN  
or  
RSET RPM  
MAN RSET  
PROPBD2  
or  
GAIN 2  
RATE2MIN  
RSET2MIN  
or  
RSET2RPM  
TUNING  
CYC SEC  
or  
CYC2 SEC  
or  
SECURITY  
LOCKOUT  
AUTO MAN  
SP SEL  
RUN HOLD PVEUVALx  
CYC SX3  
CYC2 SX3  
GAINVALx  
PROP3BD  
or GAIN3  
GAINVALn  
RATE3MIN  
PVEUVALx  
RSET3MIN MANRSET3  
PROPBD4  
or  
GAIN 4  
RATE4MIN  
RSET4MIN  
or  
RSET4RPM  
TUNINGL2  
SP RAMP  
or  
RSET3RPM  
CYC3 SEC  
or  
CYC3 SX3  
CYC4 SEC  
or  
CYC4 SX3  
GAINVALx  
SP RAMP  
SP PROG  
ToBEGIN  
TIME MIN  
FINAL SP  
END SEG  
SEGx SP*  
SP RATE  
EU/HR UP  
EU/HR DN  
EUHRUP2  
EUHRDN2  
STATE  
STRT SEG  
RAMPUNIT RECYCLES SOAK DEV PROG END  
* x = 1 to 12. Program concludes after segment 12  
SEGxRAMP  
or  
SEGxRATE  
*
ACCUTUNE  
FUZZY  
ACCUTUN2 SP CHANG  
KPG  
SP CHAN2  
KPG 2  
CRITERIA  
L DISP  
ACCUTUNE  
ALGORTHM  
CRITERA2  
AT ERROR  
or  
AT ERR2  
CONT ALG  
PIDLOOPS CONT2ALG OUT OVRD  
TIMER  
PERIOD  
START  
INP ALG1  
PCO SEL  
ALG2 INB  
Xx VALU2  
MATH K  
PCT CO  
CALC HI  
ATM PRES  
PCT H2  
CALC LO  
INP ALG2  
ALG2BIAS  
ALG1 INA  
MATH K2  
8SEG CH1  
TOT SEC  
ALG1 INB  
CALC HI  
ALG1 INC  
CALC LO  
Yx VALUE*  
TOT RATE  
ALG1BIAS  
ALG2 INA  
ALG2 INC  
Yx VALU2  
Xx VALUE*  
RSET ?  
8SEG CH2  
* x = 0 to 8  
TOTALIZER  
OUT ALG  
4-20 RNG  
OUT2 ALG  
RLYSTATE  
RLY TYPE  
OUT ALG  
36  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set Up Group  
Function Prompts  
IN1 TYPE  
XMITTER1  
EMISSIV1  
ANALYTIC  
ANALYTIC  
IN1 HI  
IN1 LO  
RATIO 1  
RATIO 2  
BIAS IN1  
BIAS IN2  
FILTER 1  
FILTER 2  
INPUT 1  
BURNOUT1  
IN2 TYPE  
XMITTER2  
EMISSIV2  
IN2 HI  
IN2 LO  
INPUT 2  
BURNOUT2  
IN3 TYPE  
XMITTER3  
PID SETS  
IN3 HI  
IN3 LO  
LSP’S  
RATIO 3  
BIAS IN3  
FILTER 3  
INPUT 3  
PV SOURC  
SW VALUE  
RSP SRC  
AUTOBIAS  
SP TRACK  
PWR  
MODE  
CONTROL  
PWR OUT  
OUTLoLIM  
MAN OUT  
PV 2 SRC  
SP HiLIM  
I Hi LIM  
SP HiLIM  
I Hi LIM  
SP LoLIM  
I Lo LIM  
ACTION  
OUT RATE  
DEADBAND  
PCT/M UP  
OUT HYST  
PCT/M DN  
FAILMODE  
OUTHiLIM  
FAILSAFE  
DROPOFF  
MINorRPM  
SW VALUE  
OUT RATE  
DEADBAND  
AUTO OUT  
FORCE MA  
SP LoLIM  
I Lo LIM  
PBorGAIN  
PID SETS  
ACTION  
LSP’S  
RSP SRC  
PCT/M DN  
FAILSAFE  
AUTOBIAS  
OUTHiLIM  
SPTRACK  
OUTLoLIM  
CONTROL2  
PCT/M UP  
FAILMODE  
DROPOFF  
AUX OUT  
or  
CUR OUT2  
4 mA VAL  
20mA VAL  
DIG IN 1  
DIG1 COM  
DIG IN 2  
DIG2 COM  
OPTIONS  
COM  
ComADDR2  
SHEDMODE  
ComSTATE Com ADDR  
SHEDTIME  
SHEDSP  
SHEDENAB  
UNITS  
PARITY  
BAUD  
DUPLEX  
WSFLOAT  
CSP2BIAS  
TX DELAY  
LOOPBACK  
CSP RATO  
CSP BIAS  
CSP2RATO  
A1S1 VAL  
A1S1 H L  
AL HYST  
A1S2 VAL  
A1S1 EV  
A2S1 VAL  
A1S2 H L  
BLOCK  
A2S2 VAL  
A1S2 EV  
A1S1TYPE A1S2 TYPE A2S1TYPE  
A2S2TYPE  
A2S2 EV  
ALARMS  
A2S1 H L  
A2S1 EV  
A2S2 H L  
ALM OUT1  
LANGUAGE  
DECIMAL  
DECIMAL2  
TEMPUNIT  
PWR FREQ  
RATIO 2  
DISPLAY  
CALIB  
USED FOR FIELD CALIBRATION  
TIME1  
HRS.MIN1  
COUNTS2  
TIME2  
HRS.MIN2  
COUNTS3  
TIME3  
HRS.MIN3  
RES TYPE  
COUNTER1  
FACT CRC  
COUNTS1  
MAINTNCE  
COUNTER2  
COUNTER3  
RESET ID  
VERSON  
FAILSAFE  
FAILSF 2  
RAM TEST  
CONFTEST  
CALTEST  
STATUS  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.3  
How To Get Started  
Read the configuration  
tips  
Read “Configuration Tips” shown on the next page. These tips will help  
you to easily and quickly accomplish the tasks at which you will be  
working when you configure your controller.  
Read configuration  
procedure  
Read “Configuration Procedure”. This procedure tells you how to  
access the Set Up groups, and the Function parameters within each of  
these groups that are shown in the Prompt Hierarchy in Figure 3-1.  
Set up groups  
The Set Up groups and Function parameters are listed in the order of  
their appearance. The list includes the name of the prompt, the range of  
setting selections available, the factory setting, and the section to  
reference for further details, if necessary.  
Parameter explanations  
or definitions  
If you need a detailed explanation of any prompt listed, refer to Section 4  
– Configuration Parameter Definitions.  
Section 4 lists the Set Up and Function prompts, the selections or range  
of settings that you can make for each, plus a detailed explanation or  
definition of each parameter.  
Configuration record  
sheet  
Located on the last page of this section is a “Configuration Record  
Sheet”. When you make your configuration selections, record them on  
this sheet. Then you will have a record of how the controller was  
configured.  
38  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4  
Configuration Tips  
Introduction  
Listed below in Table 3-1 are some tips that will help you enter the  
configuration data more quickly.  
Table 3-1  
Configuration Tips  
Tip  
Function  
Displaying Groups  
Use the SET UP key to display the Set Up groups. The group titles are listed in this  
section in the order that they appear in the controller.  
Displaying  
Functions  
Use the FUNCTION key to display the individual parameters under each group. The  
prompts are listed in the order of their appearance in each group.  
Scrolling  
To get to a Set Up group prompt more quickly, hold the SET UP key in. To get to a  
Function prompt more quickly, hold the FUNCTION key in. The display will scroll through  
the parameters.  
ATTENTION The prompting scrolls at a rate of 2/3 seconds when the SET UP or  
FUNCTION key is held in. Also, [ ] [ ] keys will move group prompts forward or  
backward at a rate twice as fast.  
When changing the value of a parameter, you can use a single [ ] or [ ] key. Hold the key  
in to increase the rate of change. Stop pressing the key for 1/2 second, then press again to  
restart at a slow rate.  
Changing values  
quickly  
When changing the value of a parameter, you can adjust a more significant digit in the upper  
display by holding in one key [ ] or [ ], and pressing the other [ ] or [ ] at the same time.  
The adjustment will move one digit to the left. Press the key again and you will move one  
more digit to the left. (Holding the [ ] and [ ] keys down will change the value twice as  
quickly.)  
When you change the value or selection of a parameter while in Set Up mode and decide not  
to enter it, press RUN/HOLD once, the original value or selection will be recalled.  
Restoring to the  
original value  
Exiting SET UP  
mode  
To exit Set Up mode, press the LOWER DISPLAY key. This returns the display to the same  
state it was in immediately preceding entry into the Set Up mode.  
If you are in Set Up mode and do not press any keys for 30 seconds, the controller will time  
out and revert to the mode and display that was being used prior to entry into Set Up mode.  
Timing out from  
Set Up mode  
When a key is pressed and the prompt “KEY ERROR” appears in the lower display, it will be  
for one of the following reasons:  
Key Error  
• parameter not available  
• not in Set Up mode, press SET UP key first  
• key malfunction, do keyboard test (operation)  
• Individual key locked out  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.5  
Configuration Procedure  
Introduction  
Each of the Set Up groups and their functions are pre-configured at the  
factory.  
The factory settings are shown in Tables 3-3 through 3-18 which follow  
this procedure.  
If you want to change any of these selections or values, follow the  
procedure in Table 3-2. This procedure tells you the keys to press to get to  
any Set Up group and any associated Function parameter prompt.  
If you need a detailed explanation of any prompt, refer to Section 4 –  
Configuration Parameter Definitions.  
Procedure  
Follow the procedure listed in Table 3-2 to access the Set Up groups and  
Function prompts.  
ATTENTION The prompting scrolls at a rate of 2/3 seconds when the  
SET UP or FUNCTION key is held in. Also, [ ] [ ] keys will move  
group prompts forward or backward at a rate twice as fast.  
Table 3-2  
Configuration Procedure  
Press  
Step  
Operation  
Select Set Up mode  
Result  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
1
SET UP  
Lets you know you are in the  
configuration mode and a Set Up group  
title is being displayed in the lower  
display.  
Lower Display  
TUNING *  
This is the first Set Up group title.  
Select any Set Up group  
2
3
Successive presses of the SET UP key will  
SET UP  
sequentially display the other Set Up group titles shown  
in the prompt hierarchy in Figure 3-1.  
You can also use the [ ] [ ] keys to scan the Set Up  
groups in both directions.  
Stop at the Set Up group title which describes the group  
of parameters you want to configure. Then proceed to  
the next step.  
Upper Display  
Select a Function Parameter  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
1.0  
Shows you the current value or selection  
for the first function prompt of the  
particular Set Up group that you have  
selected.  
Lower Display  
GAIN  
Shows the first Function prompt within  
that Set Up group.  
Example displays show Set Up group “Tuning”, Function  
prompt “Gain”, and the value selected.  
40  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step  
4
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Select other Function  
Parameters  
Successive presses of the FUNCTION key will  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
sequentially display the other function prompts of the  
Set Up group you have selected.  
Stop at the function prompt that you want to change,  
then proceed to the next step.  
Change the value or  
selection  
These keys will increment or decrement the value or  
selection that appears for the function prompt you have  
selected.  
5
or  
See “Configuration Tips” for instructions to increase or  
decrease value quickly.  
Change the value or selection to meet your needs.  
If the display flashes, you are trying to make an  
unacceptable entry.  
Enter the value or selection  
This key selects another function prompt.  
6
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
or  
This key selects another Set Up group.  
SET UP  
The value or selection you have made will be entered  
into memory after another key is pressed.  
Exit Configuration  
This exits configuration mode and returns the controller  
to the same state it was in immediately preceding entry  
into the Set Up mode. It stores any changes you have  
made.  
7
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.6  
Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group  
Function prompts  
Table 3-3 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning Set Up group. How  
the Algorithm and Control Set Up groups are configured determines  
which prompts will appear.  
Table 3-3  
Tuning Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
PROP BD  
or  
GAIN  
Proportional Band  
or  
Gain  
0.1 to 9999 %  
0.001 to 1000  
- -  
Section  
4.2  
1.000  
or  
or  
GAINVALn***  
Gain Value being used by  
Gain Scheduling when  
enabled in Control Setup  
group “PID SETS”  
Read Only  
- -  
RATE MIN  
Rate in Minutes  
0.00 to 10.00 minutes  
0.02 to 50.00  
0.00  
1.00  
RSET MIN  
or  
Reset in minutes/repeat  
or  
RSET RPM  
Reset in repeats/minute  
- -  
0
MAN RSET  
Manual Reset  
–100 to 100 % output  
0.1 to 9999 %  
PROPBD2  
or  
Proportional Band 2  
or  
- -  
GAIN 2  
Gain 2  
0.001 to 1000  
1.000  
0.00  
1.00  
- -  
RATE2MIN  
Rate 2 in Minutes  
0.00 to 10.00 minutes  
0.02 to 50.00  
RSET2MIN  
or  
RSET2RPM  
Reset 2 in minutes/repeat  
or  
Reset 2 in repeats/minute  
CYC SEC*  
or  
CYC SX3*  
Cycle Time (Heat)  
1 to 120  
1 to 120  
0 to 4095  
20  
CYC2 SEC*  
or  
CYC2 SX3*  
Cycle Time (Cool)  
20  
SECURITY  
LOCKOUT  
Security Code  
0
Configuration Lockout  
NONE  
CALIB  
+ CONF  
+ VIEW  
MAX  
CALIB  
AUTO MAN**  
SP SEL**  
Manual/Auto Key Lockout  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
ENABLE  
ENABLE  
Setpoint Select Key Lockout DISABL  
ENABLE  
*Cycle times are in either 1 second or 1/3 second increments, depending upon the RLY TYPE configuration in the  
Output Algorithm Set Up group.  
**Only appears if LOCKOUT = NONE.  
***Requires Math software option  
42  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
RUN HOLD**  
Run/Hold Key Lockout  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
ENABLE  
0
Section  
4.2  
PVEUVAL1  
PVEUVAL2  
PVEUVAL3  
PVEUVAL4  
PVEUVAL5  
PVEUVAL6  
PVEUVAL7  
PVEUVAL8  
PV1 (through PV8) Value for PV value within the PV limits.  
Gain Scheduling  
In engineering units  
GAINVAL1*  
GAINVAL2*  
GAINVAL3*  
GAINVAL4*  
GAINVAL5*  
GAINVAL6*  
GAINVAL7*  
GAINVAL8*  
Gain 1 (through Gain 8)  
Value for Gain Scheduling  
0.001 to 1000 floating  
Gain or Proportional Band  
1.000  
* ATTENTION If units of percent proportional band (PB) are selected under the Control Set Up prompt, function  
prompt PBorGAIN, then the displayed values are in %PB, but the lower display will still show Gain.  
**Only appears if LOCKOUT = NONE.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.7  
Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group (Cascade or  
Two Loops  
Function prompts  
Table 3-4 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning 2 Set Up group. This  
group is only displayed if the controller is configured for Cascade or  
2-Loop control (prompt PIDLOOPS in Algorithm Data Set Up group).  
Table 3-4  
Tuning Loop 2 Group Function  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
PROPBD3  
or  
Proportional Band 3  
or  
0.1 to 9999  
- -  
Section  
4.3  
GAIN 3  
Gain 3  
0.001 to 1000  
1.000  
or  
or  
GAINVALn  
Gain Value being used by  
Gain Scheduling when  
enabled  
Read Only  
- -  
RATE3MIN  
Rate 3 in Minutes  
0.00 to 10.00 minutes  
0.02 to 50.00  
0.00  
1.00  
- -  
RSET3MIN  
or  
RSET3RPM  
Reset 3 in minutes/repeat  
or  
Reset 3 in repeats/minute  
MANRSET3  
Manual Reset 3  
–100 to 100 % Output  
0.1 to 9999 %  
0.0  
- -  
PROPBD4  
or  
Proportional Band 4  
or  
GAIN 4  
Gain 4  
0.001 to 1000  
1.000  
0.00  
1.00  
- -  
RATE4MIN  
Rate 4 in Minutes  
0.00 to 10.00 minutes  
0.02 to 50.00  
RSET4MIN  
or  
RSET4RPM  
Reset 4 in minutes/repeat  
or  
Reset 4 in repeats/minute  
CYC3 SEC*  
or  
CYC3 SX3*  
Cycle Time 3 (Heat)  
1 to 120  
1 to 120  
20  
20  
0
CYC4 SEC*  
or  
CYC4 SX3*  
Cycle Time 4 (Cool)  
PVEUVAL1  
PVEUVAL2  
PVEUVAL3  
PVEUVAL4  
PVEUVAL5  
PVEUVAL6  
PVEUVAL7  
PVEUVAL8  
PV1 (through PV8) Value for PV value within the PV limits.  
Gain Scheduling  
In engineering units  
GAINVAL1**  
GAINVAL2**  
GAINVAL3**  
GAINVAL4**  
GAINVAL5**  
GAINVAL6**  
GAINVAL7**  
GAINVAL8**  
Gain 1 (through Gain 8)  
Value for Gain Scheduling  
0.001 to 1000 floating  
Gain or Proportional Band  
1.000  
*Cycle times are in either 1 second or 1/3 second increments, depending upon the RLY TYPE configuration in the  
Output Algorithm Set Up group.  
** ATTENTION If units of percent proportional band (PB) are selected under the Control Set Up prompt, function  
prompt PBorGAIN, then the displayed values are in %PB, but the lower display will still show Gain.  
44  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.8  
SP Ramp, SP Rate, or SP Programming Set Up Group  
Single Setpoint Ramp  
The Setpoint Ramp Set Up group contains the Function parameters that let  
you configure a single setpoint ramp to occur between the current local  
setpoint and a final setpoint over a time interval (SP RAMP).  
Setpoint rate  
The Setpoint Ramp Set Up group also contains the function parameters  
that let you configure a specific rate of change for any Local Setpoint  
change (SP RATE). It includes selections for Rate Up and Rate Down.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-5 lists all the function prompts in the SP Ramp Set Up group.  
Table 3-5  
Function  
SP Ramp Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Name  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
If SP Rate and SP Programming are disabled  
SP RAMP  
Single Setpoint Ramp  
Selection  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
ENABL2  
ENAB12  
DISABL  
Section  
4.4  
TIME MIN  
FINAL SP  
Single Setpoint Ramp Time  
(SP ramp enabled)  
0 to 255 minutes  
3
Single Setpoint Final  
Enter a value within the setpoint limits.  
1000  
Setpoint (SP ramp enabled)  
If SP Ramp and SP Programming are disabled  
SP RATE  
Setpoint Rate  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
ENABL2  
ENAB12  
DISABL  
EU/HR UP  
EU/HR DN  
EU/HRUP2  
EU/HRDN2  
Rate Up Value for  
Loop 1 (SP Rate enabled)  
0 to 9999  
in engineering units per hour  
0
0
0
0
Rate Down Value for  
Loop 1 (SP Rate enabled)  
0 to 9999  
in engineering units per hour  
Rate Up Value for  
Loop 2 (SP Rate enabled)  
0 to 9999  
in Units per Hour  
Rate Down Value for  
0 to 9999  
Loop 2 (SP Rate enabled)  
in Units per Hour  
If SP Ramp and SP Rate are disabled  
SP PROG*  
Setpoint Ramp/Soak  
Programming  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
ENABL2  
ENAB12  
DISABL  
SP PROG must be enabled to view  
the remaining prompts.  
STRT SEG  
END SEG  
Start Segment Number  
End Segment Number  
1 to 11  
––  
––  
2 to 12  
Always end in a soak segment  
(2, 4, ... 12)  
RAMPUNIT  
Engineering Units for Ramp  
Segments  
TIME  
(hours.minutes)  
TIME  
EU/MIN (engineering units/minute)  
EU/HR (engineering units/hour)  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
RECYCLES  
SOAK DEV  
Number of Program  
Recycles  
0 to 99 recycles  
––  
––  
Section  
4.4  
Guaranteed Soak Deviation  
Value  
0 to 99  
The number selected will be the PV  
value (in engineering units) above or  
below the setpoint outside of which  
the timer halts.  
PROG END  
Program Termination State  
LASTSP (Hold at last setpoint in the  
program)  
––  
F SAFE (Manual mode/Failsafe  
output)  
STATE  
Program State at Program  
End  
DISABL  
HOLD  
––  
KEYRESET  
Reset/Rerun SP Program  
DISABL  
TOBEGN  
RERUN  
DISABL  
HOTSTART  
Hot Start  
DISABL  
ENABL  
DISABL  
––  
SEG1RAMP or  
SEG1RATE  
Segment #1 Ramp Time or  
Segment #1 Ramp Rate  
0-99 hours.0-59 minutes  
Engineering units/minute or  
Engineering units/hour  
Select TIME, EU/MIN, or EU/HR at  
prompt RAMPUNIT. All ramps will  
use the same selection.  
SEG2 SP  
Segment #2 Soak Setpoint  
Value  
Within the Setpoint limits  
––  
SEG2TIME  
Segment #2 Soak Duration  
Same as above  
0-99 hours.0-59 minutes  
––  
––  
SEG3RAMP or  
SEG3RATE  
SEG4 SP  
Selections are same as above.  
SEG4TIME  
SEG5RAMP or  
SEG5RATE  
SEG6 SP  
SEG6TIME  
SEG7RAMP or  
SEG7RATE  
SEG8 SP  
SEG8TIME  
SEG9RAMP or  
SEG9RATE  
SG10 SP  
SG10TIME  
SG11RAMP or  
SG11RATE  
SG12 SP  
SG12TIME  
*Requires SP Programming option  
46  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.9  
Accutune Set Up Group  
Introduction  
The Accutune Set Up group offers these selections:  
• FUZZY  
Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression—Uses fuzzy logic to suppress or  
eliminate any overshoot that may occur when the PV approaches  
setpoint.  
• TUNE  
Demand Tuning—The tuning process is initiated through the operator  
interface keys or via a digital input (if configured). The algorithm then  
calculates new tuning parameters and enters them in the tuning group.  
TUNE does operate with 3 Position Step Control.  
• SP*  
SP Tuning—SP tuning continuously adjusts the PID parameters in  
response to setpoint changes. You can select tuning on minimum  
setpoint changes of 5 % up to 15 % span. Perform SP tuning after you  
have configured the controller.  
SP tuning does not operate with 3 Position Step Control algorithm.  
• TUN+PV*  
or  
SP+PV*  
PV Tuning—The (TUNE) Demand Tuning or the (SP) Setpoint  
Tuning portions of these selections work as stated above. PV Adapt  
will occur during Process Variable (PV) disturbances (0.3 % span or  
larger) which result from non-linearities, process dynamics, load  
changes, or other operating conditions. When this condition exists, the  
controller monitors the process response for 1 and 1/2 process cycles  
around the setpoint to determine whether there has been a true process  
change or a momentary upset.  
Process retuning occurs as the process dynamics are learned. When the  
process is being learned with possible retune, a t is shown in the upper  
left display digit.  
*SP + PV Tuning not available on Basic Model DC330B.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-6 lists the function prompts in the Accutune Set Up group.  
Table 3-6  
Function  
Accutune Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Name  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
FUZZY  
Fuzzy Overshoot  
Suppression  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
ENABL2  
ENAB12  
DISABL  
Section  
4.5  
ACCUTUNE  
Accutune—Loop 1  
Accutune—Loop 2  
DISABL  
DISABL  
TUNE (Demand Tuning)  
SP (SP Tuning)  
TUN+PV  
SP+PV  
ACCUTUN2  
SP CHANG*  
DISABL  
DISABL  
TUNE (Demand Tuning)  
SP (SP Tuning)  
TUN+PV  
SP+PV  
Setpoint Change Value—  
Loop 1  
5 to 15 % Input Span  
10  
KPG*  
Process Gain—Loop 1  
0.10 to 10.00  
1.00  
10  
SP CHAN2*  
Setpoint Change Value –  
Loop 2  
5 to 15 % Input Span  
KPG 2*  
Process Gain – Loop 2  
Tuning Criteria—Loop 1  
0.10 to 10.00  
1.00  
CRITERIA*  
NORMAL  
FAST  
FAST  
CRITERA2*  
Tuning Criteria – Loop 2  
Accutune Error Codes  
NORMAL  
FAST  
FAST  
- -  
AT ERROR  
or  
Read Only  
RUNING (Accutune process in  
AT ERR 2  
(depending on  
Loop)  
operation)  
NONE  
OUTLIM  
IDFAIL  
ABORT  
LOW PV  
*Applies to SP and SP+PV only.  
48  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.10 Algorithm Data Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with various algorithms residing in the controller:  
• Control algorithms,  
• Input Math algorithms,  
• selecting the 1 or 2 PID Loops,  
• Output Override,  
• 2 Eight Segment Characterizers,  
• the Timer function, and  
• Totalizer function.  
• Gain Scheduler  
ATTENTION Math option (two algorithms, two characterizers,  
totalizer) and Two Loops of Control are only available on Expanded  
Model DC330E.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-7 lists all the function prompts in the Algorithm Set Up group.  
Table 3-7  
Function  
Algorithm Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Name  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
CONT ALG  
Control Algorithm  
ON-OFF  
PID A  
PID A  
Section  
4.6  
PID B  
PD+MR  
3PSTEP  
PIDLOOPS  
PID Loop Selection  
Control 2 Algorithm  
Output Override Select  
Timer Enable/Disable  
1 LOOP  
2LOOPS  
CASCAD  
1 or 2  
PID A  
(NOTE 1)  
CONT2ALG  
PID A  
PID B  
PD+MR  
(NOTE 1)  
OUT OVRD  
DISABL  
HI SEL  
LO SEL  
DISABL  
DISABL  
(NOTE 2)  
TIMER  
ENABLE  
DISABL  
PERIOD*  
START*  
Timeout Period  
Start Initiation  
00:00 to 99:59  
00:01  
KEY  
KEY (Run/Hold key)  
ALARM2  
L DISP*  
Lower Display Selection  
TI REM (time remaining)  
TI REM  
E time  
(elapsed time)  
*Prompt appears only when Timer is enabled.  
NOTE 1: Two Loops and Cascade are only available on Expanded Model DC330E.  
NOTE 2: Does not apply to Three Position Step Control.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
INP ALG1  
Input 1 Algorithm  
(formulas are located in  
Section 4)  
NONE  
W AVG  
MuDIV  
MULT  
NONE  
Section  
4.6  
F FWRD  
FFWDMu  
RELHUM  
SUMMER  
HI SEL  
LO SEL  
√MuDIV  
√MULT  
CARB A  
CARB B  
CARB C  
CARB D  
FCC  
DEW PT  
OXYGEN  
ATTENTION All Input  
Algorithms operate in  
engineering units except  
feedforward which operates  
in percent of output units.  
PV or RSP source in the  
Control Set Up group must  
be set to IN AL1.  
MATH K  
CALC HI  
Weighted Average Ratio or K 0.001 to 1000 floating  
Constant for Math Selections  
- -  
- -  
Calculated Variable High  
Scaling Factor for Input  
Algorithm  
–999. to 9999. floating  
(in engineering units)  
CALC LO  
ALG1 INA  
Calculated Variable Low  
Scaling Factor for Input  
Algorithm  
–999. to 9999. floating  
(in engineering units)  
- -  
- -  
Input Algorithm 1  
Input A Selection  
INP 1  
IN AL1  
INP 2  
LP1OUT  
LP2OUT  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
ALG1 INB  
ALG1 INC  
Input Algorithm 1  
Input B Selection  
INP 1  
INP 2  
LP1OUT  
LP2OUT  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
- -  
- -  
Input Algorithm 1  
Input C Selection  
NONE  
LP2OUT  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
INPUT 1  
INPUT 2  
LP1OUT  
PCO SEL  
PCT CO  
Percent Carbon Source  
(Input 3 must be enabled)  
DISABL  
ONLINE  
DISABL  
0.200  
Percent Carbon Monoxide  
0.020 to 0.350 (fractional percent of  
CO)  
ATM PRES  
ALG1BIAS  
INP ALG2*  
Atmospheric Pressure  
Compensation  
590.0 to 760.0 (mm Hg)  
760.0  
Input Algorithm1 Bias  
-999 to 9999 floating (in engineering  
units)  
0.000  
Input 2 Algorithm  
(formulas are located in  
Section 4)  
NONE  
LO SEL  
√MuDIV  
√MULT  
MuDIV  
MULT  
NONE  
W AVG  
F FWD  
FFWDMu  
A–B/C  
ATTENTION All Input  
Algorithms operate in  
engineering units except  
feedforward which operates  
in percent of range units.  
HI SEL  
DEW PT  
MATH K2  
Weighted Average Ratio or K 0.001 to 1000  
Constant for Math Selections  
- -  
50  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
CALC HI  
CALC LO  
ALG2 INA  
Calculated Variable High  
Scaling Factor for Input  
Algorithm 2  
–999. To 9999. Floating  
(in engineering units)  
- -  
- -  
- -  
Calculated Variable Low  
Scaling Factor for Input  
Algorithm 2  
–999. To 9999. Floating  
(in engineering units)  
Input Algorithm 2  
Input A Selection  
INP 1  
IN AL1  
INP 2  
LP1OUT  
LP2OUT  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
ALG2 INB  
ALG2 INC  
PCT H2  
Input Algorithm 2  
Input B Selection  
INP 1  
INP 2  
LP1OUT  
LP2OUT  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
- -  
- -  
Input Algorithm 2  
Input C Selection  
NONE  
INP 1  
INP 2  
LP2OUT  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
LP1OUT  
Hydrogen Content for  
Dewpoint  
1.0 to 99.0 %  
1.0  
ALG2 BIAS  
8SEG CH1*  
Input Algorithm2 Bias  
-999 to 9999 floating (in engineering  
units)  
0.000  
Eight Segment Characterizer DISABL  
DISABL  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
L1 OUT  
L2 OUT  
If Characterizer 1 is  
enabled, the following Xn  
VALUE and Yn VALUE  
parameters appear.  
X0 VALUE  
X1 VALUE  
X2 VALUE  
X3 VALUE  
X4 VALUE  
X5 VALUE  
X6 VALUE  
X7 VALUE  
X8 VALUE  
Xn Input Value (X Axis)  
(n = 0 through 8)  
0 to 99.99 %  
0
Y0 VALUE  
Y1VALUE  
Y2VALUE  
Y3VALUE  
Y4VALUE  
Y5VALUE  
Y6VALUE  
Y7VALUE  
Y8 VALUE  
Yn Output Value (Y Axis)  
(n = 0 through 8)  
0 to 99.99 %  
0
8SEG CH2*  
Eight Segment Characterizer DISABL  
DISABL  
2
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
L1 OUT  
L2 OUT  
If Characterizer 2 is  
enabled, the following Xn  
VALU2 and Yn VALU2  
parameters appear.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
X0 VALU2  
X1 VALU2  
X2 VALU2  
X3 VALU2  
X4 VALU2  
X5 VALU2  
X6 VALU2  
X7 VALU2  
X8 VALU2  
Xn Input Value (X Axis)  
(n = 0 through 8)  
0 to 99.99 %  
0
Y0 VALU2  
Y1 VALU2  
Y2 VALU2  
Y3 VALU2  
Y4 VALU2  
Y5 VALU2  
Y6 VALU2  
Y7 VALU2  
Y8 VALU2  
Yn Output Value (Y Axis)  
(n = 0 through 8)  
0 to 99.99 %  
0
TOTALIZE*  
ΣXXXXXXX  
TOT SCAL  
Totalization Function  
DISABL  
INPUT1  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
DISABL  
Current Scale Factor  
(upper display)  
Actual Current Totalized  
Value (lower display)  
- -  
Σ*En  
Whe re :  
n = To ta lize r Sc a le Fa c to r Va lue  
Totalizer Scale Factor  
*E0  
*E1  
*E2  
*E3  
*E4  
*E5  
*E6  
E0  
TOT SEC  
Σ RSET ?  
TOT RATE  
Totalizer Reset Lock  
Totalizer Reset  
UNLOCK  
LOCK  
UNLOCK  
NO  
NO  
YES  
Totalizer Rate of Integration  
SECOND (once per second)  
SECOND  
MINUTE  
HOUR  
DAY  
(once per minute)  
(once per hour)  
(once per day)  
ML/DAY  
(millions per day)  
*Not available on DC330B  
52  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.11 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with various Output types that are available for use in the  
controller. It also lists the Digital Output Status, the Current Duplex  
functionality, and Relay Time Cycle increments.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-8 lists all the function prompts in the Output Algorithm Set Up  
group.  
Table 3-8  
Output Algorithm Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
OUT ALG  
Loop 1 Output Algorithm  
TIME  
Time Simplex  
CURRNT  
Section  
4.7  
CURRNT Current Simplex  
POSITN Position Proportional  
TIME D  
CUR D  
CUR TI  
TI CUR  
Time Duplex  
Current Duplex  
Current/Time Duplex  
Time/Current Duplex  
4–20 RNG  
Current Duplex Range  
Loop 2 Output Algorithm  
100PCT  
50 PCT  
100PCT  
OUT2 ALG*  
NONE  
CURRNT  
TIME  
CURRNT  
CUR D  
CUR TI  
TI CUR  
RLYSTATE  
Digital Output State at 0 %  
Output  
1OF2OF  
(Output relays 1 and 2 are 1OF2ON  
both de-energized)  
1ON2OF (Output relay 1 is  
energized, output relay 2  
is de-energized)  
1OF2ON (Output relay 1 is de-  
energized, output relay 2  
is energized)  
1ON2ON (Output relays 1 and 2 are  
both energized)  
RLY TYPE  
Relay Cycle Time Increments MECHAN (Cycle time in one second MECHAN  
increments)  
SOL ST  
(Cycle time in 1/3 second  
increments: 1 = .33  
seconds, 120 = 40  
seconds)  
*Not available on DC330B  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.12 Input 1 Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with various parameters required to configure Input 1.  
Table 3-9 lists all the function prompts in the Input 1 Set Up group.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-9  
Input 1 Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
IN1 TYPE  
Input 1 Actuation Type  
DISABL  
B TC  
W TC H  
W TC L  
100 PT  
100 LO  
200 PT  
500 PT  
RAD RH  
RAD RI  
0-20mA  
4-20mA  
0-10mV  
0-50mV  
0-5 V  
0-10mV  
Section  
4.8  
E TC H  
E TC L  
J TC H  
J TC L  
K TC H  
K TC L  
NNM H  
NNM L  
NM90 H  
NM90 L  
NIC TC  
R TC  
1-5 V  
S TC  
0-10 V  
T TC H  
T TC L  
CARBON  
OXYGEN  
XMITTER1  
Transmitter Characterization B TC  
E TC H  
S TC  
T TC H  
T TC L  
LINEAR  
E TC L  
J TC H  
J TC L  
K TC H  
K TC L  
NNM H  
NNM L  
NM90 H  
NM90 L  
NIC TC  
R TC  
W TC H  
W TC L  
100 PT  
100 LO  
200 PT  
500 PT  
RAD RH  
RAD RI  
LINEAR  
SQROOT  
ANALYT*  
ANALYTIC*  
Analytic Selections  
NONE  
NONE  
PH  
XMITTER1 must be set to  
ANALYT for this prompt to  
appear  
ORP mV  
CONDmS  
CONDuS  
RSTVM^  
TDS PPm  
TDS PPb  
CONCPt  
DO PPm  
DO PPb  
IN1 HI  
IN1 LO  
RATIO 1  
Input 1 High Range Value  
(Linear Inputs only)  
–999. To 9999. Floating  
(in engineering units)  
1000  
0
Input 1 Low Range Value  
(Linear Inputs only)  
–999. to 9999. floating  
(in engineering units)  
Input 1 Ratio  
–20.00 to 20.00  
1.000  
(floats to 3 decimal places)  
54  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
BIAS IN1  
Input 1 Bias  
–999. to 9999.  
0
(in engineering units)  
FILTER 1  
Input 1 Filter  
0 to 120 seconds  
0
BURNOUT1  
Burnout Protection  
NONE  
UP  
NONE  
DOWN  
NO_FS  
EMISSIV1  
Emissivity  
0.01 to 1.00  
0.00  
*Not available on DC330B  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.13 Input 2 Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with various parameters required to configure Input 2.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-10 lists all the function prompts in the Input 2 Set Up group.  
Table 3-10  
Input 2 Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
IN2 TYPE  
Input 2 Actuation Type  
DISABL  
B TC  
NM90 L  
NIC TC  
R TC  
500 PT  
RAD RH  
RAD RI  
0-20mA  
4-20mA  
0-10mV  
0-50mV  
0-5 V  
0-10mV  
Section  
4.9  
E TC H  
E TC L  
J TC H  
J TC L  
K TC H  
K TC L  
NNM H  
NNM L  
NM90 H  
S TC  
T TC H  
T TC L  
W TC H  
W TC L  
100 PT  
100 LO  
200 PT  
S TC  
T TC H  
T TC L  
W TC H  
W TC L  
100 PT  
100 LO  
200 PT  
500 PT  
RAD RH  
RAD RI  
LINEAR  
SQROOT  
ANALYT*  
1-5 V  
0-10 V  
SLIDEW  
XMITTER2  
Transmitter Characterization B TC  
E TC H  
LINEAR  
E TC L  
J TC H  
J TC L  
K TC H  
K TC L  
NNM H  
NNM L  
NM90 H  
NM90 L  
NIC TC  
R TC  
ANALYTIC*  
Analytic Selections  
XMITTER2 must be set to  
ANALYT for this prompt to  
appear  
NONE  
PH  
NONE  
ORP mV  
CONDmS  
CONDuS  
RSTVM^  
TDS PPm  
TDS PPb  
CONCPt  
DO PPm  
DO PPb  
IN2 HI  
Input 2 High Range Value  
(Linear Inputs only)  
Input 2 Low Range Value  
(Linear Inputs only)  
Input 2 Ratio  
–999. to 9999. floating  
(in engineering units)  
–999. to 9999. floating  
(in engineering units)  
–20.00 to 20.00  
–999. to 9999.  
(in engineering units)  
0 to 120 seconds  
NONE  
1000  
0
IN2 LO  
RATIO 2  
BIAS IN2  
1.000  
0
Input 2 Bias  
FILTER 2  
BURNOUT2  
Input 2 Filter  
Burnout Protection  
0
NONE  
UP  
DOWN  
NO_FS  
EMISSIV2  
Emissivity  
0.01 to 1.00  
0.00  
*Not available on DC330B  
56  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.14 Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with various parameters required to configure Input 3.  
Table 3-11 lists all the function prompts in the Input 3 Set Up group.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-11  
Function  
Input 3 Group Function  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Name  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
IN3 TYPE*  
XMITTER3  
Input 3 Actuation Type  
DISABL  
0-20mA  
4-20mA  
0-5 V  
DISABL  
Section  
4.10  
1-5 V  
Transmitter Characterization B TC  
E TC H  
S TC  
LINEAR  
T TC H  
T TC L  
W TC H  
W TC L  
100 PT  
100 LO  
200 PT  
500 PT  
RAD RH  
RAD RI  
LINEAR  
SQROOT  
E TC L  
J TC H  
J TC L  
K TC H  
K TC L  
NNM H  
NNM L  
NM90 H  
NM90 L  
NIC TC  
R TC  
IN3 HI  
Input 3 High Range Value  
(Linear Inputs only)  
–999. to 9999. floating  
(in engineering units)  
1000  
0
IN3 LO  
Input 3 Low Range Value  
(Linear Inputs only)  
–999. to 9999. floating  
(in engineering units)  
RATIO 3  
BIAS IN3  
Input 3 Ratio  
Input 3 Bias  
–20.00 to 20.00  
1.000  
0
–999. to 9999.  
(in engineering units)  
FILTER 3  
Input 3 Filter  
0 to 120 seconds  
0
*Not available on DC330B  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.15 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
The functions listed in this group define how the Single Loop process  
controller or Loop 1 of a Two Loop process controller will control the  
process.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-12 lists all the function prompts in the Control Set Up group.  
Table 3-12  
Control Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
PV SOURC  
PID SETS  
Process Variable Source  
Tuning Parameter Sets  
INP 1  
INP 2  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
INP 1  
Section  
4.11  
1 ONLY  
2KEYBD  
2PV SW  
2SP SW  
1 ONLY  
GAIN S (Gain scheduling  
automatically disables Accutune for  
this loop)  
SW VALUE  
LSP’S  
Automatic Switchover Value  
Local Setpoint Source  
Value in engineering units within PV  
or SP range limits  
0.00  
1 ONLY  
1 ONLY  
TWO  
THREE (Selection automatically  
disables RSP SRC)  
RSP SRC  
AUTOBIAS  
SP TRACK  
Remote Setpoint Source  
Automatic Bias  
NONE  
INP 2  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
NONE  
DISABL  
NONE  
ENABLE  
DISABL  
Local Setpoint Tracking  
NONE  
PV  
RSP  
PWR MODE  
Power Up Mode Recall  
MANUAL  
A LSP  
MANUAL  
A RSP  
AM SP  
AM LSP  
PWR OUT  
SP HiLIM  
SP LoLIM  
ACTION  
TPSC Output Start-up Mode LAST  
F’SAFE  
LAST  
1000  
Setpoint High Limit  
0 to 100 % of span input in  
engineering units  
Setpoint Low Limit  
0 to 100 % of span input in  
engineering units  
0
Control Output Direction  
DIRECT  
REVRSE  
REVRSE  
58  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
Section  
4.11  
OUT RATE  
Output Change Rate  
ENABLE  
DISABL  
DISABL  
ATTENTION  
Does not apply to 3  
Position Step  
Control algorithm.  
PCT/M UP  
PCT/M DN  
OUTHiLIM  
OUTLoLIM  
I Hi LIM  
Output Rate Up Value  
Output Rate Down Value  
High Output Limit  
0 to 9999 % per minute  
0
0
0 to 9999 % per minute  
–5.0 to 105 % of output  
100  
0.0  
100.0  
0.0  
0
Low Output Limit  
–5.0 to 105 % of output  
High Reset Limit  
Within the range of the output limits  
Within the range of the output limits  
–5 to 105 % of output  
I Lo LIM  
Low Reset Limit  
DROPOFF  
DEADBAND  
Controller Dropoff Value  
Output Relay Deadband  
Time Duplex:  
1.0  
–5.0 to 25.0 %  
On/Off Duplex:  
0.0 to 25.0 %  
Position Prop. and 3P Step:  
0.5 to 5.0 %  
OUT HYST  
FAILMODE  
FAILSAFE  
Output Relay Hysteresis  
Failsafe Mode  
0.0 to 100.0 % of PV Span for On/Off  
control.  
0.5  
NO LAT  
0.0  
NO LAT  
LATCH  
Failsafe Output Value for all  
outputs except 3P Step  
Set within the range of the output  
limits. 0 to 100 %  
Failsafe Output Value for 3P 0 PCT (motor goes to closed position)  
- -  
Step  
100PCT (motor goes to open position)  
SW_FAIL  
PDMR/Position Proportional  
motor position when  
slidewire fails  
0 PCT (motor goes to closed position)  
100PCT (motor goes to open position)  
MAN OUT  
AUTO OUT  
PBorGAIN  
MINorRPM  
Power-up Preset Output for  
Manual Output  
Within the range of output limits  
Within the range of output limits  
- -  
- -  
Power-up Preset Output for  
Automatic Output  
Proportional Band or  
Gain Units  
PB PCT  
GAIN  
GAIN  
MIN  
Reset Units  
RPM  
MIN  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.16 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
The functions listed in this group define how Loop 2 of a Two Loop  
process controller will control the process.  
Only available on Expanded Controller Model DC330E-XX-XXX.  
Table 3-13 lists all the function prompts in the Control 2 Set Up group.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-13  
Control 2 Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
PV 2 SRC  
Process Variable Source  
INP 1  
INP 2  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
INP 2  
Section  
4.12  
FORCE MA  
PID SETS  
Force Manual  
DISABL  
LINK12  
DISABL  
1 ONLY  
Tuning Parameter Sets  
1 ONLY  
2KEYBD  
2PV SW  
2SP SW  
GAIN S (Gain scheduling  
automatically disables Accutune for  
this loop)  
SW VALUE  
LSP’S  
Automatic Switchover Value  
Local Setpoint Source  
Value in engineering units within PV  
or SP range limits  
0.00  
1 ONLY  
1 ONLY  
TWO  
THREE (Selection automatically  
disables RSP SRC)  
RSP SRC  
Remote Setpoint Source  
NONE  
INP 2  
NONE  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
AUTOBIAS  
SPTRACK  
Automatic Bias  
ENABLE  
DISABL  
DISABL  
NONE  
Local Setpoint Tracking  
NONE  
PV  
RSP  
SP HiLIM  
SP LoLIM  
ACTION  
Setpoint High Limit  
Setpoint Low Limit  
0 to 100 % of PV span input in  
engineering units  
1000  
0
0 to 100 % of PV span input in  
engineering units  
Control Output Direction  
DIRECT  
REVRSE  
REVRSE  
60  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
OUT RATE  
Output Change Rate  
ENABLE  
DISABL  
DISABL  
Section  
4.12  
PCT/M UP  
PCT/M DN  
OUTHiLIM  
OUTLoLIM  
I HiLIM  
Output Rate Up Value  
Output Rate Down Value  
High Output Limit  
0 to 9999 % per minute  
0 to 9999 % per minute  
–5 to 105 % of output  
0
0
100  
0
Low Output Limit  
–5 to 105 % of output  
High Reset Limit  
Within the range of the output limits  
Within the range of the output limits  
–5 to 105 % of output  
100.0  
0.0  
I LoLIM  
Low Reset Limit  
DROPOFF  
DEADBAND  
FAILMODE  
Controller Dropoff Value  
Output Relay Deadband  
Failsafe Mode  
0
–5.0 to 5.0 %  
1.0  
NO LAT  
LATCH  
NO LAT  
FAILSAFE  
Failsafe Output Value  
Set within the range of the output  
limits. 0 to 100 %  
0
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.17 Options Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with various options that are available with your  
controller. If your controller does not have any of these options the  
prompts will not appear.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-14 lists all the function prompts in the Options Set Up group.  
Table 3-14  
Options Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
AUX OUT  
Auxiliary Output One Loop  
Selection  
or  
Auxiliary Output Two  
Loops/Cascade Selection  
DISABL  
INP 1  
INP 2  
INP 3  
CBOUT  
PV  
LSP 1  
DISABL  
Section  
4.13  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
PV 2  
DEV 2  
OUTPT2  
SP L2  
or  
CUR OUT2*  
DEV  
OUTPUT  
SP  
LSP1 2  
CBOUT2  
4mA VAL  
20mA VAL  
DIG IN 1  
Auxiliary Output Low Scaling Low scale value to represent 4 mA.  
0.0  
0
Factor  
Value in % for output, all others in  
engineering units.  
Auxiliary Output High Scaling High scale value to represent 20 mA.  
Factor  
Value in % for output, all others in  
engineering units.  
Digital Input 1 Selections  
NONE  
SPinit  
NONE  
TO MAN  
TO LSP  
TO 2SP  
TO 3SP  
TO DIR  
ToHOLD  
ToPID2  
PV 2IN  
TRACK1  
TRACK2  
ToOUT2  
TO RSP  
D L1/2  
RST FB  
ToPURG  
LoFIRE  
MAN LT  
REStot  
PV 3IN  
RERUN  
TO RUN  
ToBEGN  
STOP I  
MAN FS  
ToLOCK  
ToAout  
TIMER  
HealthWatch option  
prompts*:  
RESETT1  
RESETT2  
RESETT3  
R ALL T  
AM STA  
ToTUNE  
RESETC1  
RESETC2  
RESETC3  
R ALL C  
RALLTC  
62  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
DIG1 COM  
Digital Input 1 Combinations DISABL  
DISABL  
Section  
4.13  
+PID2  
+ToDIR  
+ToSP2  
+DISAT  
+ToSP1  
+RUN  
DIG IN 2  
Digital Input 2 Selections  
Same as DIG IN 1  
NONE  
DIG2 COM  
Digital Input 2 Combinations Same as DIG1 COM  
DISABL  
*Not available on DC330B  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.18 Communications Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with the Communications option that is available with  
your controller. This option allows the controller to be connected to a host  
computer via an RS422/485 or Modbus protocol.  
If your controller does not have this option the prompts will not appear.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-15 lists all the function prompts in the Communications Set Up  
group.  
Table 3-15  
Communications Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
ComSTATE  
Communications Option  
State  
DISABL  
MOD3K  
MODBUS  
RS422  
DISABL  
Section  
4.14  
Com ADDR  
ComADDR2  
Communications Station  
Address  
1 to 99  
0
0
Loop 2 Communications  
Station Address  
1 to 99  
When ComSTATE = MODBUS,  
ComADDR2 = Com ADDR  
SHEDENAB  
SHEDTIME  
Shed Enable  
Shed Time  
DISABL  
ENABL  
DISABL  
0
0 to 255 sample periods  
(1 sample period = 0.333 seconds)  
0 = No Shed  
PARITY  
Parity  
ODD  
ODD  
EVEN  
Fixed at NONE when ComSTATE =  
MODBUS  
BAUD  
Baud Rate  
2400  
4800  
9600  
19200  
2400  
DUPLEX  
Duplex Operation  
HALF  
FULL  
HALF  
ATTENTION  
•
When ComSTATE = MODBUS,  
this selection is fixed at HALF.  
•
When the RS422/485/Auxiliary  
output option board is installed, this  
selection is fixed at HALF.  
64  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
WS_FLOAT  
Word swap order  
FP_B Floating point big endian  
FP_BB Floating point big endian with  
byte-swapped  
FP_L Floating point little endian  
FP_LB Floating point little endian  
with byte-swapped  
TX DELAY  
Transmission Delay  
1 to 500 milliseconds  
1
SHEDMODE  
Shed Controller Mode and  
Output Level  
LAST  
LAST  
ToAUTO  
FSAFE  
TO MAN  
SHEDSP  
UNITS  
Shed Setpoint Recall  
Communication Units  
TO LSP  
TO CSP  
TO LSP  
PERCNT  
ENG  
PERCNT  
CSP RATO  
CSP BIAS  
CSP2RATO*  
CSP2BIAS*  
LOOPBACK  
Loop 1 Computer Setpoint  
Ratio  
–20.0 to 20.0  
1.0  
Loop 1 Computer Setpoint  
Bias  
–999. to 9999.  
(in engineering units)  
0
1.0  
Loop 2 or Cascade  
Computer Setpoint Ratio  
–20.0 to 20.0  
Loop 2 or Cascade  
Computer Setpoint Bias  
–999. to 9999.  
(in engineering units)  
0
Local Loop Back  
DISABL  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
*Not available on DC330B  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.19 Alarms Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with the Alarms function that is available with your  
controller.  
There are two alarms available. Each alarm has two setpoints. You can  
configure each of these two setpoints to alarm on one of several events  
and you can configure each setpoint to alarm high or low. You can also  
configure the two setpoints to alarm on the same event and to alarm both  
high and low, if desired.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-16 lists all the function prompts in the Alarms Set Up group.  
Table 3-16  
Alarms Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
A1S1 VAL  
A1S2 VAL  
A2S1 VAL  
A2S2 VAL  
Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Value  
Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 Value  
Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 Value  
Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 Value  
Value in engineering units  
Value in engineering units  
Value in engineering units  
Value in engineering units  
90  
10  
95  
5
Section  
4.15  
66  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
A1S1TYPE  
Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type  
NONE  
INP 1  
INP 2  
INP 3  
NONE  
Section  
4.15  
PV (Loop 1 Process Variable)  
DEV (Loop 1 Deviation)  
OUTPUT (Loop 1 Output)  
SHED (Both Loops)  
EV ON (Event On – SP Program)  
EV OFF (Event Off – SP Program)  
MANUAL (Loop 1)  
REM SP (Loop 1 Remote Setpoint)  
F SAFE (Loop 1 Failsafe)  
PVRATE (Loop 1 PV Rate of Change)  
Expanded models:  
PV 2 (Loop 2 Process Variable)  
DEV 2 (Loop 2 Deviation)  
OUT 2 (Loop 2 Output)  
MAN 2 (Loop 2 Manual )  
RSP 2 (Loop 2 Remote Setpoint)  
F SAF2 (Loop 2 Failsafe)  
PVRAT2 (Loop 2 PV Rate of Change)  
BREAK  
BREAK2  
TOTAL  
HealthWatch:**  
TIMER1 (HealthWatch Maintenance  
Timer 1)  
TIMER2 (HealthWatch Maintenance  
Timer 2)  
TIMER3 (HealthWatch Maintenance  
Timer 3)  
COUNT1 (HealthWatch Maintenance  
Counter 1)  
COUNT2 (HealthWatch Maintenance  
Counter 2)  
COUNT3 (HealthWatch Maintenance  
Counter 3)  
A1S2TYPE  
A2S1TYPE  
A2S2TYPE  
A1S1 H L  
Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 Type  
Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 Type  
Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 Type  
Alarm 1, Setpoint 1 State  
Same as A1S1TYPE  
Same as A1S1TYPE  
Same as A1S1TYPE  
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
A1S1 EV  
SP Programming Event  
Alarm State for Alarm 1,  
Setpoint 1  
BEGIN  
END  
- -  
A1S2 H L  
A1S2 EV  
Alarm 1, Setpoint 2 State  
LOW  
HIGH  
LOW  
- -  
SP Programming Event  
Alarm State for Alarm 1,  
Setpoint 2  
BEGIN  
END  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
Section  
4.15  
A2S1 H L  
A2S1 EV  
Alarm 2, Setpoint 1 State  
LOW  
HIGH  
HIGH  
- -  
SP Programming Event  
Alarm State for Alarm 2,  
Setpoint 1  
BEGIN  
END  
A2S2 H L  
A2S2 EV  
Alarm 2, Setpoint 2 State  
LOW  
HIGH  
LOW  
- -  
SP Programming Event  
Alarm State for Alarm 2,  
Setpoint 2  
BEGIN  
END  
AL HYST  
ALM OUT1*  
BLOCK  
Alarm Hysteresis  
0.0 to 100.0 % of output or span, as  
appropriate  
0.1  
Latching Alarm for Output 1  
Alarm Blocking  
NO LAT  
LATCH  
NO LAT  
DISABL  
DISABL  
BLOCK1  
BLOCK2  
BLK 12  
*For CE conformity, Performance Criterion A, select NO LAT.  
68  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.20 Display Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with the Decimal Place, Units of Temperature, Power  
Frequency, and Process ID Tag.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-17 lists all the function prompts in the Display Set Up group.  
Table 3-17  
Display Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
DECIMAL  
Control Loop 1 Decimal  
Place  
XXXX  
XXX.X  
XXXX  
Section  
4.16  
XX.XX  
X.XXX  
ATTENTION Auto-ranging will occur  
to whichever decimal place has been  
selected.  
DECIMAL2  
TEMPUNIT  
Control Loop 2 Decimal  
Place  
XXXX  
XXX.X  
XX.XX  
X.XXX  
XXXX  
NONE  
Control Loop 1 Temperature DEG F  
Units  
DEG C  
NONE  
PWR FREQ  
RATIO 2  
Power Frequency  
60 HZ  
50 HZ  
60 HZ  
DISABL  
ENGLIS  
Ratio for Input 2—Set from  
the front of the controller  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
LANGUAGE  
Display Language  
ENGLIS  
FRENCH  
GERMAN  
SPANIS  
ITALAN  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.21 Calibration Group  
Calibration data  
The prompts used here are for field calibration purposes. Refer to Section  
7 – Calibration in this manual for complete information and instructions.  
70  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.22 Maintenance Set Up Group  
Introduction  
The Maintenance group prompts are part of the HealthWatch feature  
(available only on DC330E model). These prompts let you count and  
time the activity of discrete events such as relays, alarms, control modes  
and others, to keep track of maintenance needs.  
Function prompts  
Table 3-18 lists all the function prompts in the Maintenance Set Up group.  
Table 3-18  
Maintenance Group Function Prompts  
Selections or  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
TIMER 1  
DISABL  
LASTR  
DISABL  
Section  
4.18  
TIME1  
AL1SP1  
AL1SP2  
AL2SP1  
AL2SP2  
MANUAL  
GSOAK  
SOOTNG  
DIGIN1  
DIGIN2  
MAN2  
HRS.MIN1  
OR  
ELAPSED TIME 1  
Read only  
DAYS.HRS1  
TIME2  
TIMER 2  
Same as TIME1  
Read only  
DISABL  
DISABL  
HRS.MIN2  
OR  
ELAPSED TIME 2  
DAYS.HRS2  
TIME3  
TIMER 3  
Same as TIME1  
Read only  
HRS.MIN3  
OR  
ELAPSED TIME 3  
DAYS.HRS3  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Prompt  
Function  
Name  
Selections or  
Factory  
Setting  
Refer  
to  
Lower Display  
Range of Setting  
Upper Display  
COUNTER1  
COUNTER 1  
DISABL  
MANUAL  
AL1SP1  
AL1SP2  
AL2SP1  
AL2SP2  
DIGIN1  
DISABL  
Section  
4.18  
DIGIN2  
OUT1*1K  
OUT2*1K  
GSOAK  
PWRCYC  
PV_RNG  
FAILSF  
TUNE  
MAN2  
PVRNG2  
FSF2  
TUNE2  
COUNTS1  
COUNTER2  
COUNTS2  
COUNTER3  
COUNTS3  
PASSWORD  
RES TYPE  
NUMBER OF COUNTS 1  
COUNTER 2  
Read only  
Same as COUNTER1  
Read only  
DISABL  
DISABL  
NUMBER OF COUNTS 2  
COUNTER 3  
Same as COUNTER1  
Read only  
NUMBER OF COUNTS 3  
PASSWORD  
0-9999  
0
RESET TYPE  
NONE  
NONE  
TIMER1  
TIMER2  
TIMER3  
ALL TM  
COUNT1  
COUNT2  
COUNT3  
ALL CO  
ALL TC  
3.23 Status Group  
Status test data  
The prompts used here are read only. They are used to determine the  
reason for a controller failure. Refer to Section 9 – Troubleshooting in this  
manual for complete information.  
72  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.24 Configuration Record Sheet  
Basic Model: DC330B-XX-XXX  
DMCS Model: DC330D-XX-XXX  
Keep a record  
Enter the value or selection for each prompt on this sheet so you will have  
a record of how your controller was configured.  
Group  
Prompt  
Function  
Prompt  
Value or  
Selection  
Factory  
Setting  
Group  
Prompt  
Function  
Prompt  
Value or  
Selection  
Factory  
Setting  
TUNING  
PROP BD  
or  
GAIN  
__________  
__________  
- -  
ALGORTHM  
CONT ALG  
TIMER  
PERIOD  
START  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
PID A  
DISABL  
0.01  
KEY  
TI REM  
NONE  
- -  
- -  
- -  
- -  
- -  
- -  
- -  
0.200  
1.000  
or  
GAINVALn  
RATE MIN  
RSET MIN  
or  
RSET RPM  
MAN RSET  
PROPBD2  
or  
Read Only  
__________  
__________  
- -  
0.00  
1.00  
L DISP  
INP ALG1  
MATH K  
CALC HI  
CALC LO  
ALG1 INA  
ALG1 INB  
ALG1 INC  
ALG1BIAS  
PCT CO  
__________  
__________  
__________  
- -  
0
- -  
GAIN 2  
__________  
__________  
__________  
1.000  
0.00  
1.00  
RATE2MIN  
RSET2MIN  
or  
RSET2RPM  
CYC SEC  
or  
CYC SX3  
CYC2 SEC  
or  
CYC2 SX3  
SECURITY  
LOCKOUT  
AUTO MAN  
SP SEL  
RUN HOLD  
OUT ALG  
INPUT 1  
OUT ALG  
4–20 RNG  
RLYSTATE  
RLY TYPE  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
CURRNT  
100PCT  
1OF2ON  
MECHAN  
__________  
__________  
- -  
20  
__________  
__________  
20  
20  
IN1 TYPE  
XMITTER1  
IN1 HI  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
0-10mV  
LINEAR  
1000  
0
1.00  
0
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
20  
0
CALIB  
ENABLE  
ENABLE  
ENABLE  
IN1 LO  
RATIO 1  
BIAS IN1  
FILTER 1  
BURNOUT1  
EMMISIV1  
0
NONE  
0.00  
SP RAMP  
SP RAMP  
TIME MIN  
FINAL SP  
PVHOTSTART  
SP RATE  
EU/HR UP  
EU/HR DN  
SP PROG  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
DISABL  
3
1000  
DISABL  
DISABL  
0
INPUT 2  
IN2 TYPE  
XMITTER2  
IN2 HI  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
0-10mV  
LINEAR  
1000  
0
1.00  
0
IN2 LO  
0
RATIO 2  
BIAS IN2  
FILTER 2  
BURNOUT2  
EMMISIV2  
DISABL  
0
__________  
__________  
Read Only  
NONE  
0.00  
ACCUTUNE  
FUZZY  
ACCUTUNE  
AT ERROR  
DISABL  
DISABL  
NONE  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group  
Prompt  
Function  
Prompt  
Value or  
Selection  
Factory  
Setting  
Group  
Prompt  
Function  
Prompt  
Value or  
Selection  
Factory  
Setting  
CONTROL  
PV SOURC  
PID SETS  
SW VALUE  
LSP’S  
RSP SRC  
AUTOBIAS  
SP TRACK  
PWR MODE  
PWR OUT  
SP HiLIM  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
INP 1  
1 ONLY  
0.00  
COM  
ComSTATE  
Com ADDR  
SHEDENAB  
SHEDTIME  
PARITY  
BAUD  
DUPLEX  
WSFLOAT  
TX DELAY  
SHEDMODE __________  
SHEDSP  
UNITS  
CSP RATO  
CSP BIAS  
LOOPBACK  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
DISABL  
0
DISABL  
0
ODD  
2400  
HALF  
FP B  
1
LAST  
TO LSP  
PERCNT  
1.0  
1 ONLY  
NONE  
DISABL  
NONE  
MANUAL  
LAST  
1000  
0
REVRSE  
DISABL  
0
0
100  
0.0  
100.0  
0.0  
0
1.0  
0.5  
NO LAT  
0.0  
SP LoLIM  
ACTION  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
OUT RATE  
PCT/M UP  
PCT/M DN  
OUTHiLIM  
OUTLoLIM  
I Hi LIM  
0
DISABL  
ALARMS  
A1S1 VAL  
A1S2 VAL  
A2S1 VAL  
A2S2 VAL  
A1S1TYPE  
A1S2TYPE  
A2S1TYPE  
A2S2TYPE  
A1S1 H L  
A1S1 EV  
A1S2 H L  
A1S2 EV  
A2S1 H L  
A2S1 EV  
A2S2 H L  
A2S2 EV  
AL HYST  
ALM OUT1  
BLOCK  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
90  
10  
95  
I Lo LIM  
DROPOFF  
DEADBAND  
OUT HYST  
FAILMODE  
FAILSAFE  
MAN OUT  
AUTO OUT  
PBorGAIN  
MINorRPM  
5
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
HIGH  
- -  
LOW  
- -  
HIGH  
- -  
LOW  
- -  
0.1  
NO LAT  
DISABL  
- -  
- -  
GAIN  
MIN  
OPTIONS  
AUX OUT  
4mA VAL  
20mA VAL  
DIG IN 1  
DIG1 COM  
DIG IN 2  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
DISABL  
0.0  
0
NONE  
DISABL  
NONE  
DISABL  
DIG2 COM  
DISPLAY  
DECIMAL  
TEMPUNIT  
PWR FREQ  
RATIO 2  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
XXXX  
NONE  
60 HZ  
DISABL  
ENGLIS  
LANGUAGE  
74  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.25 Configuration Record Sheet  
Expanded Model: DC330E-XX-XXX  
Keep a record  
Enter the value or selection for each prompt on this sheet so you will have  
a record of how your controller was configured.  
Group  
Prompt  
Function  
Prompt  
Value or  
Selection  
Factory  
Setting  
Group  
Prompt  
Function  
Prompt  
Value or  
Selection  
Factory  
Setting  
TUNING  
PROP BD  
or  
GAIN  
__________  
__________  
- -  
TUNING2  
PROPBD3  
or  
GAIN 3  
__________  
__________  
- -  
1.000  
1.000  
or  
or  
GAINVALn  
RATE MIN  
RSET MIN  
or  
Read Only  
__________  
__________  
- -  
0.00  
1.00  
GAINVALn  
RATE3MIN  
RSET3MIN  
or  
Read Only  
__________  
__________  
- -  
0.00  
1.00  
RSET RPM  
MAN RSET  
PROPBD2  
or  
__________  
__________  
__________  
- -  
0
- -  
RSET3RPM  
MANRSET3  
PROPBD4  
or  
__________  
__________  
__________  
- -  
0
- -  
GAIN 2  
__________  
__________  
__________  
1.000  
0.00  
1.00  
GAIN 4  
__________  
__________  
__________  
1.000  
0.00  
1.0  
RATE2MIN  
RSET2MIN  
or  
RATE4MIN  
RSET4MIN  
or  
RSET2RPM  
CYC SEC  
or  
__________  
__________  
- -  
20  
RSET4RPM  
CYC3 SEC  
or  
__________  
__________  
- -  
20  
CYC SX3  
CYC2 SEC  
or  
__________  
__________  
20  
20  
CYC3 SX3  
CYC4 SEC  
or  
__________  
__________  
20  
20  
CYC2 SX3  
SECURITY  
LOCKOUT  
AUTO MAN  
SP SEL  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
20  
0
CYC4 SX3  
PVEUVAL1  
PVEUVAL2  
PVEUVAL3  
PVEUVAL4  
PVEUVAL5  
PVEUVAL6  
PVEUVAL7  
PVEUVAL8  
GAINVAL1  
GAINVAL2  
GAINVAL3  
GAINVAL4  
GAINVAL5  
GAINVAL6  
GAINVAL7  
GAINVAL8  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
20  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1.000  
1.000  
1.000  
1.000  
1.000  
1.000  
1.000  
1.000  
CALIB  
ENABLE  
ENABLE  
ENABLE  
0
RUN HOLD  
PVEUVAL1  
PVEUVAL2  
PVEUVAL3  
PVEUVAL4  
PVEUVAL5  
PVEUVAL6  
PVEUVAL7  
PVEUVAL8  
GAINVAL1  
GAINVAL2  
GAINVAL3  
GAINVAL4  
GAINVAL5  
GAINVAL6  
GAINVAL7  
GAINVAL8  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1.000  
1.000  
1.000  
1.000  
1.000  
1.000  
1.000  
1.000  
SP RAMP  
SP RAMP  
TIME MIN  
FINAL SP  
PVHOTSTART  
SP RATE  
EU/HR UP  
EU/HR DN  
EU/HRUP2  
EU/HRDN2  
SP PROG  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
DISABL  
3
1000  
DISABL  
DISABL  
0
0
0
0
DISABL  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group  
Prompt  
Function  
Prompt  
Value or  
Selection  
Factory  
Setting  
Group  
Prompt  
Function  
Prompt  
Value or  
Selection  
Factory  
Setting  
ACCUTUNE  
FUZZY  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
Read Only  
DISABL  
DISABL  
DISABL  
10  
1.00  
10  
ALGORITHM  
(continued)  
8SEG CH2  
X0 VALU2  
X1 VALU2  
X2 VALU2  
X3 VALU2  
X4 VALU2  
X5 VALU2  
X6 VALU2  
X7 VALU2  
X8 VALU2  
Y0 VALU2  
Y1 VALU2  
Y2 VALU2  
Y3 VALU2  
Y4 VALU2  
Y5 VALU2  
Y6 VALU2  
Y7 VALU2  
Y8 VALU2  
TOTALIZE  
•XXXXXXX  
TOT SCAL  
TOT SEC  
• RSET ?  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
DISABL  
ACCUTUNE  
ACCUTUN2  
SP CHANG  
KPG  
SP CHAN2  
KPG 2  
CRITERIA  
CRITERA2  
AT ERROR  
or  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1.00  
FAST  
FAST  
NONE  
AT ERR2  
NONE  
ALGORTHM  
CONT ALG  
PIDLOOPS  
CONT2ALG  
OUT OVRD  
TIMER  
PERIOD  
START  
L DISP  
INP ALG1  
MATH K  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
PID A  
1 or 2  
PID A  
DISABL  
DISABL  
0.01  
KEY  
TI REM  
NONE  
- -  
- -  
- -  
- -  
- -  
- -  
0
0
DISABL  
- -  
E0  
UNLOCK  
NO  
SECOND  
CALC HI  
TOT RATE  
CALC LO  
ALG1 INA  
ALG1 INB  
ALG1 INC  
PCO SEL  
PCT CO  
ATM PRES  
INP ALG2  
MATH K2  
CALC HI  
CALC LO  
ALG2 INA  
ALG2 INB  
ALG2 INC  
PCT H2  
8SEG CH1  
X0 VALUE  
X1 VALUE  
X2 VALUE  
X3 VALUE  
X4 VALUE  
X5 VALUE  
X6 VALUE  
X7 VALUE  
X8 VALUE  
Y0 VALUE  
Y1 VALUE  
Y2 VALUE  
Y3 VALUE  
Y4 VALUE  
Y5 VALUE  
Y6 VALUE  
Y7 VALUE  
Y8 VALUE  
OUT ALG  
INPUT 1  
OUT ALG  
4–20 RNG  
OUT2 ALG  
RLYSTATE  
RLY TYPE  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
CURRNT  
100PCT  
CURRNT  
1OF2ON  
MECHAN  
DISABL  
0.200  
760.0  
NONE  
- -  
- -  
- -  
- -  
- -  
- -  
IN1 TYPE  
XMITTER1  
ANALYTIC  
IN1 HI  
IN1 LO  
RATIO 1  
BIAS IN1  
FILTER 1  
BURNOUT1  
EMMISIV1  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
0-10mV  
LINEAR  
DISABL  
1000  
0
1.00  
0
0
1.0  
DISABL  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NONE  
0.00  
INPUT 2  
IN2 TYPE  
XMITTER2  
ANALYTIC  
IN2 HI  
IN2 LO  
RATIO 2  
BIAS IN2  
FILTER 2  
BURNOUT2  
EMMISIV2  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
0-10mV  
LINEAR  
DISABL  
1000  
0
1.00  
0
0
NONE  
0.00  
INPUT 3  
IN3 TYPE  
XMITTER3  
IN3 HI  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
DISABL  
LINEAR  
1000  
0
1.00  
0
IN3 LO  
RATIO 3  
BIAS IN3  
FILTER 3  
0
76  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Group  
Prompt  
Function  
Prompt  
Value or  
Selection  
Factory  
Setting  
Group  
Prompt  
Function  
Prompt  
Value or  
Selection  
Factory  
Setting  
CONTROL  
PV SOURC  
PID SETS  
SW VALUE  
LSP’S  
RSP SRC  
AUTOBIAS  
SP TRACK  
PWR MODE  
PWR OUT  
SP HiLIM  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
INP 1  
1 ONLY  
0.00  
COM  
ComSTATE  
Com ADDR  
ComADDR2  
SHEDTIME  
PARITY  
BAUD  
DUPLEX  
TX DELAY  
SHEDMODE __________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
DISABL  
0
0
0
1 ONLY  
NONE  
DISABL  
NONE  
MANUAL  
LAST  
1000  
0
REVRSE  
DISABL  
0
0
100  
0.0  
100.0  
0.0  
0
1.0  
0.5  
NO LAT  
0.0  
ODD  
2400  
HALF  
1
LAST  
TO LSP  
PERCNT  
1.0  
SHEDSP  
UNITS  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
SP LoLIM  
ACTION  
CSP RATO  
CSP BIAS  
CSP2RATO  
CSP2BIAS  
LOOPBACK  
OUT RATE  
PCT/M UP  
PCT/M DN  
OUTHiLIM  
OUTLoLIM  
I Hi LIM  
0
1.0  
0
DISABL  
ALARMS  
A1S1 VAL  
A1S2 VAL  
A2S1 VAL  
A2S2 VAL  
A1S1TYPE  
A1S2TYPE  
A2S1TYPE  
A2S2TYPE  
A1S1 H L  
A1S1 EV  
A1S2 H L  
A1S2 EV  
A2S1 H L  
A2S1 EV  
A2S2 H L  
A2S2 EV  
AL HYST  
ALM OUT1  
BLOCK  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
90  
10  
95  
I Lo LIM  
DROPOFF  
DEADBAND  
OUT HYST  
FAILMODE  
FAILSAFE  
MAN OUT  
AUTO OUT  
PBorGAIN  
MINorRPM  
5
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
HIGH  
- -  
LOW  
- -  
HIGH  
- -  
LOW  
- -  
0.1  
NO LAT  
DISABL  
- -  
- -  
GAIN  
MIN  
CONTROL2  
PV2 SRC  
FORCE MA  
PID SETS  
SW VALUE  
LSP’S  
RSP SRC  
AUTOBIAS  
SPTRACK  
SP HiLIM  
SP LoLIM  
ACTION  
OUT RATE  
PCT/M UP  
PCT/M DN  
OUTHiLIM  
OUTLoLIM  
I Hi LIM  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
INP 2  
DISABL  
1 ONLY  
0.00  
1 ONLY  
NONE  
DISABL  
NONE  
1000  
0
REVRSE  
DISABL  
0
0
100  
DISPLAY  
DECIMAL  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
XXXX  
XXXX  
NONE  
60 HZ  
DISABL  
ENGLIS  
DECIMAL2  
TEMPUNIT  
PWR FREQ  
RATIO 2  
LANGUAGE  
0
100.0  
0.0  
0
1.0  
NO LAT  
0
MAINTNCE  
TIME1  
TIME2  
TIME3  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
DISABL  
DISABL  
DISABL  
DISABL  
DISABL  
DISABL  
0
I Lo LIM  
DROPOFF  
DEADBAND  
FAILMODE  
FAILSAFE  
COUNTER1  
COUNTER2  
COUNTER3  
PASSWORD __________  
RES TYPE __________  
OPTIONS  
AUX OUT  
or  
__________  
DISABL  
NONE  
CUR OUT2  
4mA VAL  
20mA VAL  
DIG IN 1  
DIG1 COM  
DIG IN 2  
DIG2 COM  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
DISABL  
0.0  
0
NONE  
DISABL  
NONE  
DISABL  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4 – Configuration Prompt Definitions  
4.1 Overview  
Introduction  
This section provides information for all the user configurable parameters  
listed in Section 3 - Configuration. If you are not familiar with these  
parameters, this section gives you the parameter prompt, the selection or  
range of setting that you can make, and a definition of how each parameter  
setting affects controller performance. It will also refer you to any other  
prompts that might be affected by your selection.  
What’s in this  
section?  
The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section. They are  
listed in the order of their appearance in the controller.  
Topic  
See Page  
79  
4.1  
Overview  
4.2  
Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group  
Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group  
Setpoint Ramp/Rate/Programming Set Up Group  
Accutune Set Up Group  
80  
4.3  
84  
4.4  
85  
4.5  
88  
4.6  
Algorithm Data Set Up Group  
Output Algorithm Set Up Group  
Input 1 Set Up Group  
92  
4.7  
109  
112  
116  
117  
118  
124  
129  
135  
139  
143  
144  
144  
146  
4.8  
4.9  
Input 2 Set Up Group  
4.10  
4.11  
4.12  
4.13  
4.14  
4.15  
4.16  
4.17  
4.18  
4.19  
Input 3 Set Up Group  
Loop 1 Control Set Up Group  
Loop 2 Control Set Up Group  
Options Set Up Group  
Communications Set Up Group  
Alarms Set Up Group  
Display Parameters Set Up Group  
Calibration Data  
Maintenance Set Up Group  
Status Test Data  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.2 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
Tuning consists of establishing the appropriate values for the tuning  
constants for a single loop controller. These parameters are also for Loop  
1 of a 2-Loop or Cascade control configuration.  
The Accutune feature automatically selects Gain, Rate, and Reset.  
This section also contains Keyboard Lockout/Security selections.  
Set this group last  
Because this group contains functions that have to do with security and  
lockout, we recommend that you configure this group last, after all the  
other configuration data has been loaded.  
Tuning group  
prompts  
Table 4-1 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning Set Up group and  
their definitions.  
Table 4-1  
Tuning Group Prompt Definitions  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
PROP BD  
or  
GAIN  
0.1 to 9999 %  
or  
0.001 to 1000  
PROPORTIONAL BAND (simplex) is the percent of the  
range of the measured variable for which a proportional  
controller will produce a 100 % change in its output.  
GAIN is the ratio of output change (%) over the measured  
variable change (%) that caused it.  
100%  
PB%  
G =  
where PB is the proportional band (in %)  
If the PB is 20 %, then the Gain is 5. And, at those  
settings, a 3 % change in the error signal (SP-PV) will  
result in a 15 % change in the controller’s output due to  
proportional action. If the Gain is 2, then the PB is 50 %.  
Also defined as "HEAT" Gain on Duplex models for  
variations of Heat/Cool applications.  
The selection of Proportional Band or Gain is made in the  
CONTROL parameter group under prompt PBorGAIN.  
or  
Read Only  
LOOP 1 GAIN—This is the value being provided by Gain  
Scheduling when enabled.  
GAINVALn  
RATE MIN  
0.00 to 10.00 minutes  
0.08 or less = OFF  
RATE action, in minutes, affects the controller's output  
whenever the deviation is changing; and affects it more  
when the deviation is changing faster.  
Also defined as "HEAT" Rate on Duplex models for  
variations of Heat/Cool applications.  
80  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
RSET MIN  
or  
0.02 to 50.00  
RSET MIN = Reset in Minutes per Repeat  
RSET RPM = Reset in Repeats per Minute  
RSET RPM  
RESET (Integral Time) adjusts the controller’s output in  
accordance with both the size of the deviation  
(SP–PV) and the time it lasts. The amount of the  
corrective action depends on the value of Gain. The Reset  
adjustment is measured as how many times proportional  
action is repeated per minute or how many minutes before  
one repeat of the proportional action occurs.  
Used with control algorithm PID-A or PID-B.  
Also defined as "HEAT" Reset on Duplex models for  
variations of Heat/Cool applications.  
The selection of minutes per repeat or repeats per minute  
is made in the CONTROL parameters group under prompt  
MINorRPM.  
MAN RSET  
–100 to +100  
(in % output)  
MANUAL RESET is only applicable if you use control  
algorithm PD WITH MANUAL RESET in the Algorithm Set  
Up group. Because a proportional controller will not  
necessarily line out at setpoint, there will be a deviation  
(offset) from setpoint. This eliminates the offset and lets  
the PV line out at setpoint.  
Bias appears on the lower display.  
PROPBD2  
or  
GAIN 2  
0.1 to 9999 %  
or  
0.001 to 1000  
PROPORTIONAL BAND 2 or GAIN 2, RATE 2, and  
RESET 2 parameters are the same as previously  
described for “Heat” except that they refer to the cool  
zone tuning constants on duplex models or the second set  
of PID constants, whichever is pertinent.  
RATE2MIN  
0.00 to 10.00 minutes  
0.08 or less = OFF  
ATTENTION  
Set 2 Tuning Parameters are not available when the  
Accutune selection for Loop 1 is SP+PV.  
RSET2MIN  
RSET2RPM  
0.02 to 50.00  
1 to 120  
CYC SEC  
or  
CYC SX3  
CYCLE TIME (HEAT) determines the length of one time  
proportional output relay cycle. Defined as "HEAT" cycle  
time for Heat/Cool applications.  
ATTENTION If 1/3 second  
increments are used, value  
of 120 = .33 seconds x 120  
= 40 seconds maximum.  
CYC SEC—Electromechanical relays  
CYC SX3—Solid state relays  
Cycle times are in either second or 1/3-second increments  
depending upon the configuration of RLY TYPE in the  
Output Algorithm Set Up group.  
1 to 120  
CYC2 SEC  
or  
CYC2 SX3  
CYCLE TIME 2 (COOL) is the same as above except it  
applies to Duplex models as the cycle time in the "COOL"  
zone of Heat/Cool applications or for the second set of  
PID constants.  
ATTENTION If 1/3 second  
increments are used, value  
of 120 = .33 seconds x 120  
= 40 seconds maximum.  
CYC2 SEC—Electromechanical relays  
CYC2 SX3—Solid state relays  
Cycle times are in either second or 1/3-second increments  
depending upon the configuration of RLY TYPE in the  
Output Algorithm Set Up group.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
SECURITY  
0 to 4095  
SECURITY CODE—The level of keyboard lockout may be  
changed in the Set Up mode. Knowledge of a security  
code may be required to change from one level to another.  
Select this number here, copy it, and keep it in a secure  
location.  
NOTE: The Security Code is for keyboard entry only and is  
not available via communications.  
Can only be changed if LOCKOUT selection is NONE.  
LOCKOUT  
LOCKOUT applies to one of the functional groups:  
Configuration, Calibration, Tuning, Accutune. DO NOT  
CONFIGURE UNTIL ALL CONFIGURATION IS  
COMPLETE.  
NONE—No lockout; all groups are read/write.  
NONE  
CALIB  
CALIB—All groups are available for read/write except for  
the Calibration and Keyboard Lockout groups.  
+ CONF—Tuning, SP Ramp, and Accutune groups are  
read/write. All other groups are read only. Calibration and  
Keyboard Lockout groups are not available.  
+ CONF  
+VIEW—Tuning and Setpoint Ramp parameters are  
read/write. No other parameters are viewable.  
+ VIEW  
MAX  
MAX—Tuning and Setpoint Ramp parameters are  
available for read only. No other parameters are viewable.  
AUTO MAN  
MANUAL/AUTO KEY LOCKOUT—Allows you to disable  
the Manual/Auto key.  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
Disable  
Enable  
Can only be viewed if LOCKOUT is configured for NONE.  
SP SEL  
SETPOINT SELECT KEY LOCKOUT—Allows you to  
disable the Setpoint Select key.  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
Disable  
Enable  
Can only be viewed if LOCKOUT is configured for NONE.  
RUN HOLD  
RUN/HOLD KEY LOCKOUT—Allows you to disable the  
Run/Hold key, for either SP Ramp or SP Program. The  
Run/Hold key is never disabled when used to  
acknowledge a latched alarm 1.  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
Disable  
Enable  
Can only be viewed if LOCKOUT is configured for NONE.  
82  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
PVEUVAL1  
PVEUVAL2  
PVEUVAL3  
PVEUVAL4  
PVEUVAL5  
PVEUVAL6  
PVEUVAL7  
PVEUVAL8  
PV1 Value for Gain  
Scheduling  
Gain Scheduling allows you to schedule eight user-defined  
Gain Values (GAINVALn) applied over eight user-defined  
PV bands (PVEUVALn).*  
PV2 Value for Gain  
Scheduling  
PVEUVAL1 is the first PV value to be used in the  
schedule. Enter a value, in engineering units, that is within  
the PV limits.  
PV3 Value for Gain  
Scheduling  
To complete the PV selections for the segments, enter a  
PV value for all the PVEUVAL prompts listed.  
PV4 Value for Gain  
Scheduling  
The table on the following page shows the relationship  
between the GAIN Values and the PVEU Values.  
PV5 Value for Gain  
Scheduling  
Gain Scheduling prompts are only available when  
PID SETS in the Control Set Up group is configured  
for GAIN S.  
PV6 Value for Gain  
Scheduling  
PV7 Value for Gain  
Scheduling  
PV8 Value for Gain  
Scheduling  
*Apply to Expanded Model DC330E-XX-X(C or E)X only  
(requires math option).  
GAINVAL1  
GAINVAL2  
GAINVAL3  
GAINVAL4  
GAINVAL5  
GAINVAL6  
GAINVAL7  
GAINVAL8  
Gain Value 1 for Gain  
Scheduling  
GAIN VAL 1 is the first of eight user-defined Gain values.  
Enter a Gain Value you want to be used with PVEUVAL n  
previously entered. Gain values are between 0.001 and  
1000 floating.  
Gain Value 2 for Gain  
Scheduling  
Gain Value 3 for Gain  
Scheduling  
To complete the Gain selections, enter a Gain value for all  
the GAINVAL prompts listed.  
Gain Value 4 for Gain  
Scheduling  
The table below shows the relationship between the GAIN  
Values and the PVEU Values.  
Gain  
PV band over which each  
Gain applies  
Gain Value 5 for Gain  
Scheduling  
Value X  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Low range limit to PVEUVAL2  
PVUEVAL2 to PVEUVAL3  
PVUEVAL3 to PVEUVAL4  
PVUEVAL4 to PVEUVAL5  
PVUEVAL5 to PVEUVAL6  
PVUEVAL6 to PVEUVAL7  
PVUEVAL7 to PVEUVAL8  
PVUEVAL8 to High Range Limit  
Gain Value 6 for Gain  
Scheduling  
Gain Value 7 for Gain  
Scheduling  
Gain Value 8 for Gain  
Scheduling  
ATTENTION When PB is configured (instead of Gain) in  
the Control group prompt PBorGAIN, the displayed  
GAINVALn is in units of %PB. The lower display will still  
show Gain.  
Gain Scheduling prompts are only available when  
PID SETS in the Control Set Up group is configured for  
GAIN S.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.3 Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
Tuning 2 (Loop 2) consists of establishing the appropriate values for the  
tuning constants for Loop 2 on 2-Loop or Internal Cascade control.  
Loop 2 is only available on Expanded Model DC330E.  
Tuning 2 group  
prompts  
Table 4-2 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning 2 Set Up group and  
their definitions.  
Table 4-2  
Loop 2 Tuning Group Prompt  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
PROPBD3 or  
GAIN 3 or  
GAINVALn  
Same as TUNING  
The definitions listed for the parameters at the left are the  
same as those listed previously for the Tuning Set Up  
group parameters except they are for Loop 2.  
RATE3MIN  
The table below shows you how to use them for Duplex  
Heat/Cool applications.  
RSET3MIN or  
RSET3RPM  
DUPLEX OUTPUT RANGES  
0 to 50 %—TUNING SETS 2 AND 4: COOL  
50 to 100 %—TUNING SETS 1 AND 3: HEAT  
MANRSET3  
Duplex  
Output  
Range  
Heat  
or  
Cool  
PROPBD4 or  
GAIN 4  
Loop 1  
Loop 2  
RATE4MIN  
0 to 50 %  
Cool  
PID SET 2  
Gain 2  
Rate 2  
Reset 2  
Cycle 2  
PID SET 1  
Gain  
PID SET 4  
Gain 4  
RSET4MIN or  
RSET4RPM  
Rate 4  
Reset 4  
Cycle 4  
PID SET 3  
Gain 3  
CYC3 SEC or  
CYC3 SX3  
50 to 100 %  
Heat  
CYC4 SEC or  
CYC4 SX3  
Rate  
Rate 3  
PVEUVAL1  
PVEUVAL2  
PVEUVAL3  
PVEUVAL4  
PVEUVAL5  
PVEUVAL6  
PVEUVAL7  
PVEUVAL8  
Reset  
Reset 3  
Cycle 3  
Cycle  
Set 4 Tuning Parameters are not available when  
ACCUTUN2 is configured for SP+PV.  
Gain Scheduling prompts are only available when  
PID SETS in the Loop 2 Control Set Up group is  
configured for GAIN S.  
GAINVAL1  
GAINVAL2  
GAINVAL3  
GAINVAL4  
GAINVAL5  
GAINVAL6  
GAINVAL7  
GAINVAL8  
84  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.4 Setpoint Ramp/Rate/Programming Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with enabling Single Setpoint Ramp function or Setpoint  
Rate on one or both control loops. You can start or stop the single SP  
Ramp by pressing the RUN/HOLD key.  
A single setpoint ramp can be configured to occur between the current  
local setpoint and a final local setpoint over a time interval of from 1 to  
255 minutes.  
There is also a configurable rate of change for any local setpoint change.  
ATTENTION SP RAMP and SP RATE will probably cause the SP portion  
of Accutune to abort. PV Tune will continue to function normally;  
however, during tuning (TUNE configuration) SP Ramp and Program are  
placed into HOLD until tuning completes.  
SP Ramp/Rate/  
Programming group  
prompts  
Table 4-3 lists all the function prompts in the Setpoint Ramp/Rate Set Up  
group and their definitions.  
Table 4-3  
Setpoint Ramp/Rate Group Definitions  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
SP RAMP*  
SINGLE SETPOINT RAMP—Make a selection to enable  
or disable the setpoint ramp function. Make sure you  
configure a ramp time and a final setpoint value.  
*SP Ramp parameters  
(TIME MIN and FINAL  
SP) appear when Ramp  
is enabled and SP Rate  
and SP Programming  
are disabled.  
SP Rate and SP Programming must be disabled.  
DISABL  
DISABLE SETPOINT RAMP—Disables the setpoint ramp  
option.  
ENABLE  
ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP—Allows the single setpoint  
ramp prompts for Loop 1 to be shown.  
ENABL2  
ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP 2—Allows the single setpoint  
ramp to run in Loop 2.  
ENAB12  
ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP 12—Allows the single  
setpoint ramp to be run on Loop 1 and Loop 2.  
TIME MIN  
0 to 255 minutes  
SETPOINT RAMP TIME—Enter the number of minutes  
desired to reach the final setpoint. A ramp time of “0”  
implies an immediate change of setpoint.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
FINAL SP  
Within setpoint limits  
SETPOINT RAMP FINAL SETPOINT—Enter the value  
desired for the final setpoint. The controller will operate at  
the setpoint set here when ramp is ended.  
ATTENTION If the ramp is on HOLD, the held setpoint can  
be changed by the and keys. However, the ramp time  
remaining and original ramp rate is not changed.  
Therefore, when returning to RUN mode, the setpoint will  
ramp at the same rate as previous to the local setpoint  
change and will stop if the final setpoint is reached before  
the time expires. If the time expires before the final  
setpoint is reached, it will jump to the final setpoint.  
ATTENTION SP RAMP and SP RATE will cause the SP  
portion of Accutune to abort. PV Tune will continue to  
function normally. Ramp is placed into HOLD while tuning  
(TUNE configuration).  
SP RATE*  
SETPOINT RATE—Lets you configure a specific rate of  
change for any local setpoint change.  
*SP Rate parameters  
(EU/HR UP, EU/HR DN,  
EU/HRUP2, EU/HRDN2)  
appear when Rate is  
enabled and SP Ramp  
and SP Programming  
are disabled.  
SP Ramp and SP Programming must be disabled.  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
ENABL2  
ENAB12  
DISABLE SETPOINT RATE—Disables the setpoint rate  
option.  
ENABLE SETPOINT RATE—Allows the SP rate feature  
for Loop 1.  
ENABLE SETPOINT RATE 2—Allows the SP rate feature  
for Loop 2.  
ENABLE SETPOINT RATE 12—Allows the SP rate  
feature for Loop 1 and Loop 2.  
EU/HR UP  
EU/HR DN  
EU/HRUP2  
0 to 9999 in engineering  
units per hour  
RATE UP—Rate up value for Loop 1. When making a  
setpoint change, this is the rate at which the controller will  
change from the original setpoint up to the new one. The  
ramping (current) setpoint can be viewed as SPn in the  
lower display.  
Entering a 0 will imply an immediate change in Setpoint  
(i.e., no rate applies).  
0 to 9999 in engineering  
units per hour  
RATE DOWN—Rate down value for Loop 1. When  
making a setpoint change, this is the rate at which the  
controller will change from the original setpoint down to  
the new one. The ramping (current) setpoint can be  
viewed as SPn in the lower display.  
Entering a 0 will imply an immediate change in Setpoint  
(i.e., no rate applies).  
0 to 9999 in engineering  
units per hour  
RATE UP—Rate up value for Loop 2. When making a  
setpoint change, this is the rate at which the controller will  
change from the original setpoint up to the new one. The  
ramping (current) setpoint can be viewed as SPn in the  
lower display.  
86  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
EU/HRDN2  
0 to 9999 engineering units  
per hour  
RATE DOWN—Rate down value for Loop 2. When  
making a setpoint change, this is the rate at which the  
controller will change from the original setpoint down to  
the new one. The ramping (current) setpoint can be  
viewed as SPn in the lower display.  
Entering a 0 will imply an immediate change in Setpoint  
(i.e., no rate applies).  
SP PROG  
SETPOINT RAMP/SOAK PROGRAM—Available only  
(option)  
with controllers that contain this option.  
SP RAMP and SP RATE must be disabled.  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
ENABL2  
ENAB12  
DISABLE—Disables setpoint programming.  
ENABLE—Enables setpoint programming for Loop1 only.  
ENABL2—Enables setpoint programming for Loop 2 only.  
ENAB12—Enables setpoint programming for both Loop 1  
and Loop 2.  
For reasons of convenience, the information for the  
prompts when SP PROG is enabled are included in  
Section 6 – Setpoint Programming Option.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.5 Accutune Set Up Group  
Introduction  
Accutune continuously adjusts the PID parameters in response to process  
variable disturbances and/or setpoint changes. Also, it can be used during  
start-up without prior initialization or process knowledge.  
Accutune offers the following selections:  
• FUZZY—Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression  
• TUNE—Demand Tuning (operates with SP Ramp or SP Program), or  
• SP*—Setpoint Tuning, or  
• TUN+PV*—Demand Tuning plus PV Adaptive Tune, or  
• SP+PV*—Setpoint Tuning plus PV Adaptive Tune  
Descriptions of their functions are listed with each selection in Table 4-4.  
*Not available on Basic Model DC330B  
ATTENTION Selecting Gain Scheduling in the Control or Control 2 Set  
Up groups automatically disables Accutune for that group.  
Accutune group  
prompts  
Table 4-4 lists all the function prompts in the Accutune Set Up group and  
their definitions.  
Table 4-4  
Accutune Group Definitions  
Parameter  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Definition  
FUZZY  
FUZZY OVERSHOOT SUPPRESSION—Can be enabled  
or disabled independently of whether Demand Tuning or  
SP Tuning is enabled or disabled.  
DISABL  
DISABLE—Disables Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression.  
ENABLE  
ENABLE ON LOOP 1 ONLY—The UDC uses Fuzzy Logic  
to suppress or minimize any overshoot that may occur  
when PV approaches SP. It will not recalculate any new  
tuning parameters.  
ENABL2  
ENAB12  
ENABLE ON LOOP 2 ONLY—Same as ENABLE except  
for Loop 2 only.  
ENABLE ON BOTH LOOPS—Same as ENABLE except  
for both Loops.  
88  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
ACCUTUNE  
ACCUTUNE for Loop 1  
DISABL  
TUNE  
DISABLE —Disables the Accutune function.  
DEMAND TUNING—If TUNE is selected, and tuning is  
initiated through the operator interface or digital input (if  
configured), the algorithm calculates new tuning  
parameters and enters them into the tuning group. This  
tuning requires no process knowledge and does not  
require line out for initialization.  
SP  
SETPOINT TUNING —This selection tunes on setpoint  
changes only. It employs time domain analysis to  
accelerate line out at any desired setpoint without prior  
initialization or process knowledge.  
SP is the recommended start-up mode—to be used when  
no knowledge of the process tuning values is available. In  
the Start-up mode, and after enabling ACCUTUNE, the  
operator simply lines out the process variable in manual  
mode, selects the desired SP value and switches to  
automatic mode.  
TUN+PV  
SP+PV  
DEMAND TUNING PLUS PV ADAPTIVE TUNE—This  
selection provides “TUNE” On Demand tuning plus PV  
Adaptive tuning whenever a PV process disturbance of  
0.3 % span or greater occurs. It will take 1-1/2 process  
cycles around setpoint before any process recognition and  
re-tuning can occur due to PV disturbances.  
SETPOINT TUNING PLUS PV ADAPTIVE TUNE—This  
selection tunes on setpoint changes but also whenever a  
PV process disturbance of 0.3 % span or greater occurs. It  
will take 1-1/2 process cycles around setpoint before any  
process recognition and re-tuning can occur due to PV  
disturbances.  
ACCUTUN2  
ACCUTUNE for Loop 2—Available only if configured for  
2-Loop or Cascade control.  
DISABL  
DISABLE ACCUTUNE—Disables the Accutune function  
for Loop 2.  
TUNE  
SP  
DEMAND TUNING—Same as ACCUTUNE.  
SETPOINT TUNING—Same as ACCUTUNE.  
TUN+PV  
DEMAND TUNING PLUS PV ADAPTIVE TUNE—Same  
as ACCUTUNE.  
SP+PV  
SETPOINT TUNING PLUS PV ADAPTIVE TUNE—Same  
as ACCUTUNE.  
SP CHANG*  
5 to 15 %  
SETPOINT CHANGE LOOP 1—The minimum setpoint  
change on Loop 1 that will result in re-tuning must be  
configured between 5 % and 15 %; i.e., if the range is 0 to  
2400 and 5 % is configured, re-tuning will occur if the  
setpoint change is 120 or larger.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
KPG*  
0.10 to 10.00  
PROCESS GAIN LOOP 1—This is the Gain of the  
process being tuned on Loop 1. It is automatically  
calculated during tuning process. This is normally a READ  
only value. It should only need to be changed if the  
controller fails to identify the process. In this case, set the  
value to the algebraic value of PV in percent, divided by  
output in percent while in the manual mode.  
ATTENTION Note you must disable Accutune to change  
tuning constant values from the keyboard.  
SP CHAN2*  
KPG 2*  
5 to 15 %  
SETPOINT CHANGE LOOP 2—The minimum setpoint  
change on Loop 2 that will result in re-tuning must be  
configured between 5 % and 15 %.  
0.10 to 10.00  
PROCESS GAIN LOOP 2—This is the Gain of the  
process being tuned on Loop 2. It is automatically  
calculated during tuning process. This is normally a READ  
only value. It should only need to be changed if the  
controller fails to identify the process. In this case, set the  
value to the algebraic value of PV in percent, divided by  
output in percent while in the manual mode.  
ATTENTION Note you must disable Accutune to change  
tuning constant values from the keyboard.  
CRITERIA*  
CRITERA2*  
TUNING CRITERIA (SETPOINT ADAPTIVE)—Select a  
criteria best suited for your process on Loop 1.  
NORMAL  
FAST  
NORMAL—Original critical damping (no overshoot).  
FAST—A more aggressive tuning with a minimal possible  
overshoot of less than 0.5 %.  
TUNING CRITERIA FOR LOOP 2 (SETPOINT  
ADAPTIVE)—Select a criteria best suited for your process  
on Loop 2.  
NORMAL  
FAST  
NORMAL—Original critical damping (no overshoot).  
FAST—A more aggressive tuning with a minimal possible  
overshoot of less than 0.5 %.  
For Example: Slightly underdamped  
90  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
AT ERROR  
or  
AT ERR 2  
ACCUTUNE ERROR STATUS—When an error is  
detected in the Accutune process, an error prompt will  
appear.  
(depending on loop)  
RUNING  
RUNNING—An Accutune process is still active checking  
process gain, even though “T” is not lit. It does not affect  
keyboard operation.  
Read Only  
NONE  
NONE—No errors occurred during last Accutune  
procedure.  
OUTLIM*  
OUTPUT REACHED LIMITS (HIGH OR LOW)—Output  
set insufficiently to get to SP value.  
ATTENTION This error will cause the controller to switch  
from Automatic to Manual mode. The output is then set to  
the value present at the beginning of the Accutune  
process.  
IDENTIFICATION PROCESS FAILED—An illegal value  
for Gain, Rate, or Reset was calculated.  
IDFAIL*  
ABORT  
CURRENT ACCUTUNE PROCESS ABORTED—Caused  
by one of the following conditions:  
• changing to manual mode  
• digital input detected  
• changing SP while PV (error) tune in progress  
• in heat region of output but a cool output is  
calculated, or vice versa.  
LOW PV—PV not changed sufficiently or the PV has  
increased by more than 4 % and Deadtime not  
determined.  
LOW PV*  
*Applies to SP and SP+PV tuning only.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.6 Algorithm Data Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with various algorithms residing in the controller:  
• Control algorithms,  
• Input Math algorithms,  
• selecting the 1 or 2 PID Loops,  
• Output Override,  
• 2 Eight Segment Characterizers,  
• the Timer function,  
• Totalizer function, and  
• Gain Scheduling.  
ATTENTION Math option (two algorithms, two characterizers, totalizer)  
and Two Loops of Control are only available on Expanded Model  
DC330E.  
Algorithm group  
prompts  
Table 4-5 lists all the function prompts in the Algorithm Set Up group and  
their definitions.  
Table 4-5  
Algorithm Group Definitions  
Parameter  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Definition  
CONT ALG  
The CONTROL ALGORITHM lets you select the type of  
control that is best for your process.  
ON-OFF  
ON/OFF is the simplest control type. The output can be  
either ON (100 %) or OFF (0 %). The Process Variable  
(PV) is compared with the setpoint (SP) to determine the  
sign of the error (ERROR = PV–SP). The ON/OFF  
algorithm operates on the sign of the error signal.  
In Direct Acting Control, when the error signal is positive,  
the output is 100 %; and when the error signal is negative,  
the output is 0 %. If the control action is reverse, the  
opposite is true. An adjustable overlap (Hysteresis Band)  
is provided between the on and off states.  
Other prompts affected: OUT HYST  
DUPLEX ON/OFF is an extension of this algorithm when  
the output is configured for Duplex. It allows the operation  
of a second ON/OFF output. There is a deadband  
between the operating ranges of the two inputs and an  
adjustable overlap (hysteresis) of the on and off states of  
each output. Both Deadband and Hysteresis are  
separately adjustable. With no relay action the controller  
will read 50 %.  
Other prompts affected: OUT HYST and DEADBAND  
92  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
CONT ALG  
PID A  
PID A is normally used for three-mode control. This means  
that the output can be adjusted somewhere between 100  
% and 0 %. It applies all three control actions—  
Proportional (P), Integral (I), and Derivative (D)—to the  
error signal.  
ATTENTION PID A should  
not be used for Proportional  
only action; i.e., no integral  
(reset) action. Instead, use  
PD+MR with rate set to 0.  
Proportional (Gain)—Regulates the controller’s output in  
proportion to the error signal (the difference between  
Process Variable and Setpoint).  
Integral (Reset)—Regulates the controller’s output to the  
size of the error and the time the error has existed. (The  
amount of corrective action depends on the value of  
proportional Gain.)  
Derivative (Rate)—Regulates the controller’s output in  
proportion to the rate of change of the error. (The amount  
of corrective action depends on the value of proportional  
Gain.)  
PID B  
PID B—Unlike the PID A equation, the controller gives  
only an integral response to a setpoint change, with no  
effect on the output due to the gain or rate action, and it  
gives full response to PV changes. Otherwise controller  
action is as described for the PID A equation. See note on  
PID A.  
PD+MR  
PD WITH MANUAL RESET is used whenever integral  
action is not wanted for automatic control. The equation is  
computed with no integral contribution. The MANUAL  
RESET, which is operator adjustable, is then added to the  
present output to form the controller output.  
Switching between manual and automatic mode will be  
bumpless.  
If you select PD with Manual Reset you can also configure  
the following variations:  
• PD (Two Mode) control,  
• P (Single Mode) control.  
Set Rate (D) to 0.  
Other prompts affected: MAN RSET in the Tuning Set Up  
group  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
CONT ALG  
(continued)  
3PSTEP  
THREE POSITION STEP—The Three Position Step  
Control algorithm allows the control of a valve (or other  
actuator) with an electric motor driven by two controller  
relay outputs; one to move the motor upscale, the other  
downscale without a feedback slidewire linked to the  
motor shaft. The deadband is adjustable in the same  
manner as the duplex output algorithm.  
The Three Position Step Control algorithm provides an  
output display (OUT) which is an estimated motor position,  
since the motor is not using any slidewire feedback.  
Although this output indication is only an approximation, it  
is “corrected” each time the controller drives the motor to  
one of its stops (0 % or 100 %). It avoids all the control  
problems associated with the feedback slidewire (wear,  
dirt, noise). When operating in this algorithm, the  
estimated OUT display is shown to the nearest percent  
(i.e., no decimal).  
Refer to the Operation section for motor position displays.  
As a customer configurable option, when a second input  
board is installed, the motor slidewire can be connected to  
the controller. The actual slidewire position is then shown  
on the lower display as POS. This value is used for  
display only. It is NOT used in the Three Position Step  
algorithm. To configure this option, set Input 2 actuation  
to SLIDEW. Calibrate the slidewire.  
Other prompts affected: DEADBAND  
PIDLOOPS*  
PID LOOPS—This is the PID loop selection.  
1 LOOP—Select to use one loop of control.  
*Only available on  
Expanded Model  
DC330E Dual loop.  
1 LOOP  
2LOOPS*  
2 LOOPS—Select to use two PID loops of control, each  
with two sets of tuning parameters and a set of control  
parameters.  
CASCAD*  
CASCADE—Select for Cascade Control. In a cascade  
control system the output of one PID loop is used to adjust  
the setpoint of the second control loop and the second  
loop’s output actually adjusts the final control element.  
ATTENTION To enable a cascade loop, hold in the  
SETPOINT SELECT key until the RSP Annunciator  
lights and an “I” appears as the upper display’s leftmost  
character to indicate Cascade mode. Pressing the key  
again disables the Cascade Loop and the annunciators  
turn off.  
CONT2ALG  
The CONTROL 2 ALGORITHM lets you select the type of  
control for Loop 2 that is best for your process. Only  
available if the controller is configured for Cascade or  
2-Loop control.  
3Pstep and On/Off are not available for the second control  
loop.  
94  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
PID A  
PID A is normally used for three-mode control. This means  
that the output can be adjusted somewhere between 100  
% and 0 %. It applies all three control actions—  
Proportional (P), Integral (I), and Derivative (D)—to the  
error signal.  
ATTENTION PID A should  
not be used for Proportional  
only action; i.e., no integral  
(reset) action. Instead, use  
PD+MR with rate set to 0.  
Proportional (Gain)—Regulates the controller’s output in  
proportion to the error signal (the difference between  
Process Variable and Setpoint).  
Integral (Reset)—Regulates the controller’s output to the  
size of the error and the time the error has existed. (The  
amount of corrective action depends on the value of  
proportional Gain.)  
Derivative (Rate)—Regulates the controller’s output in  
proportion to the rate of change of the error. (The amount  
of corrective action depends on the value of proportional  
Gain.)  
PID B  
PID B—Unlike the PID A equation, the controller gives  
only an integral response to a setpoint change, with no  
effect on the output due to the gain or rate action, and it  
gives full response to PV changes. Otherwise controller  
action is as described for the PID A equation. See note on  
PID A.  
PD+MR  
PD WITH MANUAL RESET is used whenever integral  
action is not wanted for automatic control. The equation is  
computed with no integral contribution. The MANUAL  
RESET, which is operator adjustable, is then added to the  
present output to form the controller output.  
Switching between manual and automatic mode will be  
bumpless.  
If you select PD with Manual Reset you can also configure  
the following variations  
• PD (Two Mode) control,  
• P (Single Mode) control.  
Set Rate (D) to 0.  
Other prompts affected: MANRSET3  
OUT OVRD  
OUTPUT OVERRIDE SELECT—This selection lets you  
select high or low output override. Only available if the  
controller is configured for 2-Loop operation. (NOTE 1)  
ATTENTION Loop 1 must be in Automatic for this  
selection to work. While the output is being overridden, an  
“O” appears as the leftmost digit of the upper display.  
DISABL  
HI SEL  
DISABLE—Disables Output Override.  
HIGH SELECT—The controller will select the higher of  
output 1 or output 2 and direct it to output 1 rear terminals.  
LO SEL  
LOW SELECT—The controller will select the lower of  
output 1 or output 2 and direct it to output 1 rear terminals.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
TIMER  
ENABLE  
TIMER allows you to enable or disable the timer option.  
DISABL  
The timer option allows you to configure a timeout period  
and to select timer start by either the keyboard  
(RUN/HOLD key) or Alarm 2. A digital input can also be  
configured to start the timer.  
When the timer is enabled, it has exclusive control of the  
alarm 1 relay; any previous alarm configuration is ignored.  
At timeout, the timer is ready to be re-activated by  
whatever action has been configured. Alarm 1 is activated  
at the end of the timeout period.  
PERIOD  
START  
L DISP  
0:00 to 99:59  
PERIOD allows you to configure the length of timeout  
period (from 0 to 99 hours:59 minutes).  
KEY  
ALARM2  
START allows you to select whether the timer starts with  
the keyboard (Run/Hold key) or Alarm 2.  
TI REM  
E TIME  
L DISP allows you to select whether time remaining (TI  
REM) or elapsed time (E TIME) is displayed for the timer  
option.  
The time is shown on the lower display in HH:MM format  
along with a rotating “clock” character.  
• If the “clock” rotation is clockwise, elapsed time is  
indicated.  
• If the “clock” rotation is counterclockwise, time  
remaining is indicated.  
INPUT MATH ALGORITHMS—The controller is provided with two input algorithms. Each algorithm can be  
configured to provide a derived (calculated) PV or a derived Remote setpoint. Up to three inputs may be applied to  
the calculation. In addition, the two algorithms may be “linked” to combine two calculations by configuring one  
algorithm to be an input to the other algorithm. See Inputs A, B, and C for definitions per equation.  
All algorithms operate in engineering units except Feedforward which operates in percent of output units.  
ATTENTION For the General Math functions, when Input C is set to NONE, the value of Input C used in the  
functions is automatically set to 1.0, except for Summer where it is set to 0.0.  
INP ALG1  
INPUT ALGORITHM 1 has the following selections from  
which to choose:  
NONE  
NONE—No algorithm configured  
W AVG*  
WEIGHTED AVERAGE—When you configure for  
Weighted Average, the controller will compute a PV or SP  
for the control algorithm from the following equation:  
*Standard feature on  
DC330E  
(Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) + (K x Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)  
PV =  
(1 + K)  
Both Inputs must have the same range in engineering  
units.  
F FWRD*  
FEEDFORWARD SUMMER—Feedforward uses Input A,  
following a Ratio and Bias calculation as a value summed  
directly with the PID computed output value and sent, as  
an output value, to the final control element. Applies to  
Loop 1 only. (NOTE 1)  
*Standard feature on  
DC330E  
This algorithm will only function in automatic mode.  
The following formula applies:  
Controller Output = PID Output + (Input A x Ratio A + Bias A ) x (100/Input A Range)  
96  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
FFWDMu  
FEEDFORWARD MULTIPLIER—Feedforward uses Input  
A, following a Ratio and Bias calculation as a value  
multiplied directly with the PID computed output value and  
sent, as an output value, to the final control element.  
(NOTE 1)  
The following formula applies:  
Controller Output = PID Output x (Input A x Ratio A + Bias A )/Input A Range  
RELHUM  
RELATIVE HUMIDITY—Input 1 reads the wet bulb  
temperature. Input 2 reads the dry bulb temperature. Both  
inputs must be 100 ohm RTD inputs.  
ATTENTION The Relative Humidity selection will  
automatically force both Analog Input actuations to the  
100 ohm low setting.  
The controller will indicate measured Relative Humidity as  
a Process Variable (PV) with a setpoint range of 0 % to  
100 % RH.  
SUMMER  
SUMMER WITH RATIO AND BIAS—The following  
formula applies:  
PV = (Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) + (Input B x Ratio B + Bias B) + (Input C x Ratio C + Bias C)  
HI SEL  
INPUT HIGH SELECT WITH RATIO AND BIAS—This  
selection specifies the PV or SP as the higher of Input 1 or  
Input 2. The following formula applies:  
PV = higher of (Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) or (Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)  
LO SEL  
INPUT LOW SELECT WITH RATIO AND BIAS—This  
selection specifies the PV or SP as the lower of Input 1 or  
Input 2. The following formula applies:  
PV = lower of (Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) or (Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)  
MULTIPLIER DIVIDER WITH SQUARE ROOT—The  
MuDIV (note 2)  
following formula applies:  
(Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) x (Input C x Ratio C + Bias C)  
(Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)  
x (Calc Hi – Calc Lo)  
*PV = K x  
See Figure 4-1 at the end of this section for an example of Mass Flow  
Compensation using Multiplier/Divider Algorithm.  
MULTIPLIER WITH SQUARE ROOT—The following  
MULT (note 2)  
formula applies:  
*PV = K x  
(Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) x (Input C x Ratio C + Bias C) x (Input B x Ratio B + Bias B) x (Calc Hi – Calc Lo)  
MuDIV  
MULTIPLIER DIVIDER—The following formula applies:  
(Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) x (Input C x Ratio C + Bias C)  
(Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)  
*PV = K x  
x (Calc Hi – Calc Lo)  
MULT  
MULTIPLIER—The following formula applies:  
*PV = K x [(Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) x (Input C x Ratio C + Bias C) x (Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)] x (Calc Hi – Calc Lo)  
CARB A  
CARBON POTENTIAL A—Make this selection if you have  
a Cambridge or Marathon monitor type Zirconium Oxide  
sensor.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
CARB B  
CARBON POTENTIAL B—Make this selection if you have  
a Corning type Zirconium Oxide sensor. This algorithm  
requires a temperature range within the region of 1400 to  
2000°F.  
CARB C  
CARB D  
FCC  
CARBON POTENTIAL C—Make this selection if you have  
an A.A.C.C. type Zirconium Oxide sensor. This algorithm  
requires a temperature range within the region of 1400 °F  
to 2000 °F.  
CARBON POTENTIAL D—Make this selection if you have  
a Barber Coleman, MacDhui, or Bricesco type Zirconium  
Oxide sensor. This algorithm requires a temperature range  
within the region of 1400 to 2000°F.  
CARBON POTENTIAL FCC—Make this selection if you  
have a Furnace Controls Corp Accucarb type Zirconium  
Oxide sensor. This algorithm requires a temperature range  
within the region of 1400 °F to 2000 °F.  
DEW PT  
DEWPOINT OF CARBONIZING ATMOSPHERE—Use  
this selection if you are using any Zirconium Oxide Carbon  
Probe and you want to measure the atmosphere in terms  
of Dewpoint. The range is –50 °F to 100 °F or  
–48 °C to 38 °C. This algorithm requires a temperature  
range within the region of 1000 °F to 2200 °F.  
OXYGEN  
PERCENT OXYGEN RANGE—Make this selection if you  
are using a Zirconium Oxide Oxygen Probe to measure  
Percent of Oxygen in a range of 0 to 40 % O2. This  
algorithm requires a temperature range within the region  
of 800 °F to 3000 °F.  
ATTENTION The Carbon and Dewpoint selections will automatically set the first input actuation to Carbon.  
The Oxygen selection will automatically set the first input actuation to Oxygen.  
MATH K  
CALC HI  
0.001 to 1000 floating  
WEIGHTED AVERAGE RATIO OR MASS FLOW  
ORIFICE CONSTANT (K) FOR MATH SELECTIONS—  
Only applicable for algorithms W AVG or General Math  
selections ¥MuDIV, ¥MULT, MuDIV, or MULT.  
–999. To 9999. Floating  
(in engineering units)  
CALCULATED VARIABLE HIGH SCALING FACTOR  
FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 1—Used only when either  
Summer, Input Hi/Lo, or one of the General Math functions  
was selected as the Input Algorithm. Range is used for  
either PV or RSP, depending upon Algorithm application.  
CALC LO  
–999. To 9999. Floating  
(in engineering units)  
CALCULATED VARIABLE LOW SCALING FACTOR  
FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 1—Used only when either  
Summer, Input Hi/Lo, or one of the General Math functions  
was selected as the Input Algorithm. Range is used for  
either PV or RSP, depending upon Algorithm application.  
98  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
ALG1 INA  
ALG1 INB  
ALG1 INC  
ALGORITHM 1, INPUT A SELECTION will represent one  
of the available selections.  
INP 1  
INP 2  
Input 1  
Input 2  
LP1OUT  
LP2OUT  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
Output 1 (NOTE 1)  
Output 2  
Input Algorithm 1  
Input Algorithm 2  
Input 3  
ALGORITHM 1, INPUT B SELECTION will represent one  
of the available selections.  
INP 1  
INP 2  
Input 1  
Input 2  
LP1OUT  
LP2OUT  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
Output 1 (NOTE 1)  
Output 2  
Input Algorithm 1  
Input Algorithm 2  
Input 3  
ALGORITHM 1, INPUT C SELECTION will represent one  
of the available selections.  
NONE  
INP 1  
None  
Input 1  
INP 2  
Input 2  
LP1OUT  
LP2OUT  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
Output 1 (NOTE 1)  
Output 2  
Input Algorithm 1  
Input Algorithm 2  
Input 3  
PCO SEL  
PCT CO  
PERCENT CARBON SOURCE allows a live Input 3 value  
to be substituted for the static % CO value (PCT CO).  
DISABL  
ONLINE  
DISABLED  
ONLINE—Input 3 must be enabled  
0.020 to 0.350 (fractional  
percent of CO)  
PERCENT CARBON is only applicable when Carbon  
Potential is selected. Enter the value in percent carbon  
monoxide that is applicable for the enriching gas used in  
fractional form.  
FOR EXAMPLE:  
Natural Gas = 20.0 % CO, then setting is 0.200  
Propane Gas = 23.0 % CO, setting is 0.230  
ATM PRES  
ALG1 BIAS  
590.0 to 760.0 (mm Hg)  
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE COMPENSATION is only  
applicable when Relative Humidity is selected. Enter the  
value of the atmospheric pressure of the process.  
-999 to 9999 floating (in  
engineering units)  
INPUT ALGORITHM 1 BIAS—Does not apply to  
selections: FFWRD, FFWDM2, HISEL, or LOSEL.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
INP ALG2  
NONE  
INPUT ALGORITHM 2—The selections from which to  
W AVG  
F FWR2  
FFWDM2  
A-B/C*  
HI SEL  
LO SEL  
MuDIV  
MULT  
choose are listed to the left.  
ATTENTION  
The formulas are the same as shown for IN ALG 1.  
• All Input Algorithms  
operate in engineering  
units except Feed-  
forward which operates  
in percent of range units.  
• For General Math  
functions, when Input C  
is disabled, the value of  
Input C used in the  
* ATTENTION Selection A–B/C algorithm subtracts  
Input B with Ratio/Bias from Input A with Ratio/Bias and  
divides the result by Input C with Ratio/Bias using  
engineering units.  
MuDIV  
MULT  
DEW PT  
EXAMPLE:  
(A–B)  
C
PV or SP = K  
(Calc Hi – Calc Lo)  
functions is  
automatically set to 1.0.  
MATH K2  
CALC HI  
CALC LO  
ALG2 INA  
0.001 to 1000 floating  
WEIGHTED AVERAGE RATIO OR MASS FLOW  
ORIFICE CONSTANT (K) FOR MATH SELECTIONS—  
Only applicable for algorithm W AVG or General Math  
selections MuDIV, MULT, MuDIV, or MULT.  
–999. To 9999. Floating  
(in engineering units)  
CALCULATED VARIABLE HIGH SCALING FACTOR  
FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 2—Does not apply to  
Feedforward algorithms. Range is used for either PV or  
RSP, depending upon Algorithm application.  
–999. To 9999. Floating  
(in engineering units)  
CALCULATED VARIABLE LOW SCALING FACTOR  
FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 2—Does not apply to  
Feedforward algorithms. Range is used for either PV or  
RSP, depending upon Algorithm application.  
ALGORITHM 2, INPUT A SELECTION will represent one  
of the available selections.  
INP 1  
Input 1  
INP 2  
Input 2  
LP1OUT  
LP2OUT  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
Output 1 (NOTE 1)  
Output 2  
Input Algorithm 1  
Input Algorithm 2  
Input 3  
ALG2 INB  
ALGORITHM 2, INPUT B SELECTION will represent one  
of the available selections.  
INP 1  
Input 1  
INP 2  
Input 2  
LP1OUT  
LP2OUT  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
Output 1 (NOTE 1)  
Output 2  
Input Algorithm 1  
Input Algorithm 2  
Input 3  
ALG2 INC  
ALGORITHM 2, INPUT C SELECTION will represent one  
of the available selections.  
NONE  
INP 1  
None  
Input 1  
INP 2  
Input 2  
LP1OUT  
LP2OUT  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
Output 1 (NOTE 1)  
Output 2  
Input Algorithm 1  
Input Algorithm 2  
Input 3  
100  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
PCT H2  
1.0 to 99.0 (% H2)  
HYDROGEN CONTENT FOR DEWPOINT is only  
applicable when Dewpoint is selected. Enter a value for  
the percentage of Hydrogen content that is applicable.  
ALG2BIAS  
-999 to 9999 floating (in  
engineering units)  
INPUT ALGORITHM 2 BIAS—Does not apply to  
selections: FFWR2, FFWM2, HI SEL, or LO SEL.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 4-1  
Example of Mass Flow Compensation using Multiplier/Divider Algorithm  
Example - Mass Flow Compensation  
A gas flow rate of 650 SCFM develops a differential pressure of 90" H O across an orifice plate  
2
at reference conditions of 30 psig and 140 F. Compensate this gas flow for temperature and  
pressure variations.  
Where:  
DP x P  
T
Flow = K  
ref  
f
f
f = flowing conditions  
ref = reference conditions (in absolute units)  
x
T
f
P
ref  
Apply Multiplier/Divider Algorithm:  
A
(Input A x Ratio + BiasA ) x (Input C x RatioC + Bias )  
C
PV = K  
X (CalcHI – Calc  
)
LO  
(Input B x RatioB + BiasB )  
Assign inputs using Engineering units:  
Let:  
Input A = DP = IN1 (in H O)  
f
2
Input B = T = IN2 + Bias2 = IN2 F + 460 ( R)  
f
Input C = P = IN3 + Bias3 = IN3psig + 14.7(psia)  
f
T
ref  
= 140 F + 460 = 600 R  
P
ref  
= 30 psig + 14.7 = 44.7 psia  
Calc = 650.0  
Hi  
Flow in SFCM at Reference Conditions  
Calc = 0.0  
Lo  
K = to be determined next  
Note: If temperature and pressure signals are already ranged in absolute units,  
no Bias is required for inputs B and C.  
DP x (IN3 + 14.7)  
PV = Q  
=
f
2
SCFM  
x
K
x
(650.0 - 0.0)  
(IN2 + 460)  
Note: When IN2 and IN3 are at the reference conditions of 600 R (140 F) and 44.7psia (30  
psig) respectively and DP = 90" H O, the equation must calculate 650 SCFM. To accomplish  
f
2
this, divide the DP value by "90" to normalize the equation.  
Q
=
DP  
90  
(IN3 + 14.7)  
(IN2 + 460)  
T
ref  
f
SCFM  
x
x
x
650  
P
ref  
Rearranging terms:  
(IN3 + 14.7)  
(IN2 + 460)  
1
T
Q
=
ref  
SCFM  
DP x  
x
x
x
f
650  
Example continued  
on next page  
90  
P
ref  
2
22049  
Constant = K  
Variable  
102  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 4-1  
Example of Mass Flow Compensation using Multiplier/Divider Algorithm, continued  
Example - Mass Flow Compensation  
Determined value of K:  
1
T
ref  
600  
K2  
=
x
=
=
0.14914  
90  
Pref  
(90) (44.7)  
Therefore K = 0.386  
DPf (in H2O) (IN3 + 14.7)  
(IN2 + 460)  
QSCFM  
=
(0.386) (650)  
K
(CalcHI - CalcLO  
)
Summary of Flow Values At Values Conditions  
Flow (SFCM)  
DPf = 45" H2O (50%) DP = 90" H2O (100%)  
Temp (T )  
Pressure (Tf)  
(psia)  
f
( R)  
f
Reference  
Conditions  
140 F + 460  
30 psi + 14.7  
50 psi + 14.7  
20 psi + 14.7  
459  
539  
395  
650  
763  
559  
170 F + 460  
170 F + 460  
110 F + 460  
110 F + 460  
50 psi + 14.7  
20 psi + 14.7  
567  
415  
802  
587  
22050  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 4-5  
Algorithm Group Definitions, Continued  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
8SEG CH1  
8 SEGMENT CHARACTERIZER #1—An eight segment  
characterizer can be applied to either Input 1, Input 2,  
Output 1, or Output 2.  
DISABL  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
L1 OUT  
DISABLE—Disables characterizer.  
INPUT 1—Characterizer is applied to Input 1.  
INPUT 2—Characterizer is applied to Input 2.  
LOOP 1 OUTPUT—Characterizer is applied to Loop 1  
Output. (NOTE 1)  
L2 OUT  
LOOP 2 OUTPUT—Characterizer is applied to Loop 2  
Output.  
There are eight (Xn) Input values and eight (Yn) Output  
values to be selected. The following rules apply:  
• When Input 2 is used, Input 2 Ratio and Bias are  
applied to the Xn Values.  
• When one of the Loop outputs are selected, the Xn  
Input values are the Output from the control algorithm,  
and the Yn Output is the final control element action.  
This application is useful for non-linear control elements  
or Process Variable.  
A simple example is shown in Figure 4-2.  
ATTENTION The X values below should be entered as increasing values (from 0% to 100%) from N = 0 to 8.  
X0 VALUE  
X1 VALUE  
X2 VALUE  
X3 VALUE  
X4 VALUE  
X5 VALUE  
X6 VALUE  
X7 VALUE  
X8 VALUE  
Y0 VALUE  
Y1 VALUE  
Y2 VALUE  
Y3 VALUE  
Y4 VALUE  
Y5 VALUE  
Y6 VALUE  
Y7 VALUE  
Y8 VALUE  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
X0 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X1 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X2 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X3 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X4 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X5 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X6 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X7 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X8 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
Y0 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y1 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y2 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y3 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y4 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y5 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y6 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y7 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y8 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
104  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
8SEG CH2  
8 SEGMENT CHARACTERIZER #2—A second eight  
segment characterizer can be applied to either  
Input 1, Input 2, Output 1, or Output 2.  
DISABL  
DISABLE—Disables characterizer.  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
L1 OUT  
INPUT 1—Characterizer applied to Input 1.  
INPUT 2—Characterizer applied to Input 2.  
LOOP 1 OUTPUT—Characterizer applied to Loop 1  
Output. (NOTE 1)  
L2 OUT  
LOOP 2 OUTPUT—Characterizer applied to Loop 2  
Output.  
There are eight (Xn) Input values and eight (Yn) Output  
values to be selected. The following rules apply:  
• When Input 2 is used, Input 2 Ratio and Bias are  
applied to the Xn Values.  
• When one of the Loop outputs are selected, the Xn  
Input values are the Output from the control algorithm,  
and the Yn Output is the final control element action.  
This application is useful for non-linear control elements  
or Process Variable.  
A simple example is shown in Figure 4-2.  
ATTENTION The X values below should be entered as increasing values (from 0% to 100%) from N=0 to 8.  
X0 VALU2  
X1 VALU2  
X2 VALU2  
X3 VALU2  
X4 VALU2  
X5 VALU2  
X6 VALU2  
X7 VALU2  
X8 VALU2  
Y0 VALU2  
Y1 VALU2  
Y2 VALU2  
Y3 VALU2  
Y4 VALU2  
Y5 VALU2  
Y6 VALU2  
Y7 VALU2  
Y8 VALU2  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
0.00 to 99.99 %  
X0 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X1 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X2 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X3 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X4 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X5 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X6 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X7 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
X8 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)  
Y0 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y1 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y2 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y3 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y4 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y5 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y6 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y7 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
Y8 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 4-2  
Example of Eight Segment Characterizer  
Y AXIS  
100%  
Yn  
N
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Xn  
0.00  
5.00  
Y4  
0.00  
25.00  
10.00 37.00  
20.00 55.00  
Output  
from  
70.00  
31.00  
45.00 81.00  
87.00  
Characterizer  
Characterizer  
Disabled  
60.00  
80.00 94.50  
99.99  
99.99  
X AXIS  
100%  
0%  
0%  
X4  
Input to Characterizer  
22673  
106  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 4-5  
Algorithm Group Definitions, Continued  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
or Selection  
TOTALIZE  
TOTALIZER FUNCTION calculates and displays the total  
flow volume as measured by Input 1 or applied to either  
Input Algorithm 1 or Algorithm 2 to totalize the  
compensated flow rate being calculated by the algorithm.  
Displayed value is eight digits with a configurable scale  
factor.  
DISABL  
INPUT1  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
DISABLE—Disables the totalizer function.  
INPUT 1—Totalizer is applied to Input 1.  
IN AL1—Totalizer is applied to Input Algorithm 1.  
IN AL2—Totalizer is applied to Input Algorithm 2.  
ATTENTION The totalizer should always be reset to  
initialize the counters whenever it is enabled. Otherwise,  
the Σ (sigma) display will blink.  
READ ONLY  
ΣXXXXXXX  
Σ*En  
Current Scale Factor (Upper Display)  
Actual Current Totalized Value (Lower Display)  
TOT SCAL  
0
TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR—Selects the desired Scale  
Factor (i.e., Multiplier).  
*E0 = 1 x 10 = 1  
1
*E1 = 1 x 10 = 10  
The desired factor is applied to the calculated value to  
extend the maximum flow range that can be displayed.  
2
*E2 = 1 x 10 = 100  
3
*E3 = 1 x 10 = 1,000  
4
*E4 = 1 x 10 = 10,000  
5
*E5 = 1 x 10 = 100,000  
6
*E6 = 1 x 10 = 1,000,000  
TOT SEC  
TOTALIZER RESET LOCK—Allows the totalizer to be  
reset.  
UNLOCK  
LOCK  
UNLOCK—Allows the totalizer value to be reset.  
LOCK—Prevents the totalizer value from being reset.  
TOTALIZER RESET—Appears only if the totalizer is  
unlocked.  
Σ RSET ?  
NO  
NO—No Reset  
YES  
YES—Resets on next FUNCTION key press and  
displays the reset value.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
TOT RATE  
TOTALIZER INTEGRATION RATE—Determines the rate  
at which the Totalizer is updated.  
SECOND  
SECOND —Engineering units per second  
MINUTE—Engineering units per minute  
HOUR—Engineering units per hour  
DAY —Engineering units per day  
MINUTE  
HOUR  
DAY  
ML/DAY  
MIL/DAY—Millions of units per day  
ATTENTION The source of the Totalizer is averaged  
over the sample and update rates. For example, since the  
loop cycle speed is six per second, then with the Totalizer  
Rate set at once per minute, the source is averaged six  
times per second and the Totalizer value is updated with  
this average value ÷ 60 once per second.  
NOTE 1: Does not apply to Three Position Step Control.  
NOTE 2. If the calculated value of the quantity under the square root sign decreases to a value less than 0.010, the  
calculation will become linear as the calculated value decreases below 0.010.  
*Where: K = 0.001 to 1000 (configurable)  
Calc Hi and Calc Lo are configurable over a range of –999 to 9999  
108  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.7 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with various output types in the controller, the Digital  
Output Status, and the Current Duplex functionality.  
Output algorithm  
group prompts  
Table 4-6 lists all the function prompts in the Output Algorithm Set Up  
group and their definitions.  
Table 4-6  
Output Algorithm Group Definitions  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
OUT ALG  
The OUTPUT ALGORITHM lets you select the type of  
output you want. Not applicable with Control algorithm  
prompt 3PSTEP.  
Selections are hardware dependent. For example, if the  
controller does not have a current output, then none of the  
prompts for Output Algorithms that need a current output  
will appear. Likewise, if the controller does not have a  
relay output, then none of the prompts that need a relay  
output will appear.  
ATTENTION For all Duplex Output forms, PID heat  
parameters apply for controller output greater than 50 %;  
PID cool parameters apply for controller output less than  
50 %.  
TIME  
TIME SIMPLEX—This output algorithm uses Digital  
Output 1 for Time Proportional Control. The output is  
updated per the Loop sampling rate selection. Time  
Proportional Output has a resolution of 4.44 msec. Cycle  
Time is adjustable from 1 to 120 seconds.  
CURRNT  
POSITN  
CURRENT SIMPLEX—Type of output using one 4 mA to  
20 mA signal that can be fed into a positive or negative  
grounded load of 0 to 1000 ohms. The signal can be  
recalibrated for any desired range from 4 mA to 20 mA for  
0 % to 100 % output.  
POSITION PROPORTIONAL SIMPLEX—Type of output  
using two SPDT relays and a motor which has a 100 to  
1000 ohms feedback slidewire.  
Forces Input 2 to SLIDEW selection.  
ATTENTION Position Proportional is not available on  
two-loop or cascade controllers.  
Other prompts affected: DEADBAND, IN2 TYPE  
TIME D  
TIME DUPLEX—This output algorithm uses Digital  
Outputs 1 and 2 for Duplex Time Proportional Control. The  
outputs are updated per the Loop sampling rate selection.  
Time Proportional Output has a resolution of 4.44 msec.  
Cycle Time is adjustable from 1 second to 120 seconds.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
OUT ALG  
(continued)  
CUR D  
CURRENT DUPLEX is similar to current simplex but uses  
a second current output. The second output is usually  
scaled so that zero and span correspond with 0 % and  
50 % output (cool zone). When the output is 0 % to 50 %,  
the controller uses tuning parameter set #2, when the  
output is 50 % to 100 % it uses set #1.  
Other prompts affected: 4-20 RNG  
CUR TI  
TI CUR  
CURRENT/TIME DUPLEX is a variation of duplex with  
current active for 0 % to 50 % output (tuning set 2) and  
time is active 50 % to 100 % output (tuning set 1).  
Relay controls heat, current controls cool.  
Other prompts affected: 4-20 RNG  
TIME CURRENT DUPLEX is similar to CUR TI except that  
current is active for 50 % to 100 % and time is active for 0  
% to 50 %.  
Relay controls cool, current controls heat.  
Other prompts affected: 4-20 RNG  
4-20 RNG  
CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE ALGORITHM — Used with  
Output Algorithm selections CUR D, CUR TI, or TI CUR.  
50 PCT  
CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE (SPLIT)—This setting  
should be used for Relay/Current and Current/Relay  
Duplex Outputs. It can also be used for Current Duplex  
when an Auxiliary Output board is present. This enables  
the normal control current output to provide heat control  
and the auxiliary current output to provide cool control. To  
enable this:  
• AUX OUT in the Options Set Up group must be selected  
for Output.  
• The Auxiliary Current Output is scaled as desired for 0-  
50 % controller output.  
• Deadband for this configuration only applies to the  
Current Output. The Auxiliary Output must have the  
Deadband scaled in.  
FOR EXAMPLE: If a 2 % Deadband is desired, then enter  
2.0 for the Deadband selection in the Control Algorithm  
group. This will apply Deadband to the Current Output. In  
the Options group, set the Auxiliary Output 4mA VAL  
selection to 49.0 and the 20mA VAL selection to 0.0.  
100PCT  
CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE (FULL) enables the Current  
Output to provide both heat and cool functions for control  
over 0-100 % of the controller output. The PID heat  
parameters apply when the output is greater than 50 %  
and the PID cool parameters apply when the output is less  
than 50 %. The second current output is not required for  
this type of duplex operation.  
110  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
OUT2 ALG  
The OUTPUT ALGORITHM lets you select the type of  
output you want for the second control loop  
See OUT ALG for definitions.  
NONE  
NONE  
TIME SIMPLEX  
TIME  
CURRENT SIMPLEX (AUX OUT)  
CURRENT DUPLEX (AUX OUT)  
CURRENT/TIME DUPLEX  
TIME/CURRENT DUPLEX  
CURRNT  
CUR D  
CUR TI  
TI CUR  
ATTENTION If Time Duplex or TPSC is selected as the  
first control loop output, then TIME, CUR TI, and TI CUR  
are not available as the second control loop output.  
RLYSTATE  
DIGITAL OUTPUT STATUS AT 0 % OUTPUT allows the  
following selections:  
1OF2OF  
1ON2OF  
1OF2ON  
1ON2ON  
1OF2OF  
1ON2OF  
1OF2ON  
1ON2ON  
Output 1 de-energized  
Output 2 de-energized  
Output 1 energized  
Output 2 de-energized  
Output 1 de-energized  
Output 2 energized  
Output 1 energized  
Output 2 energized  
RLY TYPE  
RELAY CYCLE TIME INCREMENT selection is used only  
for Time Simplex and Duplex output configurations and  
affects both loops. This configuration sets the increment  
size of the relay cycle times in the Tuning and Tuning 2  
Set Up groups.  
MECHAN  
SOL ST  
ELECTROMECHANICAL RELAY—Cycle time in one-  
second increments.  
SOLID STATE RELAY—Cycle time in 1/3 second  
increments. This is useful for solid state relay applications  
that require shorter cycle times. DO NOT use this setting  
unless cycle times of less than 1 second are required.  
The Lockout selection must be set to NONE in order to  
view this selection.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.8 Input 1 Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
These are the parameters required for Input 1: actuation, transmitter  
characterization, high and low range values in engineering units, ratio,  
bias, filter, burnout, and emissivity.  
Input 1 group prompts  
Table 4-7 lists all the function prompts in the Input 1 Set Up group and  
their definitions.  
Table 4-7  
Input 1 Group Definitions  
Parameter  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Definition  
IN1 TYPE  
INPUT 1 ACTUATION TYPE – This selection determines  
what actuation you are going to use for Input 1.  
ATTENTION  
Changing the input type DISABL  
DISABLE—Disables Input.  
B TC—B Thermocouple  
will result in the loss of  
Field Calibration values  
and will restore Factory  
Calibration values.  
B TC  
E TC H  
E TC L  
J TC H  
J TC L  
K TC H  
K TC L  
NNM H  
NNM L  
NM90 H  
NM90 L  
NIC TC  
R TC  
E TC H—E Thermocouple High  
E TC L—E Thermocouple Low  
J TC H—J Thermocouple High  
J TC L—J Thermocouple Low  
K TC H—K Thermocouple High  
K TC L—K Thermocouple Low  
NNM H—Ni-Ni-Moly Thermocouple High  
NNM L—Ni-Ni-Moly Thermocouple Low  
NM90 H—NiMo-NiCo Thermocouple High  
NM90 L—NiMo-NiCo Thermocouple Low  
NIC TC—Nicrosil-Nisil Thermocouple  
R TC—R Thermocouple  
S TC  
S TC—S Thermocouple  
T TC H  
T TC L  
W TC H  
W TC L  
100 PT  
100 LO  
200 PT  
500 PT  
RAD RH  
RAD RI  
0-20mA  
4-20mA  
0-10mV  
0-50mV  
0-5 V  
T TC H—T Thermocouple High  
T TC L—T Thermocouple Low  
W TC H—W5W26 Thermocouple High  
W TC L—W5W26 Thermocouple Low  
100 PT—100 Ohm RTD High  
100 LO—100 Ohm RTD Low  
200 PT—200 Ohm RTD  
500 PT—500 Ohm RTD  
RAD RH—Radiamatic RH  
RAD RI—Radiamatic RI  
0-20mA—0 to 20 Milliamperes  
4-20mA—4 to 20 Milliamperes  
0-10mV—0 to 10 Millivolts  
0-50mV—0 to 50 Millivolts  
0-5 V—0 to 5 Volts  
1-5 V  
1-5 V—1 to 5 Volts  
0-10 V  
CARBON  
OXYGEN  
0-10 V—0 to 10 Volts  
Carbon  
Oxygen  
112  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
XMITTER  
Select one from the columns TRANSMITTER CHARACTERIZATION—This selection  
below  
lets you instruct the controller to characterize a linear input  
to represent a non-linear one.  
B TC  
S TC  
T TC H  
T TC L  
ATTENTION Prompt only appears when a linear  
actuation is selected at prompt IN1 TYPE.  
E TC H  
E TC L  
J TC H  
J TC L  
K TC H  
K TC L  
NNM H  
NNM L  
NM90 H  
NM90 L  
NIC TC  
R TC  
W TC H  
W TC L  
100 PT  
100 LO  
200 PT  
500 PT  
RAD RH  
RAD RI  
LINEAR  
SQROOT  
ANALYTIC  
FOR EXAMPLE:  
If input 1 is a 4 to 20 mA signal, but the signal represents  
a type K thermocouple, select K TC H and the controller  
will characterize the 4 to 20 mA signal so that it is treated  
as a type K thermocouple input (high range).  
Parameter definitions are the same as in IN1 TYPE.  
Analytic Input Selections and Ranges—This prompt  
appears only when XMITTER is set to ANALYTIC.  
Choosing an Analytic setting here will set the Input Range  
to appropriate Hi and Low values for that analytical  
application. You can adjust the Input Range if you want.  
ANALYTIC*  
* Expanded models only  
Input Hi  
as configured  
14.00  
Input Low  
as configured  
0.00  
NONE  
PH  
ORP mV  
NONE  
pH  
ORP  
1600  
–999  
(millivolts)  
CONDUCTIVITY  
(milli Siemens)  
CONDUCTIVITY  
(micro Siemens)  
RESISTIVITY  
(Megaohms)  
TOTAL DISSOLVED SOLIDS 9999  
(parts per million)  
TOTAL DISSOLVED SOLIDS 9999  
(parts per billion)  
CONCENTRATION  
(parts per thousand)  
DISSOLVED OXYGEN  
(parts per million)  
DISSOLVED OXYGEN  
(parts per billion)  
CONDmS  
CONDuS  
RSTVM^  
TDS PPm  
TDS PPb  
CONCPt  
DO PPm  
DO PPb  
20.00  
2000  
2000  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
20.00  
20.00  
2000  
IN1 HI  
–999. To 9999. Floating  
(in engineering units)  
INPUT 1 HIGH RANGE VALUE in engineering units is  
displayed for all inputs but can only be configured for  
linear or square root transmitter characterization.  
Scale the #1 input signal to the display value you want for  
100 %.  
EXAMPLE:  
Actuation (Input) = 4 to 20 mA  
Process Variable = Flow  
Range of Flow = 0 to 250 Gal/Min  
High Range display value = 250  
Then 20 mA = 250 Gal/Min  
The control setpoint will be limited by the range of units  
selected here.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
IN1 LO  
–999. To 9999. Floating  
(in engineering units)  
INPUT 1 LOW RANGE VALUE in engineering units is  
displayed for all inputs but can only be configured for  
linear or square root transmitter characterization. Scale  
the #1 input signal to the display value you want for 0 %.  
See example above. The control setpoint for Input 1 will  
be limited by the range of units selected here.  
RATIO 1  
BIAS IN1  
–20.00 to 20.00  
Floats to 3 decimal places  
RATIO ON INPUT 1—Select the Ratio value you want on  
Input 1.  
–999. to 9999.  
(in engineering units)  
BIAS ON INPUT 1 — Bias is used to compensate the  
input for drift of an input value due to deterioration of a  
sensor, or some other cause. Select the bias value you  
want on Input 1.  
FILTER 1  
0 to 120 seconds  
No filter = 0  
FILTER FOR INPUT 1—A software digital filter is provided  
for Input 1 to smooth the input signal. You can configure  
the first order lag time constant from 1 to 120 seconds. If  
you do not want filtering, enter 0.  
BURNOUT  
BURNOUT PROTECTION (SENSOR BREAK) provides  
most input types with upscale or downscale protection if  
the input fails.  
1-5V, 0-10V, or 4-20 mA inputs require no burnout or  
NONE selection.  
NONE  
UP  
NO BURNOUT—Pre-configured Failsafe output applied if  
failed input is detected (does not apply for an input out of  
range). Error message INPUT 1 FAIL is flashed on the  
lower display intermittently every 10 seconds.  
UPSCALE BURNOUT will make the PV signal increase to  
full scale when a sensor fails, and flash INPUT 1 FAIL on  
the lower display intermittently every 10 seconds.  
The controller remains in Automatic control mode and  
adjusts the controller output signal in response to the full  
scale PV signal developed by the Burnout circuitry.  
DOWN  
DOWNSCALE BURNOUT will make the PV signal  
decrease to the lower range value when a sensor fails,  
and flash INPUT 1 FAIL on the lower display intermittently  
every 10 seconds.  
The controller remains in Automatic control mode and  
adjusts the controller output signal in response to the zero  
percent PV signal developed by the Burnout circuitry.  
NO_FS  
NO FAILSAFE—This selection does not provide input  
failure detection and should only be used when an  
absolute accuracy is the most important criteria. (For this  
selection, no burnout signal is sent to the sensor.)  
ATTENTION For no Burnout, i.e. NONE, to function  
properly on a 4-20 mA input, there must be a dropping  
resistor directly across the input terminals (i.e., not  
remote), then the unit can detect the “zero” voltage that  
occurs when the 4-20 mA line is opened.  
114  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
EMISSIV1  
0.01 to 1.00  
EMISSIVITY is a correction factor applied to the  
Radiamatic input signal that is the ratio of the actual  
energy emitted from the target to the energy which would  
be emitted if the target were a perfect radiator.  
Available only for Radiamatic inputs.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.9 Input 2 Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
These are the parameters required for Input 2: actuation, transmitter  
characterization, high and low range values in engineering units, ratio,  
bias, filter, burnout, and emissivity.  
ATTENTION Prompts for Input 2 appear only if the Input 2 PWA is  
installed. If the Loop1 Control Algorithm is set for PID A, PID B, or  
PD+MR and the Loop1 Output Algorithm is set for Position Proportional  
then the Input 2 configuration prompts are not displayed.  
Input 2 group prompts  
Table 4-8 lists all the function prompts in the Input 2 Set Up group and  
their definitions.  
Table 4-8  
Input 2 Group Definitions  
Parameter  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Definition  
IN2 TYPE  
INPUT 2 ACTUATION TYPE – This selection determines  
what actuation you are going to use for Input 2.  
ATTENTION  
Same as for Input 1 (except  
Carbon and Oxygen are not  
used) plus:  
Changing the input type  
will result in the loss of  
Field Calibration values  
and will restore Factory  
Calibration values.  
SLIDEW*  
SLIDEWIRE  
*If the Loop 1 Output Algorithm is set for Position  
Proportional, then the Input 2 actuation is forced to  
slidewire (SLIDEW). If Loop 1 Control Algorithm is set for  
Three Position Step Control, then the SLIDEW setting  
allows the motor position to be shown on the Lower  
Display. The SLIDEW setting is not available on two-loop  
or cascade controllers.  
XMITTER2  
ANALYTIC  
IN2 HI  
Input 2 ranges and  
selections are same as for  
Input 1.  
Refer to Input 1 parameters for definitions.  
IN2 LO  
RATIO 2  
BIAS IN2  
FILTER 2  
BURNOUT2  
EMISSIV2  
116  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.10 Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
These are the parameters required for Input 3: actuation, transmitter  
characterization, high and low range values in engineering units, ratio,  
bias, and filter.  
ATTENTION Input 3 prompts appear on expanded models only. Prompts  
for Input 3 only appear if Input 2 PWA is installed and the actuation for  
Input 2 is configured for one of the following types: 0-5 Vdc, 1-5 Vdc,  
0-20 mA, or 4-20 mA.  
Input 3 group prompts  
Table 4-9 lists all the function prompts in the Input 3 Set Up group and  
their definitions.  
Table 4-9  
Input 3 Group Definitions  
Parameter  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Definition  
IN3 TYPE  
INPUT 3 ACTUATION TYPE – This selection determines  
what actuation you are going to use for Input 3.  
ATTENTION  
Changing the input type  
will result in the loss of  
Field Calibration values  
and will restore Factory  
Calibration values.  
DISABL  
DISABL—Disables Input 3  
0-20mA—0 to 20 milliamperes  
4-20mA—4 to 20 milliamperes  
0-5 V—0 to 5 volts  
0-20mA  
4-20mA  
0-5 V  
1-5 V  
1-5 V—1 to 5 volts  
XMITTER2  
IN3 HI  
IN3 LO  
RATIO 3  
BIAS IN3  
FILTER 3  
Input 3 ranges and  
Refer to Input 1 parameters for definitions.  
selections are same as for  
Input 1 except Burnout and  
Emissivity are not available.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.11 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
The functions listed in this group deal with how the Single-Loop process  
controller or Loop 1 of a Two-Loop process controller will control the  
process including: PV source, Number of tuning parameter sets, Setpoint  
source, Tracking, Power-up recall, Setpoint limits, Output direction, rate  
and limits, Power-up preset outputs, Dropoff, Deadband, and Hysteresis.  
Control group  
prompts  
Table 4-10 lists all the function prompts in the Control Set Up group and  
their definitions.  
Table 4-10  
Control Group Definitions  
Parameter  
Lower Display  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Prompt  
Definition  
PV SOURCE  
PROCESS VARIABLE SOURCE —Select the source of  
the Process Variable.  
INP 1  
INPUT 1  
INPUT 2  
INP 2  
INPUT ALGORITHM 1  
INPUT ALGORITHM 2  
INPUT 3  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
PID SETS  
NUMBER OF TUNING PARAMETER SETS—This  
selection lets you choose one or two sets of tuning  
constants (gain, rate, and reset).  
1 ONLY  
ONE SET ONLY—Only one set of tuning parameters is  
available. Configure the values for:  
Gain (proportional band),  
Rate,  
Reset Time, and  
Cycle Time (if time proportional is used).  
2KEYBD  
TWO SETS KEYBOARD SELECTABLE—Two sets of  
tuning parameters can be configured and can be selected  
at the operator interface or by using the Digital Inputs.  
Press LOWER DISPLAY key until you see PID SET1 or  
PID SET2 then press  
sets. Configure the values for:  
Gain, Rate, Reset, Cycle Time  
or  
to switch between  
Gain #2, Rate #2, Reset #2, Cycle #2 Time  
See Subsection 5.10 for procedures.  
118  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
PID SETS  
(continued)  
2PV SW  
TWO SETS PV AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER—When the  
process variable is GREATER than the value set at  
prompt SW VALUE (Switchover Value), the controller will  
use Gain, Rate, Reset, and Cycle Time. The active PID  
SET can be read in the lower display.  
When the process variable is LESS than the value set at  
prompt SW VALUE, the controller will use Gain #2, Rate  
#2, Reset #2, and Cycle #2 Time. The active PID SET can  
be read in the lower display.  
Other prompts affected: SW VALUE  
2SP SW  
TWO SETS SP AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER—When the  
setpoint is GREATER than the value set at prompt SW  
VALUE (Switchover Value), the controller will use Gain,  
Rate, Reset, and Cycle.  
When the setpoint is LESS than the value set at prompt  
SW VALUE, the controller will use Gain #2, Rate #2,  
Reset #2, and Cycle #2.  
Other prompts affected: SW VALUE  
GAIN S*  
GAIN SCHEDULING allows you to schedule eight user-  
defined Gain segments applied over a user-defined PV  
range. Enter Gain and PV values under Tuning Set Up  
prompts. PB or GAIN selection in this group also applies.  
*Part of Math option DC330E  
ATTENTION Gain scheduling automatically disables  
Accutune for this loop.  
SW VALUE  
Value in engineering units  
within PV or SP range limits  
AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER VALUE—This is the value of  
Process Variable or Setpoint at which the controller will  
switch from Tuning Constant Set #2 to Set #1.  
Only appears when PID SETS selection is configured for  
either 2 PVSW or 2 SPSW.  
LSP’S  
LOCAL SETPOINT SOURCE—This selection determines  
what your local setpoint source will be.  
1 ONLY  
TWO  
LOCAL SETPOINT—The setpoint entered from the  
keyboard.  
TWO LOCAL SETPOINTS—This selection lets you  
switch between two local setpoints using the  
SETPOINT SELECT key.  
THREE  
THREE LOCAL SETPOINTS—This selection lets you  
switch between three local setpoints using the  
SETPOINT SELECT key. LSP 3 is mutually exclusive  
with RSP or Internal Cascade.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
RSP SRC  
REMOTE SETPOINT SOURCE—This selection  
determines what your remote setpoint source will be when  
toggled by the SETPOINT SELECT key or Digital Input.  
Not available for Cascade PID Loop.  
RSP, Cascade, and SP3 are mutually exclusive.  
NONE—No remote setpoint.  
INP 2—Remote Setpoint is Input 2.  
NONE  
INP 2  
IN AL1—Remote Setpoint using Input 1 algorithm.  
IN AL2—Remote Setpoint using Input 2 algorithm.  
INP 3—Remote Setpoint is Input 3.  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
ATTENTION To cycle through the available local  
setpoints and remote setpoint, press and hold in the  
[SETPOINT SELECT] key. When the key is released, the  
setpoint selection currently displayed will be the new  
setpoint selection.  
AUTOBIAS  
AUTOBIAS is used for bumpless transfer when  
transferring from local setpoint to remote setpoint. Auto  
Bias calculates and adds a bias to remote setpoint input  
each time a transfer is made.  
Only available if no tracking is selected.  
ENABLE  
DISABL  
ENABLE—Enables auto bias.  
DISABLE—Disables auto bias.  
SP TRACK  
SETPOINT TRACKING—The local setpoint can be  
configured to track either PV or RSP as listed below. Not  
configurable when Auto Bias is set.  
ATTENTION For selections other than NONE, LSP is  
stored in nonvolatile memory only when there is a mode  
change; i.e., when switching from RSP to LSP or from  
Manual to Automatic. If power is lost, then the current LSP  
value is also lost.  
NONE  
NO TRACKING—If local setpoint tracking is not  
configured, the LSP will not be altered when transfer from  
RSP to LSP is made.  
PV  
PV—Local setpoint tracks the PV when in manual.  
RSP  
RSP—Local setpoint tracks remote setpoint when in  
automatic. When the controller transfers out of remote  
setpoint, the last value of the remote setpoint (RSP) is  
inserted into the local setpoint.  
PWR MODE  
POWER UP CONTROLLER MODE RECALL—This  
selection determines which mode and setpoint the  
controller will use when the controller restarts after a  
power loss. It applies to both loops.  
MANUAL  
A LSP  
MANUAL, LSP—At power-up, the controller will use  
manual mode with the local setpoint displayed.  
AUTOMATIC MODE, LAST LSP—At power-up, the  
controller will use automatic mode with the last local  
setpoint used before power down displayed.  
A RSP  
AUTOMATIC MODE, LAST RSP—At power-up, the  
controller will use automatic mode with the last remote  
setpoint used before power down displayed.  
120  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
AM SP  
LAST MODE/LAST SETPOINT used before power down.  
LAST MODE/LAST LOCAL SETPOINT on power down.  
AM LSP  
PWR OUT  
TPSC (Three-Position Step Control) OUTPUT START-  
UP MODE—This selection determines what position the  
motor will be in when powered up or in the failsafe  
position.  
For Three Position  
Step Control Only  
(Note 3)  
LAST  
LAST OUTPUT—At power-up in automatic mode, the  
motor position will be the last one prior to power down.  
When the unit goes into FAILSAFE, it will stay in  
automatic mode; motor will not be driven to the configured  
failsafe position.  
F’SAFE  
FAILSAFE OUTPUT—At power-up in manual mode, the  
motor will be driven to either the 0 % or 100 % output  
position, whichever is selected at prompt FAILSAFE. For  
Burnout/None, when the unit goes into FAILSAFE, it will  
go to manual mode; motor will be driven to the configured  
failsafe position.  
SP HiLIM  
SP LoLIM  
ACTION  
0 to 100 % of PV span in  
engineering units  
SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT*—This selection prevents the  
local and remote setpoints from going above the value  
selected here. The setting must be equal or less than the  
upper range of the inputs.  
0 to 100 % of PV span in  
engineering units  
SET POINT LOW LIMIT*—This selection prevents the  
local and remote setpoints from going below the value  
selected here. The setting must be equal or greater than  
the lower range of the inputs.  
CONTROL OUTPUT DIRECTION—Select direct or  
reverse acting.  
DIRECT  
DIRECT ACTING CONTROL—The controller’s output  
increases as the process variable increases.  
REVRSE  
REVERSE ACTING CONTROL—The controller’s output  
decreases as the process variable increases.  
*The local setpoint will automatically adjust itself to be within the setpoint limit range. For example, if SP = 1500 and  
the SP HiLIM is changed to 1200, the new local setpoint will be 1200.  
OUT RATE  
OUTPUT CHANGE RATE—Enables or disables the  
Output Change Rate. The maximum rate is set at prompt  
PCT/M UP or PCT/M DN. Only available for PID-A, PID-B,  
PD+MR control algorithms.  
ENABLE  
DISABL  
ENABLE—Allows output rate.  
DISABLE—Disables output rate.  
PCT/M UP  
PCT/M DN  
OUTHiLIM  
0 to 9999 % per minute  
0 to 9999 % per minute  
–5.0 to 105 % of output  
OUTPUT RATE UP VALUE—This selection limits the rate  
at which the output can change upward. Enter a value in  
percent per minute. Appears only if OUT RATE is enabled.  
“0” means no output rate applied.  
OUTPUT RATE DOWN VALUE—This selection limits the  
rate at which the output can change downward. Enter a  
value in percent per minute. Appears only if OUT RATE is  
enabled. “0” means no output rate.  
HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT—This is the highest value of output  
beyond which you do not want the controller automatic  
output to exceed. Use 0 % to 100 % for digital output type.  
Use –5 % to 105 % for current position output.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
OUTLoLIM  
–5.0 to 105 % of output  
LOW OUTPUT LIMIT—This is the lowest value of output  
below which you do not want the controller automatic  
output to exceed.  
Use 0 % to 100 % for digital output type.  
Use –5 % to 105 % for current position output.  
I Hi LIM*  
I Lo LIM*  
Within the range of the  
output limits  
HIGH RESET LIMIT—This is the highest value of output  
beyond which you want no reset to occur.  
Within the range of the  
output limits  
LOW RESET LIMIT—This is the lowest value of output  
beyond which you want no reset to occur.  
DROPOFF*  
–5 to 105 % of output  
CONTROLLER DROPOFF VALUE—Output value below  
which the controller output will drop off to the low output  
limit value set in prompt OUTLoLIM.  
DEADBAND  
DEADBAND is an adjustable gap between the operating  
ranges of output 1 and output 2 in which neither output  
operates (positive value) or both outputs operate (negative  
value).  
–5.0 to 25.0 %  
0.0 to 25.0 %  
0.5 to 5.0 %  
Time Duplex  
On-Off Duplex  
Position Proportional and Three Position Step  
*Reset limits and Dropoff are not displayed when Three Position Step Control is configured.  
OUT HYST  
0.0 to 100.0 % of PV span  
HYSTERESIS (OUTPUT RELAY) is an adjustable overlap  
of the ON/OFF states of each control output. This is the  
difference between the value of the process variable at  
which the control outputs energize and the value at which  
they de-energize.  
Only applicable for ON/OFF control.  
FAILMODE  
FAILSAFE MODE  
NO LAT  
NON LATCHING—Controller stays in last mode that was  
being used (automatic or manual); output goes to failsafe  
value. (NOTE 1, NOTE 2)  
LATCH  
LATCHING—Controller goes to manual mode; output  
goes to failsafe value. (NOTE 2)  
FAILSAFE  
0 to 100 %  
FAILSAFE OUTPUT VALUE—The value used here will  
also be the output level when you have Communications  
SHED set to failsafe or when NO BURNOUT is configured  
and Input 1 fails.  
Applies for all output types except 3 Position Step.  
THREE POSITION STEP FAILSAFE OUTPUT  
0 PCT—Motor goes to closed position.  
0 PCT  
100PCT  
100PCT—Motor goes to open position.  
SW_FAIL  
PDMR/Position Proportional motor position when slidewire  
fails.  
0 OCT  
0 PCT—Motor goes to closed position.  
100PCT—Motor goes to open position.  
Note: PWR OUT must be configured for FSAF.  
100 PCT  
122  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
MAN OUT  
AUTO OUT  
PBorGAIN*  
0 to 100 %  
POWER-UP PRESET MANUAL OUTPUT—At power-up,  
the controller will go to manual and the output to the value  
set here. (NOTE 1)  
0 to 100 %  
POWER-UP PRESET AUTOMATIC OUTPUT—At power-  
up, the controller will begin its automatic control at the  
output value set here. (NOTE 1)  
PROPORTIONAL BAND UNITS—Select one of the  
following for the Proportional (P) term of the PID algorithm:  
PB PCT  
GAIN  
PROPORTIONAL BAND selects units of percent  
proportional band for the P term of the PID algorithm.  
Where:  
PB % = 100 % FS  
GAIN  
GAIN selects the unitless term of gain for the P term of the  
PID algorithm.  
Where:  
GAIN = 100 % FS  
PB%  
MINorRPM*  
RESET UNITS—Selects units of minutes per repeat or  
repeats per minute for the I term of the PID algorithm.  
20 Repeats per Minute = 0.05 Minutes per Repeat.  
RPM  
MIN  
REPEATS PER MINUTE—The number of times per  
minute that the proportional action is repeated by reset.  
MINUTES PER REPEAT—The time between each repeat  
of the proportional action by reset.  
*Selection here is used for both Loop 1 and Loop 2 if available. Also applies to Gain Scheduling on Loops 1 and 2.  
NOTE 1: Does not apply to Three Position Step Control.  
NOTE 2: If controller is in Manual upon failure, output will maintain its value at time of failure.  
NOTE 3:These selections appear when:  
1. Control Algorithm is selected for 3PSTEP.  
2. Control Algorithm is selected for PD+MR and Output Algorithm is selected for Position Proportional.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.12 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
The functions listed in this group deal with how Loop 2 of a Two-Loop  
process controller will control the process including: PV source, Number  
of tuning parameter sets, Setpoint source, Tracking, Power-up recall,  
Setpoint limits, Output direction, rate and limits, Dropoff, Deadband, and  
Hysteresis.  
Only available on Expanded Model DC330E-XX-XXX.  
Control 2 group  
prompts  
Table 4-11 lists all the function prompts in the Control 2 Set Up group and  
their definitions.  
Table 4-11  
Control 2 Group Definitions  
Parameter  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Definition  
PV 2 SRC  
PROCESS VARIABLE 2 SOURCE—Select the source of  
the Process Variable for Loop 2.  
INP 1  
INPUT 1  
INPUT 2  
INP 2  
INPUT ALGORITHM 1  
INPUT ALGORITHM 2  
INPUT 3  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
FORCE MA  
FORCE MANUAL/AUTO links Auto/Manual modes. If  
either loop changes mode due to a front panel change,  
digital input action, or failsafe action, the other loop tracks  
that mode.  
DISABL  
LINK12  
DISABL—Disables FORCE MA.  
LINK12—Links modes for both loops.  
PID SETS  
NUMBER OF TUNING PARAMETER SETS—This  
selection lets you choose one or two sets of tuning  
constants (gain, rate, and reset).  
1 ONLY  
ONE SET ONLY—Only one set of tuning parameters is  
available. Configure the values for:  
Gain (proportional band)  
Rate  
Reset Time  
Cycle Time (if time proportional is used)  
2KEYBD  
TWO SETS KEYBOARD SELECTABLE—Two sets of  
tuning parameters can be configured and can be selected  
at the operator interface or by using the Digital Inputs.  
Press LOWER DISPLAY key until you see PID SET3 or  
PID SET4 then press  
or  
to switch between  
sets. Configure the values for:  
Gain #3, Rate #3 , Reset #3, Cycle #3 Time  
Gain #4, Rate #4, Reset #4, Cycle #4 Time  
See Subsection 5.10 for procedure.  
124  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
PID SETS  
(continued)  
2PV SW  
TWO SETS PV AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER—When the  
process variable is GREATER than the value set at  
prompt SW VALUE (Switchover Value), the controller will  
use Gain #3, Rate #3, Reset #3, and Cycle #3 Time. The  
active PID SET can be read in the lower display.  
When the process variable is LESS than the value set at  
prompt SW VALUE, the controller will use Gain #4, Rate  
#4, Reset #4, and Cycle #4 Time. The active PID SET can  
be read in the lower display.  
Other prompts affected: SW VALUE  
2SP SW  
TWO SETS SP AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER—When the  
setpoint is GREATER than the value set at prompt SW  
VALUE (Switchover Value), the controller will use Gain #3,  
Rate #3, Reset #3, and Cycle #3.  
When the setpoint is LESS than the value set at prompt  
SW VALUE, the controller will use Gain #4, Rate #4,  
Reset #4, and Cycle #4.  
Other prompts affected: SW VALUE  
GAIN S  
GAIN SCHEDULING allows you to schedule eight user-  
defined Gain segments applied over a user-defined PV  
range. Enter Gain and PV values under Loop 2 Tuning Set  
Up prompts. PBorGAIN selection in Control Set Up group  
also applies.  
ATTENTION Gain scheduling automatically disables  
Accutune for this loop.  
SW VALUE  
Value in engineering units  
within PV or SP range limits  
AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER VALUE—This is the value of  
Process Variable or Setpoint at which the controller will  
switch from Tuning Constant Set #4 to Set #3.  
Only appears when PID SETS selections 2 PVSW or 2  
SPSW are selected.  
LSP’S  
LOCAL SETPOINT SOURCE—This selection determines  
what your local setpoint source will be.  
1 ONLY  
TWO  
LOCAL SETPOINT—The setpoint entered from the  
keyboard.  
TWO LOCAL SETPOINTS—This selection lets you switch  
between two local setpoints using the  
SETPOINT SELECT key.  
THREE  
THREE LOCAL SETPOINTS—This selection lets you  
switch between three local setpoints using the  
SETPOINT SELECT key. LSP 3 is mutually exclusive  
with RSP or Internal Cascade.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
RSP SRC  
REMOTE SETPOINT SOURCE—This selection  
determines what your remote setpoint source will be when  
toggled by the SETPOINT SELECT or Digital Input.  
NONE—No remote setpoint,  
NONE  
INP 2  
IN AL1  
INPUT 2—Remote Setpoint is Input 2.  
INPUT ALGORITHM 1—Remote Setpoint using Input 1  
algorithm.  
INPUT ALGORITHM 2—Remote Setpoint using Input 2  
algorithm.  
INP 3—Remote Setpoint is Input 3.  
IN AL2  
INP 3  
ATTENTION To cycle through the available local  
setpoints and remote setpoint, press and hold in the  
[SETPOINT SELECT] key. When the key is released, the  
setpoint selection currently displayed will be the new  
setpoint selection.  
AUTOBIAS  
AUTO BIAS is used for bumpless transfer when  
transferring from local setpoint to remote setpoint. Auto  
Bias calculates and adds a bias to the remote setpoint  
input each time a transfer is made. Available for any  
analog input RSP source and if no tracking is selected.  
ENABLE  
DISABL  
ENABLE—Enables auto bias.  
DISABLE—Disables auto bias.  
SPTRACK  
SETPOINT TRACKING—The local setpoint can be  
configured to track either PV or RSP as listed below. Not  
configurable when Auto Bias is set.  
ATTENTION For selections other than NONE, LSP is  
stored in nonvolatile memory only when there is a mode  
change; i.e., when switching from RSP to LSP or from  
Manual to Automatic. If power is lost, then the current LSP  
value is also lost.  
NONE  
NO TRACKING—If local setpoint tracking is not  
configured, the LSP will not be altered when transfer from  
RSP to LSP is made.  
PV  
PV—Local setpoint tracks the PV when in manual mode.  
RSP  
RSP—Local setpoint tracks remote setpoint. When the  
controller transfers out of remote setpoint, the last value of  
the remote setpoint (RSP) is inserted into the local  
setpoint.  
SP HiLIM  
SP LoLIM  
ACTION  
0 to 100 % of span input in  
engineering units with  
decimal place  
SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT*—This selection prevents the  
local and remote setpoints from going above the value  
selected here. The setting must be equal or less than the  
upper range of the inputs.  
0 to 100 % of span input in  
engineering units with  
decimal place  
SETPOINT LOW LIMIT*—This selection prevents the  
local and remote setpoints from going below the value  
selected here. The setting must be equal or greater than  
the lower range of the inputs.  
CONTROL OUTPUT DIRECTION—Select direct or  
reverse acting control.  
DIRECT  
DIRECT ACTING CONTROL—The controller's output  
increases as the process variable increases.  
126  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
REVRSE  
REVERSE ACTING CONTROL—The controller's output  
decreases as the process variable increases.  
OUT RATE  
OUTPUT CHANGE RATE—Enables or disables the  
Output Change Rate. The maximum rate is set at prompt  
PCT/M UP or PCT/M DN.  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
DISABLE—Disables output rate.  
ENABLE—Allows output rate.  
PCT/M UP  
PCT/M DN  
OUT HiLIM  
0 to 9999 % per minute  
0 to 9999 % per minute  
–5 to 105 % of output  
OUTPUT RATE UP VALUE—This selection limits the rate  
at which the output can change upward. Enter a value in  
percent per minute. Appears only if OUT RATE is enabled.  
“0” means no output rate applied.  
OUTPUT RATE DOWN VALUE—This selection limits the  
rate at which the output can change downward. Enter a  
value in percent per minute. Appears only if OUT RATE is  
enabled. “0” means no output rate.  
HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT—This is the highest value of output  
beyond which you do not want the controller automatic  
output to exceed.  
Use 0 to 100 % for digital output type.  
Use 5 to 105 % for current output.  
OUT LoLIM  
–5 to 105 % of output  
LOW OUTPUT LIMIT—This is the lowest value of output  
below which you do not want the controller automatic  
output to exceed.  
Use 0 % to 100 % for digital output type.  
Use 5 % to 105 % for current output.  
*The Local Setpoint will automatically adjust itself to be within the setpoint limit range. For example, if SP = 1500 and  
the SP HiLIM is changed to 1200, the new Local Setpoint will be 1200.  
I Hi LIM  
Within the range of the  
output limits  
HIGH RESET LIMIT—This is the highest value of output  
beyond which you want no reset to occur.  
I Lo LIM  
Within the range of the  
output limits  
LOW RESET LIMIT—This is the lowest value of output  
beyond which you want no reset to occur.  
DROPOFF  
–5 to 105 % of output  
CONTROLLER DROPOFF VALUE—Output value below  
which the controller output will drop off to the low output  
limit value set in prompt OUTLoLIM.  
DEADBAND  
FAILMODE  
–5.0 to 5.0 %  
DEADBAND is an adjustable gap between the operating  
ranges of output 1 and output 2 in which neither output  
operates (positive value) or both outputs operate (negative  
value).  
FAILSAFE MODE  
NO LAT  
LATCH  
NON LATCHING—Controller stays in last mode  
(automatic or manual); output goes to failsafe value.  
LATCHING—Controller goes to manual mode; output  
goes to failsafe value.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
FAILSAFE  
0 to 100 %  
FAILSAFE OUTPUT 2 VALUE—The value used here will  
also be the output level when you have Communications  
SHED set to failsafe or when NO BURNOUT is configured  
and input 1 fails.  
ATTENTION At power-up, the Loop 2 Output is set to  
the Failsafe Output 2 value.  
128  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.13 Options Set Up Group  
Introduction  
Configure the remote mode switch (Digital Inputs) to a specific contact  
closure response, or configure the Auxiliary Output to be a specific  
selection with desired scaling.  
Option group prompts  
Table 4-12 lists all the function prompts in the Options Set Up group and  
their functions.  
Table 4-12  
Options Group Definitions  
Parameter  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Definition  
AUX OUT  
or  
AUXILIARY OUTPUT SELECTION FOR ONE LOOP  
or  
CUR OUT2*  
AUXILIARY OUTPUT SELECTION FOR TWO LOOPS  
ATTENTION Prompts  
for the Auxiliary Output  
Selection appear only if  
one of the Auxiliary  
Output boards is  
This selection provides an mA output representing one of  
several control parameters. The display for auxiliary output  
viewing will be in engineering units for all but output.  
Output will be displayed in percent.  
Other prompts affected by these selections: 4mA VAL and  
20mA VAL.  
installed.  
*DE330E only  
ATTENTION When the controller is configured for Two-  
Loop operation, and the Loop 2 Output selection requires  
a current output, the Auxiliary Output selection is  
automatically set to Output 2 and all other selections are  
locked out.  
ATTENTION Output cannot be configured when Three  
Position Step Control is used.  
DISABL  
NO AUXILIARY OUTPUT  
INP 1  
INPUT 1—This represents the configured range of input 1.  
FOR EXAMPLE:  
Type J Thermocouple (0 °F to 1600 °F)  
0 °F display = 0 % output  
1600 °F display = 100 % output  
INP 2  
INPUT 2 represents the value of the configured range of  
input 2.  
INP 3  
INPUT 3 represents the value of the configured range of  
input 3.  
CB OUT  
CONTROL BLOCK OUTPUT—Represents the  
uncharacterized use of automatic control valve which  
allows the characterizer to characterize the output on  
Analog Output 1 and the Auxiliary Output to use the  
uncharacterized output value as Output 2.  
PV  
PROCESS VARIABLE—Represents the value of the  
Process Variable. PV = Input XxRatioX + BiasX  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
AUX OUT  
DEV  
DEVIATION (PROCESS VARIABLE MINUS  
SETPOINT)—Represents –100 % to +100 % of the  
selected PV span in engineering units.  
FOR EXAMPLE:  
Type T Thermocouple  
PV range = –300 °F to +700 °F  
PV span = 1000 °F  
Deviation Range = –1000 °F to +1000 °F  
If PV = 500 °F  
and SP = 650 °F  
then Deviation Display = –150 °F  
Auxiliary Output = 42.5 %  
When Deviation is selected, only one operating parameter  
will be entered. This value represents the deviation level  
that will produce 20 mA (100 %) output. Zero deviation will  
produce a center scale (12 mA or 50 %) output. A  
negative deviation equal in magnitude to the auxiliary  
output high value will produce a low end (4 mA or 0 %)  
output.  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT—Represents the displayed controller Loop 1  
output in percent (%). Cannot be used with  
3 Position Step Control.  
SP  
SETPOINT—Represents the Loop1 value of the setpoint  
in units of PV.  
LSP 1  
IN AL1  
IN AL2  
PV2  
LOCAL SETPOINT ONE—Auxiliary output represents  
Loop1 local setpoint one regardless of active setpoint.  
INPUT ALGORITHM 1 OUTPUT—Represents the output  
from input algorithm 1.  
INPUT ALGORITHM 2 OUTPUT—Represents the output  
from input algorithm 2.  
PROCESS VARIABLE 2—Represents the value of the  
Process Variable for Loop 2.  
DEV 2  
DEVIATION 2 (PROCESS VARIABLE MINUS  
SETPOINT)—Represents –100 % to +100 % of the  
selected PV span in engineering units for Loop 2.  
When Deviation is selected, only one operating parameter  
will be entered. This value represents the deviation level  
that will produce 20 mA (100 %) output. Zero deviation will  
produce a center scale (12 mA or 50 %) output. A  
negative deviation equal in magnitude to the auxiliary  
output high value will produce a low end (4 mA or 0 %)  
output.  
OUTPT2  
SP L2  
OUTPUT 2—Represents the displayed controller output in  
percent (%) for Loop 2.  
SETPOINT 2—Represents the value of the setpoint in  
units of PV for Loop 2.  
LSP1 2  
LOCAL SETPOINT 2—Represents the value of local  
setpoint #1 in units of PV for Loop 2.  
130  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
AUX OUT  
(continued)  
CB OUT2  
CONTROL BLOCK OUTPUT2—Represents the  
uncharacterized use of automatic control valve which  
allows the characterizer to characterize the output on  
Analog Output 1 and the Auxiliary Output to use the  
uncharacterized output value as Output 2.  
4mA VAL*  
Low Scale Value within the  
range of the selected  
variable to represent 4 mA  
AUXILIARY OUTPUT LOW SCALING FACTOR—Use a  
value in engineering units to represent all AUX OUT  
parameters except output.  
Use value in percent (%) for output. (Output can be  
between –5 % and +105 %.)  
20mA VAL*  
High Scale Value within the  
range of the selected  
variable to represent 20 mA  
AUXILIARY OUTPUT HIGH SCALING FACTOR—Use a  
value in engineering units to represent all AUX OUT  
parameters except output.  
Use a value in percent (%) for Output. (Output can be  
between –5 % and +105 %.)  
*When Deviation is selected, only one operating parameter will be entered. This value represents the deviation level  
that will produce 20 mA (100 %) output. Zero deviation will produce a center scale (12 mA or 50 %) output. A  
negative deviation equal in magnitude to the auxiliary output high value will produce a low end (4 mA or 0 %) output.  
DIG IN 1  
DIGITAL INPUT 1 SELECTIONS—All selections are  
available for Input 1. The controller returns to its original  
state when contact opens, except when overruled by the  
keyboard.  
ATTENTION When the controller is configured for either  
Cascade or Two-Loop control, then digital input #1  
operates only on Loop 1 and digital input #2 operates only  
on Loop 2.  
NONE  
NO DIGITAL INPUT SELECTIONS  
TO MAN  
TO MANUAL—Contact closure puts the affected loop into  
manual mode. Contact open returns controller to former  
mode.  
TO LSP  
TO LOCAL SETPOINT—When a remote setpoint is  
configured, contact closure puts the controller into local  
setpoint 1. When contact opens, the controller returns to  
former operation—local or remote setpoint—unless  
SETPOINT SELECT key is pressed while digital input is  
active. If this happens, the controller will stay in the local  
setpoint mode when contact opens.  
TO 2SP  
TO 3SP  
TO DIR  
TO LOCAL SETPOINT TWO—Contact closure puts the  
controller into local setpoint 2.  
TO LOCAL SETPOINT THREE—Contact closure puts the  
controller into local setpoint 3.  
TO DIRECT ACTION—Contact closure selects direct  
controller action.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
DIG IN 1  
(continued)  
ToHOLD  
TO HOLD—Contact closure suspends Setpoint Program  
or Setpoint Ramp. When contact reopens, the controller  
starts from the Hold point of the Ramp/Program unless the  
Ramp/Program was not previously started via the  
RUN/HOLD key.  
This selection applies to either loop.  
ToPID2  
PV 2IN  
PV 3IN  
RERUN  
TO PID2—Contact closure selects PID Set 2.  
PV=INPUT 2—Contact closure selects PV = Input 2.  
PV=INPUT 3—Contact closure selects PV = Input 3.  
RERUN--Allows the Setpoint Programmer to be reset to  
the initial segment of its current cycle , unit stays in  
previous mode.  
TO RUN  
ToBEGN  
RUN—Contact closure starts a stopped SP Ramp or  
Program. Upper left character blinks “R”. Reopening the  
contact puts controller in HOLD mode.  
This selection applies to either loop.  
EXTERNAL SP PROGRAM RESET—Contact closure  
resets SP Program back to the beginning of the first  
segment in the program and places the program in the  
HOLD mode. Program cycle number is not affected.  
Reopening switch has no effect.  
This selection applies to either loop.  
ATTENTION Once the last segment of the setpoint  
program has timed out, the controller enters the mode of  
action specified in the configuration data and the program  
cannot be reset to the beginning of the first segment by  
digital input closure.  
STOP I  
INHIBIT INTEGRAL (RESET)—Contact closure disables  
PID Integral (Reset) action.  
MAN FS  
MANUAL FAILSAFE OUTPUT—Controller goes to  
Manual mode, output goes to the Failsafe value.  
ATTENTION This will cause a bump in the output when  
switching from Automatic to Manual. The switch back from  
Manual to Automatic is bumpless. When the switch is  
closed, the output can be adjusted from the keyboard.  
ToLOCK  
ToAout  
KEYBOARD LOCKOUT—Contact closure disables all  
keys. Lower display shows LOCKED if a key is pressed.  
AUTOMATIC OUTPUT—Contact closure sends output to  
the value set at Control prompt AUTO OUT when the  
controller is in the Automatic mode. Reopening the  
contact returns the controller to the normal output.  
(NOTE 1)  
This selection is only available on Loop 1.  
TIMER  
TIMER—Contact closure starts timer, if enabled.  
Reopening the switch has no effect.  
132  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
AM STA  
TO AUTO/MANUAL STATION—Contact closure causes  
the loop to perform as follows:  
PV = Input 2  
DIG IN 1  
(continued)  
Action = Direct  
Control algorithm = PD+MR  
PID SET = 2  
SP = LSP 2  
This selection is only available on Loop 1.  
ToTUNE  
SPinit  
INITIATE LIMIT CYCLE TUNING—Contact closure starts  
the tuning process. The lower display shows TUNE ON.  
Opening the contact has no effect.  
SETPOINT INITIALIZATION—Contact closure forces the  
setpoint to the current PV value. Opening the contact has  
no effect.  
TRACK1  
TRACK2  
ToOUT2  
OUTPUT 1 TRACKS INPUT 2*—Contact closure allows  
Output 1 to track Input 2. (NOTE 1)  
OUTPUT 2 TRACKS INPUT 2*—Contact closure allows  
Output 2 to track Input 2.  
OUTPUT 2 OVERRIDES OUTPUT 1—Contact closure  
allows physical Output 1 to be a copy of Output 2. When  
contact is released, Loop 1 output will switch back to  
normal PID controller action starting with the last output  
value. (NOTE 1)  
TO RSP  
RST FB  
ToPURG  
TO REMOTE SETPOINT—Contact closure selects the  
Remote setpoint.  
EXTERNAL RESET FEEDBACK—Contact closure allows  
Input 2 to override the internal reset value.  
TO PURGE—Contact closure forces the loop to Manual  
mode with the output set to the Output High Limit  
configuration. MAN lights and the Output value is shown  
on the lower display. Opening the switch has no effect.  
(NOTE 1)  
LoFIRE  
LOW FIRE—Contact closure forces the loop to Manual  
mode with the output set to the Output Low Limit  
configuration. MAN lights and the Output value is shown  
on the lower display. Opening the switch has no effect.  
(NOTE 1)  
MAN LT  
REStot  
MANUAL LATCHING—Contact closure transition forces  
the loop to Manual mode. Opening the switch has no  
effect. If the MANUAL/AUTO key is pressed while the  
switch is closed, the loop will return to Automatic mode.  
RESET TOTALIZER—Contact closure transition resets  
the accumulated totalizer value. Opening the switch has  
no effect.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
DIG IN 1  
(continued)  
HealthWatch option prompts:  
RESETT1  
TIMER 1 will be reset when contact closes.  
TIMER 2 will be reset when contact closes.  
TIMER 3 will be reset when contact closes.  
ALL TIMERS will be reset when contact closes.  
COUNTER 1 will be reset when contact closes.  
COUNTER 2 will be reset when contact closes.  
COUNTER 3 will be reset when contact closes.  
ALL COUNTERS will be reset when contact closes.  
ALL TIMERS AND COUNTERS will be reset when  
contact closes.  
RESETT2  
RESETT3  
R ALL T  
RESETC1  
RESETC2  
RESETC3  
R ALL C  
RALLTC  
DIG 1 COM  
DIGITAL INPUT 1 COMBINATION SELECTIONS — All  
selections are available in combination with Input 1.  
DISABL  
+PID2  
DISABLE—Disables combination function.  
Any Digital Input Selection PLUS PID2—Contact  
closure selects PID Set 2.  
+ToDIR  
+ToSP2  
+DISAT  
Any Digital Input Selection PLUS DIRECT ACTION—  
Contact closure selects direct controller action.  
Any Digital Input Selection PLUS SETPOINT 2—  
Contact closure puts the controller into setpoint 2.  
Any Digital Input Selection PLUS DISABLE ADAPTIVE  
TUNE—Contact closure disables Accutune process on  
Loop 1.  
+ToSP1  
+RUN  
Any Digital Input Selection PLUS SETPOINT 1—  
Contact closure puts the controller into setpoint 1.  
Any Digital Input Selection PLUS RUN SETPOINT  
PROGRAM/RAMP—Contact closure starts SP  
Program/Ramp if enabled.  
DIG IN 2  
Same selections as for  
Digital Input 1  
DIGITAL INPUT 2 SELECTIONS  
DIG2 COM  
Same selections as Digital  
Input 1 Combinations  
DIGITAL INPUT 2 COMBINATIONS  
*For the Output Tracking selections, when the switch is open, the output is in accordance with its pre-defined  
functionality. When the switch is closed, the output value (in percent) will track the Input 2 percent of range value.  
When the switch is reopened, the output will start at this last output value and normal PID action will then take over  
control. The transfer is bumpless.  
NOTE 1: Does not apply to Three Position Step Control.  
134  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.14 Communications Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This option allows the controller to be connected to a host computer via  
RS-422/485 or Modbus protocol.  
The controller looks for messages from the computer at regular intervals.  
If these messages are not received within the configured shed time, the  
controller will SHED from the communications link and return to stand-  
alone operation. Depending on the protocol selected, the device address,  
parity, and baud rate are configurable. You can also set the SHED output  
mode and setpoint recall, and communication units.  
Up to 99 addresses can be configured over this link. The number of units  
that can be configured depends on the protocol chosen:  
• RS-422/485—15 drops maximum  
• Modbus—15 drops (or 31 for shorter link length) maximum  
Communications  
group prompts  
Table 4-13 lists all the function prompts in the Communications Set Up  
group and their definitions.  
Table 4-13  
Communications Group Definitions  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
ComSTATE  
COMMUNICATIONS SELECTION  
DISABL  
DISABLE—Disables the communications option.  
MOD3K  
MB3K—Allows the UDC3300 to emulate the UDC3000A  
Modbus protocol.  
MODBUS  
MODBUS—Allows Modbus RTU communication prompts.  
RS-422/485—Allows RS422/485 ASCII communication  
prompts.  
RS422  
1 to 99  
Com ADDR  
ComADDR2  
COMMUNICATIONS STATION ADDRESS (LOOP 1)—  
This is a number that is assigned to a controller that is to  
be used with the communications option. This number will  
be its address.  
1 to 99  
COMMUNICATIONS STATION ADDRESS (LOOP 2)—  
This is a number that is assigned to a controller that is to  
be used with the communications option. This number will  
be its address. When ComSTATE = MODBUS,  
ComADDR2 = Com ADDR.  
ATTENTION If RS-422/485 addresses on both loops are  
the same, then only Loop 1 will respond.  
SHED ENAB  
DISABL  
SHED ENABLE—Disables/enables shed functionaliy.  
ENABLE  
Applies to Modbus protocol only.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
SHEDTIME  
0 to 255  
SHED TIME—The number that represents how many  
sample periods there will be before the controller sheds  
from communications. Each period equals 1/3 seconds; 0  
equals No shed.  
Note: If ComSTATE is set to MODBUS or MB3K and if  
SHEDENAB is set to DISABL, Shed Time will not be  
configurable.  
PARITY  
PARITY pertains to the use of a self-checking code  
employing binary digits in which the total number of ONE's  
(or ZERO's) in each permissible code expression is either  
ODD or EVEN.  
Fixed at NONE when ComSTATE = MODBUS  
ODD PARITY  
ODD  
EVEN PARITY  
EVEN  
BAUD  
BAUD RATE is the transmission speed in bits per second.  
2400 BAUD  
4800 BAUD  
9600 BAUD  
19200 BAUD  
2400  
4800  
9600  
19200  
DUPLEX  
DUPLEX—Transmission Type  
(RS422/485 ASCII only) HALF  
FULL  
HALF DUPLEX—Two wires  
FULL DUPLEX—Four wires  
ATTENTION  
•
When the Auxiliary Output/RS422/485 Option board is  
installed, this selection is fixed at HALF.  
WS_FLOAT  
Defines word/byte order of floating point data for  
communications.  
0
1
2
3
seeeeeee emmmmmmm mmmmmmmm mmmmmmmm  
FP_B  
FP_BB  
FP_L  
0
1
3
2
1
0
2
3
2
3
1
0
3
2
0
1
FP_LB  
TX DELAY  
1 to 500 milliseconds  
TX DELAY—Configurable response-delay timer allows  
you to force the UDC to delay its response for a time  
period of from 1 to 500 milliseconds compatible with the  
host system hardware/software.  
136  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
SHEDMODE  
SHED CONTROLLER MODE AND OUTPUT LEVEL—  
Determines the mode of local control you want when the  
controller is shed from the communications link.  
Note: If COMSTATE = MODBUS or MB3K and if  
SHEDENAB=DISABLE, this prompt will not be  
configurable.  
LAST  
LAST—SAME MODE AND OUTPUT—The controller will  
return to the same mode (manual or automatic) at the  
same output level that it had before shed.  
TOAUTO  
FSAFE  
ToAUTO—AUTOMATIC MODE, LAST SP—The controller  
will return to the automatic mode and the last setpoint  
used before shed.  
FSAFE—MANUAL MODE, FAILSAFE OUTPUT—The  
controller will return to manual mode at the output value  
selected at Control prompt FAILSAFE.  
To MAN  
TO MAN—MANUAL MODE, SAME OUTPUT—The  
controller will return to manual mode at the same output  
level that it had before shed.  
SHED SP  
SHED SETPOINT RECALL  
Note: If COMSTATE = MODBUS or MOD3K and if  
SHEDENAB=DISABLE, this prompt will not be  
configurable.  
TO LSP  
TO CSP  
TO LSP—Controller will use last local or remote setpoint  
used.  
TO CSP—When in “slave” mode, the controller will store  
the last host computer setpoint and use it at the Local  
setpoint. When in “monitor” mode, the controller will shed  
to the last UDC Local or Remote setpoint used, and the  
LSP is unchanged.  
UNITS  
COMMUNICATION UNITS—This selection determines  
how the controller values are expressed (on both loops)  
during communications.  
(RS422/485 ASCII only)  
PERCNT  
ENG  
PERCENT OF SPAN  
ENGINEERING UNITS  
CSP RATO  
CSP BIAS  
CSP2RATO  
CSP2BIAS  
–20.0 to 20.0  
LOOP 1 COMPUTER SETPOINT RATIO—Computer  
setpoint ratio for Loop 1.  
–999. to 9999.  
(engineering units)  
LOOP 1 COMPUTER SETPOINT BIAS—Computer  
setpoint bias for Loop 1.  
–20.0 to 20.0  
LOOP 2 COMPUTER SETPOINT RATIO—Computer  
setpoint ratio for Loop 2.  
–999. to 9999  
LOOP 2 COMPUTER SETPOINT BIAS—Computer  
(engineering units)  
setpoint bias for Loop 2.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
LOOPBACK  
LOCAL LOOPBACK tests the communications hardware.  
DISABLE—Disables the Loopback test.  
DISABL  
ENABLE  
ENABLE—Allows loopback test. The UDC goes into  
Loopback mode in which it sends and receives its own  
message. The UDC displays PASS or FAIL status in the  
upper display and LOOPBACK in the lower display while  
the test is running. The UDC will go into manual mode.  
The test will run until the operator disables it here, or until  
power is turned off and on.  
ATTENTION The UDC does not have to be connected  
to the RS-485 link to perform this test. If it is connected,  
only one UDC 3300 should run the loopback test at a time.  
The computer should not be transmitting on the link while  
the loopback test is active.  
138  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.15 Alarms Set Up Group  
Introduction  
An alarm is an indication that an event that you have configured (for  
example—Process Variable) has exceeded one or more alarm limits. There  
are two alarms available. Each alarm has two setpoints. You can configure  
each of these two setpoints to alarm on various controller parameters.  
There are two alarm output selections, High and Low. You can configure  
each setpoint to alarm either High or Low. These are called single alarms.  
You can also configure the two setpoints to alarm on the same event and  
to alarm both high and low. A single adjustable Hysteresis of 0 % to 100  
% is configurable for the alarm setpoint.  
See Table 2-8 in the Installation section for Alarm relay contact  
information.  
The prompts for the Alarm Outputs appear whether or not the alarm relays  
are physically present. This allows the Alarm status to be shown on the  
display and/or sent via communications to a host computer.  
Alarms group  
prompts  
Table 4-14 lists all the function prompts in the Alarms Set Up group and  
their definitions.  
Table 4-14  
Alarms Group Definitions  
Parameter  
Lower Display  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Prompt  
Definition  
A1S1 VAL*  
Value in engineering units  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 VALUE—This is the value at  
which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt  
A1S1TYPE to actuate. The value depends on what the  
setpoint has been configured to represent. NO setpoint is  
required for Communications SHED. For SP Programming  
the value is the segment number for which the event  
applies.  
For Maintenance Timers, the setpoint value is  
HOURS.TENTHS OF HOURS. Example: setpoint value  
4.2 means 4 hours 12 minutes. (Be aware that the value of  
the Timer itself is displayed in HOURS.MINUTES.  
Example: 4.2 means 4 hours 2 minutes.)  
For Maintenance Counters for output relays 1 and 2, the  
setpoint value is in thousands of counts (1 = 1000 counts).  
This prompt does not appear for “Alarm on Manual” type  
alarm. For example: A1S1TYPE = MANUAL.  
A1S2 VAL*  
A2S1 VAL*  
Value in engineering units  
Value in engineering units  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 VALUE—This is the value at  
which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt  
A1S2TYPE to actuate.  
The details are the same as A1S1 VAL.  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 VALUE—This is the value at  
which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt  
A2S1TYPE to actuate.  
The details are the same as A1S1 VAL.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
A2S2 VAL*  
Value in engineering units  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 VALUE—This is the value at  
which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt  
A2S2TYPE to actuate.  
The details are the same as A1S1 VAL.  
*When the associated type is configured for Alarm on Totalizer Value, the Alarm SP value represents the four lowest digits for the  
selected Totalizer Scale Factor. When the Totalizer value exceeds the Alarm SP, the alarm is activated. The range is 0 to 9999 x  
Totalizer Scale Factor.  
*When the associated type is configured for a HealthWatch Maintenance Timer, the Alarm SP represents number of hours.  
A1S1TYPE  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 TYPE—Select what you want  
Setpoint 1 of Alarm 1 to represent. It can represent the  
Process Variable, Deviation, Input 1, Input 2, Output, and  
if you have a model with communications, you can  
configure the controller to alarm on SHED. If you have  
setpoint programming, you can alarm when a segment  
goes ON or OFF.  
NONE  
INP 1  
NO ALARM  
INPUT 1  
INP 2  
INP 3  
INPUT 2  
INPUT 3  
PV  
DEV  
PROCESS VARIABLE (Loop 1)  
DEVIATION (Loop 1)  
OUTPUT  
SHED  
OUTPUT (Loop 1) (NOTE 1)  
SHED FROM COMMUNICATIONS (Both Loops)  
EVENT ON (SP PROGRAMMING)  
EVENT OFF (SP PROGRAMMING)  
ALARM ON MANUAL MODE (Loop 1) (NOTE 2)  
REMOTE SETPOINT  
EV ON  
EV OFF  
MANUAL  
REM SP  
F SAFE  
PVRATE  
PV 2  
FAILSAFE  
PV RATE OF CHANGE (Loop 1)  
PROCESS VARIABLE (Loop 2)  
DEVIATION (Loop 2)  
DEV 2  
OUT 2  
MAN 2  
RSP 2  
OUTPUT (Loop 2) (NOTE 1)  
ALARM ON MANUAL MODE (Loop 2) (NOTE 2)  
REMOTE SETPOINT (Loop 2)  
FAILSAFE (Loop 2)  
F SAF2  
PVRAT2  
BREAK  
BREAK2  
TOTAL  
TIMER1  
TIMER2  
TIMER3  
COUNT1  
COUNT2  
COUNT3  
PV RATE OF CHANGE (Loop 2)  
LOOP BREAK (Loop 1) (NOTE 3)  
LOOP BREAK (Loop 2) (NOTE 3)  
ALARM ON TOTALIZER VALUE  
HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE TIMER 1 VALUE  
HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE TIMER 2 VALUE  
HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE TIMER 3 VALUE  
HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE COUNTER 1 VALUE  
HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE COUNTER 2 VALUE  
HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE COUNTER 3 VALUE  
ATTENTION  
NOTE 1. When the controller is configured for Three  
Position Step Control, alarms set for Output will not  
function.  
NOTE 2. Not available if Timer is enabled because Alarm  
1 is dedicated to Timer output.  
NOTE 3. When enabled, the control output is checked for  
minimum and maximum limits. When this occurs, a timer  
begins and, if the output has not caused the PV to be  
corrected by a pre-determined amount and time, the alarm  
activates. For loop break alarms, the timer value may be  
changed only for loops configured for On-Off control.  
140  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
A1S2TYPE  
Same as A1S1 TYPE  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 TYPE—Select what you want  
Setpoint 2 of Alarm 1 to represent.  
The selections are the same as A1S1TYPE.  
A2S1TYPE  
Same as A1S1 TYPE  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 TYPE—Select what you want  
Setpoint 1 of Alarm 2 to represent.  
The selections are the same as A1S1TYPE.  
ATTENTION Not applicable with Relay Duplex or  
Position Proportional outputs.  
A2S2TYPE  
Same as A1S1 TYPE  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 TYPE—Select what you want  
Setpoint 2 of Alarm 2 to represent.  
The selections are the same as A1S1TYPE.  
ATTENTION Not applicable with Relay Duplex or Position  
Proportional outputs.  
If Setpoint Programming is disabled or if the Alarm  
Type is not configured for Event On/Off:  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 STATE—Select whether you want  
the alarm type chosen in prompt A1S1TYPE to alarm High  
or Low.  
A1S1 H L  
HIGH ALARM  
LOW ALARM  
HIGH  
LOW  
If Setpoint Programming is enabled and if the Alarm  
Type is configured for Event On/Off:  
ALARM 1 SEGMENT EVENT 1—Select whether you want  
the alarm type chosen in prompt A1S1TYPE to alarm the  
beginning or end of a segment in setpoint Ramp/Soak  
programming.  
A1S1 EV  
BEGINNING OF SEGMENT  
END OF SEGMENT  
BEGIN  
END  
ATTENTION Alarms configured for events will not  
operate on Setpoint Program segments of zero length.  
A1S2 H L  
A1S2 EV  
A2S1 H L  
A2S1 EV  
A2S2 H L  
A2S2 EV  
HIGH  
LOW  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 STATE—Same as A1S1 H L.  
ALARM 1 SEGMENT EVENT 2—Same as A1S1 EV.  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 STATE—Same as A1S1 H L.  
ALARM 2 SEGMENT EVENT 1—Same as A1S1 EV.  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 STATE—Same as A1S1 H L.  
ALARM 2 SEGMENT EVENT 2—Same as A1S1 EV.  
BEGIN  
END  
HIGH  
LOW  
BEGIN  
END  
HIGH  
LOW  
BEGIN  
END  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
AL HYST  
0.0 to 100.0 % of span or full ALARM HYSTERESIS—A single adjustable hysteresis is  
output as appropriate  
provided on alarms such that when the alarm is OFF it  
activates at exactly the alarm setpoint; when the alarm is  
ON, it will not deactivate until the variable is 0.0 % to  
100 % away from the alarm setpoint.  
Configure the hysteresis of the alarms based on INPUT  
signals as a % of input range span.  
Configure the hysteresis of the alarm based on OUTPUT  
signals as a % of the full scale output range.  
ALM OUT1  
LATCHING ALARM FOR OUTPUT 1—Each alarm output  
can be configured to be Latching or Non-latching.  
NO LAT  
LATCH  
NO LAT—Non-latching  
LATCH—Latching  
ATTENTION When configured for latching, the alarm will  
stay on, after the alarm condition ends, until the  
RUN/HOLD key is pressed.  
BLOCK  
ALARM BLOCKING—Prevents nuisance alarms when the  
controller is first powered up. The alarm is suppressed  
until the parameter gets to the non-alarm limit or band.  
Alarm blocking affects both alarm setpoints.  
DISABL  
BLOCK1  
BLOCK2  
BLK 12  
DISABL—Disables blocking  
BLOCK1—Blocks alarm 1 only  
BLOCK2—Blocks alarm 2 only  
BLK 12—Blocks both alarms  
ATTENTION When enabled on power up or initial  
enabling via configuration, the alarm will not activate  
unless it has not been in alarm for one cycle (167 ms).  
How to configure alarm  
to turn on and off with  
HealthWatch  
Configure Alarm n Setpoint 1 Value as the turn-on time or count, that is,  
the alarm turns on when the timer or counter reaches this value.  
Configure Alarm n Setpoint 2 Value as the turn-off time or count, that is,  
the alarm turns off after being on for this much time or this many counts.  
When the setpoint is reached it resets any HealthWatch timer or counter  
associated with Alarm1 Setpoint1 or 2 and Alarm 2.  
Example  
To turn on Alarm 1 after 30 days for 2 minutes.  
1. Under Alarms group, configure A1S1TYPE as TIMER1. Configure  
A1S1 VAL as 720 hours (30 days x 24 hours). Configure A1S2 VAL  
as 0.033 hours (2 minutes/60 minutes because setpoint units are in  
hours).  
2. Under Maintenance group, configure TIME1 as LAST R (time since  
last reset). Configure TIME2 as AL1SP1.  
142  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.16 Display Parameters Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This group includes selections for Decimal place, Units of temperature,  
and Power frequency.  
Display group  
prompts  
Table 4-15 lists all the function prompts in the Display Set Up group and  
their definitions.  
Table 4-15  
Display Group Definitions  
Parameter  
Lower Display  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Prompt  
Definition  
DECIMAL  
DECIMAL POINT LOCATION FOR LOOP 1—This  
selection determines where the decimal point appears in  
the display.  
XXXX  
XXXX—No Decimal Place—fixed, no auto-ranging  
XXX.X—One Place  
XX.XX—Two Places  
XXX.X  
XX.XX  
X.XXX  
X.XXX—Three Places  
ATTENTION Auto-ranging will occur for selections of  
one, two, or three places.  
DECIMAL2  
DECIMAL POINT LOCATION FOR LOOP 2—This  
selection determines where the decimal point appears in  
the display for Loop 2.  
XXXX  
XXX.X  
XX.XX  
X.XXX  
XXXX—No Decimal Place—fixed, no auto-ranging  
XXX.X—One Place  
XX.XX—Two Places  
X.XXX—Three Places  
ATTENTION Auto-ranging will occur for selections of  
one, two, or three places.  
TEMP UNIT  
PWR FREQ  
TEMPERATURE UNITS FOR BOTH LOOPS—This  
selection will affect the indication and operation.  
DEG F  
DEG C  
NONE  
DEG F—Degrees Fahrenheit  
DEG C—Degrees Centigrade  
NONE—No display of units  
60 HZ  
50 HZ  
POWER LINE FREQUENCY—Select whether your  
controller is operating at 50 or 60 Hertz.  
ATTENTION For controllers powered by +24 Vdc, this  
configuration should be set to the AC line frequency used  
to produce the +24 Vdc supply.  
Incorrect setting of this parameter can cause normal mode  
noise problems in the input readings.  
RATIO 2  
INPUT 2 RATIO—This enables the Ratio for Input 2 to be  
set from the front panel. Input 2 must be installed and  
enabled for this configuration to operate.  
DISABL  
DISABLE—Disables setting Ratio 2 from front panel.  
ENABLE  
ENABLE—Allows the Ratio for Input 2 to be set through  
the keyboard.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
LANGUAGE  
LANGUAGE—This selection designates the prompt  
language.  
ENGLIS  
ENGLISH  
FRENCH  
GERMAN  
SPANISH  
ITALIAN  
FRENCH  
GERMAN  
SPANIS  
ITALAN  
4.17 Calibration Data  
Introduction  
The prompts used here are for field calibration purposes. Refer to Section  
6 – Input Calibration in this manual for complete information.  
4.18 Maintenance Group  
Introduction  
The Maintenance group prompts are part of the HealthWatch feature.  
These prompts let you count and time the activity of discrete events such  
as relays, alarms, control modes and others, to keep track of maintenance  
needs.  
Maintenace group  
prompts  
Table 4-16 lists all the function prompts in the Maintenance Set Up group.  
Table 4-16  
Maintenance Group Definitions  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
TIME1  
TIMER 1—The timer tracks the elapsed time of the  
selected event.  
DISABL  
DISABL—Disables the timer.  
LASTR  
AL1SP1  
LAST RESET—Time elapsed since the last reset.  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1—Cumulative time Alarm 1  
Setpoint 1 was activated.  
AL1SP2  
AL2SP1  
AL2SP2  
MANUAL  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2— Cumulative time Alarm 1  
Setpoint 2 was activated.  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1— Cumulative time Alarm 2  
Setpoint 1 was activated.  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2— Cumulative time Alarm 2  
Setpoint 2 was activated.  
LOOP 1 MANUAL—Cumulative time Loop 1 was in  
Manual.  
144  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
GSOAK  
GUARANTEED SOAK— Cumulative time the process  
was outside the guaranteed soak band.  
SOOTING— Cumulative time process was in sooting state  
DIGITAL INPUT1— Cumulative time Digital Input 1 was  
closed  
TIME1 (continued)  
SOOTNG  
DIGIN1  
DIGIN2  
DIGITAL INPUT 2— Cumulative time Digital Input 2 was  
closed  
LOOP 2 MANUAL— Cumulative time Loop 2 was in  
Manual.  
MAN2  
HRS.MIN1  
OR  
00.00 to 23.59  
Shows elapsed time of Timer 1 in Hours and Minutes. At  
24.00, units change automatically to Days and Hours.  
DAYS.HRS1  
1.00 to 416.15  
Same as TIME 1  
00.00 to 23.59  
TIME 2  
The timer tracks the elapsed time of the selected event.  
HRS.MIN2  
OR  
Shows elapsed time of Timer 2 in Hours and Minutes. At  
24.00, units change automatically to Days and Hours.  
DAYS.HRS2  
1.00 to 416.15  
Same as TIME 1  
00.00 to 23.59  
TIME 3  
The timer tracks the elapsed time of the selected event.  
HRS.MIN3  
OR  
Shows elapsed time of Timer 3 in Hours and Minutes. At  
24.00, units change automatically to Days and Hours.  
DAYS.HRS3  
1.00 to 416.15  
COUNTER 1—The counter counts the number of times  
COUNTER1  
the selected event has occurred.  
DISABL  
MANUAL  
DISABLE—Counter is not in use.  
LOOP 1 MANUAL—Number of times Loop 1 has been in  
Manual mode.  
AL1SP1  
AL1SP2  
AL2SP1  
AL2SP2  
DIGIN1  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1—Number of times Alarm 1  
Setpoint 1 has been activated.  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2—Number of times Alarm 1  
Setpoint 2 has been activated.  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1—Number of times Alarm 2  
Setpoint 1 has been activated.  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2—Number of times Alarm 2  
Setpoint 2 has been activated.  
DIGITAL INPUT 1—Number of times Digital Input 1 has  
closed.  
DIGIN2  
DIGITAL INPUT 2—Number of times Digital Input 2 has  
closed.  
OUT1*1K  
OUT2*1K  
GSOAK  
PWRCYC  
PV_RNG  
FAILSF  
TUNE  
OUTPUT 1 RELAY x 1000—Thousands of times Output 1  
relay has been activated.  
OUTPUT 2 RELAY x 1000—Thousands of times Output 2  
relay has been activated.  
GUARANTEED SOAK—Number of times unit has been in  
guaranteed soak.  
POWER CYCLE—Number of times unit’s power has  
cycled off and on.  
LOOP 1 PV RANGE—Number of times Loop 1’s PV has  
been out of range.  
LOOP 1 FAILSAFE—Number of times Loop 1 has been in  
Failsafe mode.  
LOOP 1 TUNE—Number of times Loop 1 has been tuned  
(manually and automatically)  
MAN2  
LOOP 2 MANUAL—Number of times Loop 2 has been in  
Manual mode.  
PVRNG2  
LOOP 2 PV RANGE—Number of times Loop 2’s PV has  
been out of range.  
COUNTER 1  
FSF2  
LOOP 2 FAILSAFE—Number of times Loop 2 has been in  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Display  
Prompt  
Upper Display  
Range of Setting  
or Selection  
Parameter  
Definition  
Failsafe mode.  
LOOP 2 TUNE—Number of times Loop 2 has been tuned  
(continued)  
TUNE2  
(manually and automatically).  
COUNTS1  
0-9999 (1 = 1000 counts for  
output relays 1 and 2)  
Shows the value of Counter 1. Read only.  
COUNTER2  
Same as COUNTER1  
Counter 2 counts the number of times the selected event  
has occurred.  
COUNTS2  
Same as COUNTS1  
Same as COUNTER1  
Shows the value of Counter 2. Read only.  
COUNTER3  
Counter 3 counts the number of times the selected event  
has occurred.  
COUNTS3  
Same as COUNTS1  
0-9999  
Shows the value of Counter 3. Read only.  
PASSWORD  
PASSWORD—Entering the designated number resets to  
zero the timer or counter specified by Reset Type.  
To designate a number as the password:  
1. Set all timers and counters to DISABL.  
2. Enter the desired PASSWORD (0-9999).  
3. Select a Reset Type (next prompt). The PASSWORD  
goes into effect when you press FUNC , that is, you can  
use it to reset the counters and timers.  
RES TYPE  
RESET TYPE—Select which timers and/or counters will  
be reset to zero when the PASSWORD is entered.  
NONE  
NONE—No values will be reset  
TIMER 1 will be reset  
TIMER 2 will be reset  
TIMER1  
TIMER2  
TIMER3  
ALL TM  
COUNT1  
COUNT2  
COUNT3  
ALL CO  
ALL TC  
TIMER 3 will be reset  
ALL TIMERS will be reset  
COUNTER 1 will be reset  
COUNTER 2 will be reset  
COUNTER 3 will be reset  
ALL COUNTERS will be reset  
ALL TIMERS AND COUNTERS will be reset  
4.19 Status Test Data  
Introduction  
The prompts used here are for determining the reason for a controller  
failure. Refer to the Section 8 – Troubleshooting in this manual for  
complete information.  
146  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5 – Operation  
5.1 Overview  
Introduction  
This section gives you all the information necessary to monitor and  
operate your controller. Review the Operator Interface shown in  
“Monitoring” to make sure you are familiar with the indicator definitions.  
The key functions are listed in Section 1 – Overview.  
What’s in this section?  
This section contains the following topics:  
Topic  
See Page  
147  
148  
150  
151  
155  
156  
160  
163  
164  
168  
171  
172  
177  
180  
181  
182  
183  
186  
190  
193  
194  
202  
204  
5.1  
Overview  
5.2  
How to Power Up the Controller  
Entering a Security Code  
Monitoring Your Controller  
Start-up Procedure  
5.3  
5.4  
5.5  
5.6  
Operating Modes  
5.7  
Setpoints  
5.8  
Setpoint Ramp Rate  
5.9  
Single Setpoint Ramp  
5.10  
5.11  
5.12  
5.13  
5.14  
5.15  
5.16  
5.17  
5.18  
5.19  
5.20  
5.21  
5.22  
5.23  
Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants  
Alarm Setpoints  
Two Loops of Control Overview  
Configuring Two Loops of Control  
Monitoring Two Loops of Control  
Operating Two Loops of Control  
Three Position Step Control Algorithm  
Input Math Algorithms  
Digital Input Option (Remote Switching)  
Auto/Manual Station  
Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression  
Accutune  
Carbon Potential  
HealthWatch  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2 How to Power Up the Controller  
Apply power  
When power is applied, the controller will run three diagnostic tests. All  
the displays will light and then the controller will go into automatic mode.  
Diagnostic tests  
Table 5-1 lists the three diagnostic tests.  
Table 5-1  
Power Up Diagnostic Tests  
Condition  
Prompt on Lower Display  
RAM TEST  
Check RAM  
CONFTEST  
CAL TEST  
Check Non-volatile Memory  
Check Calibration  
Test failures  
If one or more of these tests fail, the controller will go to the Fail-safe  
Manual Mode, and “FAILSAFE” will flash in the lower display.  
If the output type is Position Proportional, and AUTO-CAL has never  
been done, a prompt “CAL MTR” will appear suggesting that the  
controller be calibrated.  
Troubleshooting  
Refer to “STATUS TESTS” in Section 9 - Troubleshooting to identify and  
correct the problem.  
148  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check the displays and  
keys  
Use the procedure in Table 5-2 to run the display and key test.  
Table 5-2  
Press  
Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys  
Result  
The controller will run a display test. All the displays will  
light for 8 seconds, then the displays will look like this:  
SET UP  
and hold in,  
then  
Upper Display  
ke ys  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
Lower Display  
try a ll  
at the same time  
Press each key to see if it When the key is pressed, the lower display will indicate the  
works  
name of the key pressed.  
Key Pressed  
Lower Display  
FUNCTION  
LWR DISP  
AUTO MAN  
SP SEL  
FUNCTION LOOP 1/2  
LOWER DISPLAY  
MANUAL/AUTO  
SETPOINT/SELECT  
INCRMENT  
DECRMENT  
RUN HOLD  
INCRDECR  
FUNC SU  
RUN/HOLD  
+
FUNCTION+SETUP  
If no key is pressed for 20 seconds, the test will time out and the controller  
will go into control mode.  
If any test fails, go to “Controller Failure Symptoms” in Section 9 -  
Troubleshooting.  
Key error  
When a key is pressed and the prompt “KEY ERROR” appears in the  
lower display, it will be for one of the following reasons:  
• parameter is not available,  
• not in Set Up mode, press SET UP key first,  
• key malfunction, do keyboard test.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.3 Entering a Security Code  
Introduction  
The LOCKOUT feature in the UDC 3300 is used to inhibit changes (via  
keyboard) of certain functions or parameters by unauthorized personnel.  
There are different levels of LOCKOUT depending on the level of  
security required. These levels are:  
NONE  
CALIB  
+CONF  
+VIEW  
MAX  
See Section 4 - Configuration Definitions for details.  
Security code numbers  
The level of keyboard lockout may be changed in the Set Up mode.  
However, knowledge of a security code number (1 to 4095) may be  
required to change from one level of lockout to another. When a controller  
leaves the factory, it has a security code of 0 which permits changing from  
one lockout level to another without entering any other code number.  
Procedure  
If you require the use of a security code, select a number from 0001 to  
4095 and enter it when the lockout level is configured as NONE.  
Thereafter, that selected number must be used to change the lockout level  
from something other than NONE.  
CAUTION  
Write the number on the Configuration Record Sheet in the  
configuration section so you will have a permanent record.  
Use the procedure in Table 5-3 to enter a security code.  
Table 5-3  
Press  
Procedure for Entering a Security Code  
Action  
Step  
1
until you see  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Lower Display  
TUNING  
2
3
until you see  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
0
Lower Display  
SECURITY  
to enter a four digit number in the upper display  
(1 to 4095)  
or  
This will be your security code.  
150  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.4 Monitoring Your Controller  
Operator interface  
The indicators and displays on the operator interface let you see what is  
happening to your process and how the controller is responding.  
Figure 5-1 is a view of the operator interface. A description of the displays  
and indicators is included.  
Figure 5-1  
Operator Interface  
Upper Display - six characters  
• Normal Operation - four digits dedicated to display the process variable  
• Configuration Mode - displays parameter value or selection  
Lower Display - eight characters  
• Normal Operation - displays operating parameters and values  
• Configuration Mode - displays function groups and parameters  
T - Accutune in progress  
t - PV tune in progress  
L" - Loop 2 display  
Indicator definition when lit  
I - Cascade control  
F - °Fahrenheit being used  
C - °Centigrade being used  
MAN - controller in manual mode  
A - controller in automatic mode  
MAN and A off —  
communications  
option active  
C - Computer setpoint active  
O - Output override active  
R - Run SP ramp/program  
H - Hold SP ramp/program  
Indicator definition when lit  
ALM - Alarm conditions exist  
DI - Digital input active  
3 - LSP 3 active  
RSP - Remote SP or SP2 active  
F C  
1 2  
MAN  
ALM  
DI 1 2 3R  
Deviation Bargraph  
%
3300  
RSP  
OUT  
• Center bar indicates PV is  
within ±1% of setpoint.  
• Next bar will light if PV is  
between ±1% but less than  
±2% in deviation.  
• If PV is equal to or greater than  
±10% deviation, the center bar  
plus all ten deviation bars will  
light.  
OUT - Control relay 1 or 2 on  
1 2  
SP 3300  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
SETPOINT  
SELECT  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Keys - See Table 1-1  
RUN  
HOLD  
SET UP  
24157  
Decimal point position  
In each display, when no decimal place is configured, the right-most  
character is blank.  
When a single decimal position has been configured and values greater  
than 1000 are displayed, the right-most character is blank but the decimal  
point will be lit.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Annunciators  
The following annunciator functions have been provided:  
A visual indication of each alarm  
ALM 1 2  
Blinking 1 indicates alarm latched and needs to be  
acknowledged before extinguishing when the alarm  
condition ends.  
A visual indication of the control relays  
OUT 1 2  
A visual indication of the mode of the controller  
A—Automatic Mode  
MAN—Manual Mode  
A visual indication of the temperature units  
F—Degrees Fahrenheit  
C—Degrees Celsius  
A visual indication of the digital inputs  
1 2  
A visual lamp when the RSP or LSP 2 is active  
I
A visual indication when LSP 3 is active  
3
The upper left digit of the display is used to show other annunciator  
functions  
T—Accutuning in process  
t—PV tune in process  
L″—Loop 2 display  
I—Cascade control (when Loop 1 is displayed)  
C—Computer setpoint active  
O—Output override active  
152  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing the operating  
parameters  
Press the LOWER DISPLAY key to scroll through the operating  
parameters listed in Table 5-4. The lower display will show only those  
parameters and their values that apply to your specific model and the way  
in which it was configured.  
Table 5-4  
Lower Display Key Parameter  
Description  
Lower Display  
Indication  
OUT  
OUTPUT #1—Output value is percent; for Three Position Step control, this is an estimated motor  
position when no slidewire exists.  
OT2  
SP  
OUTPUT #2—Appears only if 2-loop or Cascade control is configured.  
LOCAL SETPOINT #1—Also current setpoint when using SP Ramp.  
LOCAL SETPOINT #2  
2SP  
3SP  
LOCAL SETPOINT #3  
RSP  
1IN  
REMOTE SETPOINT  
INPUT 1—Used only with combinational input algorithms.  
INPUT 2  
2IN  
3IN  
INPUT 3  
POS  
CSP  
DEV  
PIDSETX  
SLIDEWIRE POSITION—Used only with TPSC.  
COMPUTER SETPOINT—When SP is in override.  
DEVIATION—Maximum negative display is –999.9.  
TUNING PARAMETER SET 1—Selected set for single loop or primary loop configuration where  
X is either 1 or 2.  
2PIDSETX  
TUNING PARAMETER SET 2—Selected set for secondary loop configuration where X is either  
1 or 2.  
ET XX.XX  
TR XX.XX  
RAMPXXXM  
O SK XXXX  
1PV  
ELAPSED TIME—Time that has elapsed on timer in Hours.Minutes.  
TIME REMAINING—Time that remains on timer in Hours.Minutes  
SETPOINT RAMP TIME—Time remaining in the setpoint ramp in minutes.  
TIME REMAINING IN SOAK  
PROCESS VARIABLE 1—For Cascade or 2-loop applications.  
PROCESS VARIABLE 2—For cascade or 2-loop applications.  
2PV  
AUX  
AUXILIARY OUTPUT—Displayed only when Loop 2 is not used, or when Loop 2 is Time  
Simplex and Loop 1 is not Current Duplex.  
OC1  
OC2  
CHARACTERIZED OUTPUT 1—Displayed if Loop 1 output is characterized.  
CHARACTERIZED OUTPUT 2—Displayed if Loop 2 output is characterized.  
SP RATE SETPOINT—Current setpoint for setpoint rate applications  
CURRENT TOTALIZER VALUE—Displays the total flow volume being measured.  
BIAS—Displays the manual reset value for algorithm PD+MR.  
SPn  
Σ (Sigma)  
BIA  
TUNE OFF  
TUNE RUN  
ToBEGIN  
OTI  
LIMIT CYCLE TUNING NOT RUNNING—Appears when Accutune is disabled.  
LIMIT CYCLE TUNING RUNNING—Appears when Accutune is enabled.  
RESET SP PROGRAM TO START OF FIRST SEGMENT  
OUTPUT OVERRIDE (2 PID LOOPS ONLY)—Appears when Internal Loop 1 Output value is  
displayed. This represents the internal output 1 value before override.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostic error  
messages  
The UDC 3300 performs background tests to verify data and memory  
integrity. If there is a malfunction, an error message will be displayed. In  
the case of more than one simultaneous malfunction, only the one with the  
highest priority will appear on the lower display.  
A list of error messages is contained in Table 5-5. If any of these error  
messages occur, refer to Section 9 - Troubleshooting for information to  
correct the failure.  
Table 5-5  
Error Messages  
Description  
Prompt  
EE FAIL  
Unable to write to nonvolatile memory.  
INP1FAIL  
INP2FAIL  
INP3FAIL  
SW FAIL  
Two consecutive failures of input 1 integration.  
Two consecutive failures of input 2 integration.  
Two consecutive failures of input 3 integration.  
Slidewire input failure. Position Proportional Control  
automatically switched to Three Position Step Control.  
CONF ERR  
CONF ER2  
Configuration Errors for Loop 1—Low limit greater than high  
limit for PV, SP, Reset, or Output.  
Configuration Errors for Loop 2—Low limit greater than high  
limit for PV, SP, Reset, or Output, or Loop 2 output has not  
been selected.  
SOOTING  
IN1 RNG  
Input Combination Errors—Percent Carbon falls outside of  
“sooting boundary.”  
Input 1 Out-of-Range  
Out-of-range criteria:  
Linear range: ± 10 % out-of-range  
Characterized range: ± 1 % out-of-range  
IN2 RNG  
IN3 RNG  
PV RNG  
Input 2 Out-of-Range—Same as Input 1.  
Input 3 Out-of-Range—Same as Input 1.  
PV Out-of-Range  
PV = (PV source x PV source ratio) + PV source bias  
FAILSAFE  
FAILSF2  
RV LIMIT  
Failsafe Loop 1—Check inputs or configuration.  
Failsafe Loop 2—Check inputs or configuration.  
Remote Variable Out-of-Range  
RV = (RV source x RV source ratio) + RV source bias  
RH LO  
RH Excessive Temperature Depression—Calculated % RH is  
less than 0 %.  
SEG ERR  
CAL MTR  
Segment Error—SP Program starting segment number is less  
than ending segment number.  
Not calibrated. Perform Position Proportional calibration.  
154  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.5 Start-up Procedure  
Procedure  
The Start-up procedure is given in Table 5-6.  
Table 5-6  
Press  
Procedure for Starting Up the Controller  
Step  
1
Operation  
Action  
Select the loop  
to toggle between Loop 1 and Loop 2, if configured.  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
2
3
Select manual  
mode  
until “MAN” indicator is ON.  
The controller is in manual mode.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Adjust the  
output  
to adjust the output value and ensure that the final control element is  
functioning correctly.  
Upper Display  
or  
shows the PV value  
Lower Display  
shows OUT and the output value in %.  
Upper Display  
4
Enter the local  
setpoint  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
shows the PV Value  
Lower Display  
SP and the local setpoint value  
to adjust the local setpoint to the value at which you want the process  
variable maintained.  
or  
The local setpoint cannot be changed if the Setpoint Ramp function is  
running. “R” appears in the upper display.  
5
6
Select  
Automatic  
Mode  
until “A” indicator is ON.  
The controller is in Automatic mode.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
The controller will automatically adjust the output to maintain the process  
variable at setpoint, if the controller is properly tuned.  
Tune the  
controller  
Tuning is required on the first startup. First enable "TUNE" selection in the  
Accutune Group.  
SET UP  
Refer to Tuning Set Up group to ensure that the proper selections for  
PROP BD or GAIN, RATE MIN, and RSET MIN, or RSET RPM, have  
been entered.  
Use Accutune to tune the controller; see the procedure in this section.  
For 2-loop or Cascade control, refer to the Loop 2 Tuning Set Up group  
parameters.  
To tune your controller manually, see Appendix A.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.6 Operating Modes  
Available modes  
The controller can operate in any of three basic modes:  
• Manual—One or Two Loops  
• Automatic with Local Setpoint—One or Two Loops  
• Automatic with Remote Setpoint—One or Two Loops  
• Manual Cascade  
• Automatic Cascade  
The manual and automatic control modes with Local and Remote setpoint  
are standard with the instrument; cascade control is optional.  
Mode definitions  
Table 5-7 lists the available modes and their definitions.  
Table 5-7  
Operating Mode Definitions  
Definition  
Operating Mode  
MANUAL  
In the manual mode, the operator directly controls the  
controller output level. The process variable and the  
percent output are displayed. The configured High and Low  
Output Limits are disregarded and the operator can change  
the output value using the increment and decrement keys to  
the limits allowed by the output type (0 % to 100 % for a  
time proportioning output or –5 % to 105 % for a current  
output).  
AUTOMATIC with LOCAL In automatic local mode, the controller operates from the  
SETPOINT  
local setpoints and automatically adjusts the output to  
maintain the setpoint at the desired value.  
In this mode you can adjust the setpoint.  
See Section 5.7 - Setpoints.  
AUTOMATIC with  
REMOTE SETPOINT  
In automatic remote mode, the controller operates from the  
setpoint measured at the Remote setpoint input.  
Adjustments are available to ratio this input and add a  
constant bias before it is applied to the control equation.  
See Section 3 - Configuration, Control Set up group.  
MANUAL CASCADE  
In the manual cascade mode, both control loops are in  
manual although there is still only one output active. This  
mode is used to bring both loops into a reasonable  
operation area, at which point the unit is placed into the  
automatic cascade mode.  
If Loop 1 is placed in Manual control mode, then Loop 2, if  
in auto, is then placed in a pseudo-manual mode thereby  
eliminating output bumps when Loop 1 is returned to  
Automatic control mode.  
AUTOMATIC CASCADE In Automatic cascade mode, there are two control loops,  
with one loop’s output acting as the setpoint for the second  
control loop. There is only one physical output in this mode.  
156  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What happens when  
you change modes  
Table 5-8 explains what happens to the controller when you switch from  
one mode to another.  
Table 5-8  
Changing Operating Modes  
Description  
Mode Change  
Manual to Automatic  
Local Setpoint  
The Local Setpoint is usually the value previously stored as  
the Local Setpoint.  
PV tracking is a configurable feature which modifies this.  
For this configuration, when a loop is in manual mode, the  
local setpoint value tracks the process variable value  
continuously.  
Manual or Auto Local to  
Automatic Remote SP  
The Remote Setpoint uses the stored ratio and bias to  
calculate the control setpoint.  
Auto bias is a configurable feature which modifies this.  
When it is selected the transfer from automatic local to  
automatic remote or from manual remote to automatic  
remote adjusts the bias based on the local setpoint such  
that Bias = LSP – (RSP Input x R).  
Automatic Remote  
Setpoint to Manual or  
Auto Local Setpoint  
If configured for Local Setpoint Tracking, when the  
controller transfers out of remote setpoint the last value of  
the control setpoint is inserted into the local setpoint.  
If LSP tracking is not configured, the local setpoint will not  
be altered when the transfer is made.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting manual or  
automatic mode  
An alternate action switch places the controller in the Automatic or  
Manual mode of operation. Switching between manual and automatic will  
be bumpless, except when PD+MR algorithm is selected.  
Table 5-9 includes procedures for selecting automatic or manual mode  
and changing the output while in manual.  
Table 5-9  
Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
until “A” indicator is ON.  
The controller regulates its output to  
maintain the PV at the desired setpoint.  
Selecting  
Automatic  
Mode  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Upper Display  
shows the PV value  
Lower Display  
shows SP and the  
setpoint value  
The deviation bargraph indicates the PV  
deviation from the setpoint.  
The annunciators indicate whichever setpoint  
is in use:  
SP  
Local Setpoint  
2SP  
3SP  
RSP  
CSP  
Second Local Setpoint  
Third Local Setpoint  
Remote Setpoint  
Computer Setpoint  
2
Selecting  
Manual Mode  
until “MAN” indicator is ON.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
The controller holds its output at the last  
value used during automatic operation and  
stops adjusting the output for changes in  
setpoint or process variable.  
Upper Display  
shows the PV value  
Lower Display  
shows OUT and the  
output value in (%).  
The deviation bargraph indicates the PV  
deviation from the setpoint.  
3
Adjust the  
Output in  
Manual Mode  
to adjust the output value while in manual  
mode.  
Upper Display  
or  
shows the PV value  
Lower Display  
shows OUT and the  
output value in %.  
4
Return to  
Automatic  
Mode  
The “A” indicator will appear indicating  
Automatic mode.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
158  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Position proportional  
backup mode  
This feature provides for Position Proportional models to automatically  
change to a Three Position Step algorithm if the slidewire input signal  
fails. This will maintain control of your process.  
“IN2 RNG” or “SW FAIL” will flash in the lower display and the “OUT”  
display will show an estimated motor position WITHOUT a decimal  
point.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.7 Setpoints  
Introduction  
You can configure the following setpoints for the UDC 3300 controller.  
• A single local setpoint,  
• Two local setpoints,  
• One local setpoint and one remote setpoint,  
• Three local setpoints,  
• Two local setpoints and one remote setpoint.  
To scroll through the setpoint type menu, press and hold in the  
SETPOINT SELECT key. Release when the desired setpoint selection  
is displayed.  
ATTENTION  
“KEY ERROR” will appear in the lower display if:  
• You choose either local setpoint 2 or 3 or remote setpoint and your  
choice has not been configured as the setpoint source.  
• You attempt to change the setpoint while a setpoint ramp is enabled.  
Setpoint ramp rate will apply, if enabled.  
Selecting the local  
setpoint source  
Use the procedure in Table 5-10 to select a local setpoint source.  
Table 5-10 Procedure for Selecting the Local Setpoint Source  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
until the displays read:  
Enter Set Up  
mode  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
Upper Display  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Lower Display  
CONTROL  
Lower Display  
CONTROL2  
for Loop 1 or for Loop 2  
2
Display Local  
Setpoint Source  
selections  
until the displays read:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
Setpoint source selections  
1 ONLY  
TWO  
THREE  
Lower Display  
LSP’S  
3
4
Select the  
desired source  
to select the desired setpoint source in the  
upper display.  
or  
Return to control  
The controller will assume normal control.  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
160  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing local setpoint  
1, 2, or 3  
Use the procedure in Table 5-11 to change any of the local setpoint  
values.  
After changing a local setpoint value, if no other key is pressed, a  
minimum of 30 seconds time will elapse before the new value is stored in  
nonvolatile memory. If power is removed before this time, the new  
setpoint value is lost and the previous setpoint value is used at power up.  
If after changing the LSP value another key is pressed, then the value is  
stored immediately.  
Table 5-11 Procedure for Changing the Local Setpoints  
Step  
1
Operation  
Select the  
Press  
Action  
until you see  
Upper Display  
SETPOINT  
SELECT  
setpoint  
The PV value  
Lower Display  
SP, 2SP, or 3SP and  
the local setpoint value  
or RSP and the remote  
setpoint value  
2
3
Select a different  
setpoint or the  
remote setpoint  
to cycle through the setpoint type menu as  
long as the key is pressed. When the key is  
released, the setpoint selection currently  
displayed will be the new setpoint selection.  
SETPOINT  
SELECT  
and hold  
in  
Change the  
value  
to change the local setpoint to the value at  
which you want the process maintained.  
or  
SP, 2SP, or 3SP indicator will light to match  
the lower display.  
ATTENTION  
The remote setpoint  
cannot be changed at the keyboard.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enabling (or disabling)  
the remote setpoint  
Use the procedure in Table 5-12 to enable the remote setpoint source.  
Table 5-12 Procedure for Enabling (or Disabling) the Remote Setpoint  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Select Set Up  
Group  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Lower Display  
CONTROL  
Lower Display  
CONTROL2  
for Loop 1 or for Loop 2  
2
Select the  
Remote Setpoint  
Source prompt  
Until you see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
The Remote Setpoint  
source selection  
Lower Display  
RSP SRC  
NONE—not used  
INP 2—Input 2 as RSP  
IN AL1—Input algorithm 1  
IN AL2—Input algorithm 2  
INP 3—Input 3 as RSP  
3
4
Change  
selection  
to enable or disable the remote setpoint.  
or  
ATTENTION  
You cannot change the  
remote setpoint value using these keys.  
Return to normal  
operation  
This will return the controller to normal  
operation.  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
Setpoint selection  
indication  
Table 5-13 shows how the indicators react and what the displays show for  
each type of setpoint.  
Table 5-13 Setpoint Selection Indication  
Using Local  
Setpoint  
Using Remote  
Setpoint  
Using 2nd  
Local  
Using 3rd  
Local  
Setpoint  
Setpoint  
SP  
RSP  
2SP  
3SP  
Upper  
PV and the PV PV and the PV  
PV and the PV PV and the PV  
Display  
value  
value  
value  
value  
Lower  
Display  
SP and the  
Local Setpoint  
Source  
RSP and  
Remote Setpoint 2nd Local  
Value  
2SP and the  
3SP and the  
3rd Local  
Setpoint Value Setpoint Value  
Annunciator None  
"I"Ilights  
"I"Ilights "3" lights  
162  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.8 Setpoint Ramp Rate  
Configuration  
You can configure a Setpoint Ramp Rate that will apply to any Local  
setpoint change immediately.  
Refer to the Configuration Section to enable the ramp for either loop and  
set an upscale or downscale rate value.  
Make sure SP RAMP and SP PROG are disabled.  
Operation  
When a local setpoint change is made, the controller will ramp from the  
original setpoint to the new one at the rate specified. This changing  
(current) setpoint can be viewed as SPn on the lower display.  
Press the LOWER DISPLAY key until you see SPn and the setpoint  
value in the lower display.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9 Single Setpoint Ramp  
Configuring the  
setpoint ramp  
You can configure a single setpoint ramp to occur between the current  
local setpoint and a final local setpoint over a time interval of from 1 to  
255 minutes. You can RUN or HOLD the ramp at any time.  
ATTENTION  
The UDC 3300 has PV Hot Start functionality as standard  
feature. This means that at power-up Local Setpoint #1 is set to the current  
PV value and the Ramp, Rate, or Program then starts from this value.  
Procedure  
Table 5-14 lists the procedure for configuring the Setpoint Ramp  
parameters. The procedure for SP Program is in Section 6 – Setpoint  
Programming Option.  
Table 5-14 Procedure for Configuring a Setpoint Ramp  
Step  
1
Operation  
Select  
Press  
Action  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SP RAMP  
SET UP  
Set Up Group  
Lower Display  
SP RAMP  
2
3
Select the  
Setpoint Ramp  
function  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
L1/L2  
DISABL—Disables SP Ramp  
ENABLE—Enables SP Ramp for Loop 1  
ENABL2—Enables SP Ramp for Loop 2  
Lower Display  
SP RAMP  
ENAB12—Enables Sp Ramp for  
Loops 1 and 2  
Enable Setpoint  
Ramp  
to enable the setpoint ramp function. Choose  
the loop(s) on which you want the ramp to  
operate.  
ATTENTION  
You cannot change the  
current local setpoint if the setpoint ramp  
function is enabled. Make sure SP RATE is  
disabled.  
4
Set the Ramp  
Time  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
L1/L2  
The ramp time  
in minutes  
Lower Display  
TIME MIN  
to change the upper display value to the  
number of minutes in which you want the  
final setpoint to be reached.  
or  
Setting Range = 1 to 255 minutes  
ATTENTION  
Entering “0” will imply an  
immediate step change to the final SP.  
164  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step  
5
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Upper Display  
Set the Final  
Setpoint value  
FUNCTION  
L1/L2  
The final  
Setpoint value  
Lower Display  
FINAL SP  
to change the upper display value to the  
desired final setpoint value.  
or  
Setting Range = within the setpoint limits  
To exit configuration.  
6
Exit  
Configuration  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Running the setpoint  
ramp  
Running a Setpoint Ramp includes starting, holding, viewing the ramp  
time, ending the ramp, and disabling it.  
Procedure  
Table 5-15 lists the procedure for running the Setpoint Ramp.  
Table 5-15 Procedure for Running a Setpoint Ramp  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Put the controller  
into Automatic  
mode  
until “A” indicator is ON and you will see:  
Upper Display  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
H and the PV value  
Lower Display  
SP and the present  
setpoint value  
2
Set Start  
Setpoint  
until the start setpoint value you desire is  
indicated in the lower display:  
Upper Display  
or  
H and the PV value  
Lower Display  
SP and the start  
setpoint value  
3
Start the Ramp  
You will see:  
Upper Display  
RUN  
HOLD  
R and the PV value  
Lower Display  
SP and a changing  
setpoint value  
ATTENTION  
The value in the lower  
display will be increasing or decreasing  
toward the final setpoint value. The PV value  
in the upper display will also change.  
4
5
Hold/Run the  
Ramp  
This holds the ramp at the current setpoint  
value.  
RUN  
HOLD  
Press again to continue run.  
View the  
remaining ramp  
time  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
R or H and  
the PV value  
Lower Display  
RAMP XXXM  
(Time remaining)  
166  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step  
6
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Change setpoint  
during Hold  
mode  
to change the “HELD” setpoint if the ramp is  
on “HOLD.”  
or  
However, the ramp time remaining is not  
changed. Therefore, when returning to RUN  
mode, the setpoint will ramp at the same rate  
as prior to local setpoint changes and will  
stop if the final setpoint is reached before  
time expires.  
If the time expires before the final setpoint is  
reached, it will jump to the final setpoint.  
7
End the Ramp  
When the final setpoint is reached, the  
“R” changes to “H” in the upper display and  
the controller operates at the new setpoint.  
ATTENTION  
Any time the local setpoint  
is different from the final setpoint value and  
the RUN/HOLD key is pressed, the ramp  
will start again.  
8
Disable the  
setpoint ramp  
function  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Lower Display  
SP RAMP  
You will see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
DISABL—Disables SP Ramp  
ENABLE—Enables SP Ramp for Loop 1  
ENABL2—Enables SP Ramp for Loop 2  
Lower Display  
SP RAMP  
ENAB12—Enables Sp Ramp for  
Loops 1 and 2  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
DISABL  
Lower Display  
SP RAMP  
9
Return to normal  
operating mode  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.10 Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants  
Introduction  
You can use two sets of tuning constants for single output types and  
2-loop or cascade control, and choose the way they are to be switched.  
(Does not apply for Duplex control.)  
The sets can be:  
• keyboard selected,  
• automatically switched when a predetermined process variable value  
is reached,  
• automatically switched when a predetermined setpoint value is  
reached.  
The following procedures show you how to:  
• select two sets or gain scheduling,  
• set the switch-over value,  
• set tuning constant value for each set, and  
• switch between two sets via the keyboard (without automatic  
switchover)  
Select two sets or gain  
scheduling  
The procedure in Table 5-16 tells you how to select two sets or gain  
scheduling.  
Table 5-16 Procedure for Selecting Two Sets of Tuning Constants  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Select Control  
Set Up group  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Lower Display  
CONTROL  
Lower Display  
CONTROL2  
for Loop 1 or for Loop 2  
2
Select  
PID SETS  
function  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
Available selections  
are listed below  
Lower Display  
PID SETS  
1 ONLY—1 set of constants  
2KEYBD—2 sets, keyboard selectable  
2 PVSW—2 sets, auto switch at PV value  
2 SPSW—2 sets, auto switch at SP value  
GAIN S—Gain used in control algorithm  
calculations can be pre-entered into eight  
user-defined segments, with each segment  
applied over a user-defined PV range. Refer  
to Section 3 – Configuration under Tuning  
Set Up group to set Gain segment values  
and PV range values.  
to select the type of PID SET.  
or  
168  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set switchover value  
If you select 2 PVSW or 2 SPSW, you must set a value at which the sets  
will switch over. The procedure in Table 5-17 shows you how to set this  
value. This procedure assumes that you are still in the Control Set Up  
group from Table 5-16.  
Table 5-17 Procedure for Setting Switchover Values  
Step  
1
Operation  
Select  
Switchover value  
function  
Press  
Action  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
L1/L2  
The switchover  
value  
assuming you  
are still in  
Lower Display  
Control Set Up  
group  
SW VALUE  
to select the switch-over value in the upper  
display.  
or  
Set tuning constant  
values for each set  
There are specific tuning constants that must be set for each set. The  
procedure in Table 5-18 shows you how to access these constants and  
change their values.  
Table 5-18 Procedure for Setting Tuning Constant Values  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Select Tuning  
Set Up Group  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Lower Display  
TUNING  
2
Select the tuning  
constants  
to successively display the following  
constants:  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
Upper Display  
The tuning constant  
value  
Lower Display  
PROP BD or GAIN*  
RATE*  
RSET*  
CYC SEC or CYC SX3*  
PROP BD2 or GAIN2**  
RATE 2**  
RSET2**  
CYC2 SEC or CYC2 SX3**  
To change the value of any of the above  
listed prompts in the lower display.  
or  
*PIDSET1 will be used when PV or SP, whichever is selected, is greater than the  
switch-over value.  
**PIDSET2 will be used when PV or SP, whichever is selected, is less than the switch-  
over value.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switch between two  
sets via the keyboard  
(without automatic  
switchover)  
This procedure is operational only if 2 PID SETS was configured at the  
Control Set Up group. The procedure in Table 5-19 shows you how to  
switch from one set to another.  
Table 5-19 Procedure for Switching PID SETS from the Keyboard  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Access the PID  
set display  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
The PV value  
Lower Display  
PIDSETX  
X = 1 or 2  
to change PID SET 1 to PID SET 2 or vice  
versa.  
or  
You can use Accutune on each set.  
170  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.11 Alarm Setpoints  
Introduction  
An alarm consists of a relay contact and an operator interface indication.  
The alarm relay is de-energized if setpoint 1 or setpoint 2 is exceeded.  
The alarm relay is energized when the monitored value goes into the  
allowed region by more than the hysteresis.  
The relay contacts can be wired for normally open (NO) energized or  
normally closed (NC) de-energized at the rear terminals. See Table 2-8 in  
the Section 2 – Installation for alarm relay contact information.  
There are four alarm setpoints, two for each alarm. The type and state  
(High or Low) is selected during configuration. See Section 3 –  
Configuration for details.  
Procedure for  
displaying the alarm  
setpoints  
Table 5-20 lists the procedure for displaying and changing the alarm  
setpoints.  
Table 5-20 Procedure for Displaying or Changing the Alarm Setpoints  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Access the  
Alarm Set Up  
group  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Lower Display  
ALARMS  
2
Access the  
Alarm Setpoint  
Values  
to successively display the alarm setpoints  
and their values. Their order of appearance  
is shown below.  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
Upper Display  
The alarm setpoint  
value  
Lower Display  
A1S1 VAL = (Alarm 1, Setpoint 1 value)  
A1S2 VAL = (Alarm 1, Setpoint 2 value)  
A2S1 VAL = (Alarm 2, Setpoint 1 value)  
A2S2 VAL = (Alarm 2, Setpoint 2 value)  
to change any alarm setpoint value you  
select in the upper display.  
or  
3
Return to normal  
operation  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.12 Two Loops of Control Overview  
Introduction  
The UDC 3300 can operate using two independent loops of control or  
internal Cascade control.  
Available only on Expanded Model DC330E-XX-XXX.  
TWO INDEPENDENT LOOPS—See Functional Overview Block  
Diagrams for Loop 1 and Loop 2 (Figure 5-2) and Table 5-21 for  
selections based on these diagrams.  
The following rules apply for two independent loops:  
• Current output on Loop 2 requires auxiliary output.  
• Loop 2 Current Duplex output is limited to 2nd Current output signal  
only.  
• Loop 2 relay output is always dedicated to relay output 2.  
• No Time Duplex outputs on Loop 2.  
• No ON/OFF or 3 Position Step algorithms on Loop 2.  
• No Position Proportional output is available on 2-loop controllers.  
INTERNAL CASCADE CONTROL—See Functional Overview Block  
Diagram (Figure 5-3) and Table 5-25 for selections based on these  
diagrams.  
The following rules apply for internal Cascade control:  
• Loop 2 must be the primary loop.  
• Loop 1 must be the secondary (internal or slave) loop because all  
output forms exist on Loop 1.  
• Loop 1 remote setpoint is fixed as Loop 2 output.  
• No Position Proportional output is available on cascade controllers.  
Selections  
Refer to Figures 5-2, 5-3, and 5-4 Block Diagrams and Table 5-21 for  
selections based on these diagrams.  
Table 5-21  
Control Loop Selections  
Loop  
Input 1  
Input 2  
Input Algorithm  
LOOP 1  
Process Variable*  
Remote Setpoint  
Via Configuration or  
Digital Inputs  
Via Configuration or  
Digital Inputs  
Yes  
No  
Via configuration or  
Digital Inputs  
Yes  
Feedforward  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
LOOP 2  
Process Variable*  
Via Configuration or  
Digital Inputs  
Via Configuration or  
Digital Inputs  
Remote Setpoint  
Feedforward  
No  
Via Configuration or  
Digital Inputs  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
*The PV may be a combination of multiple inputs via a Loop input algorithm.  
172  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional overview  
Figure 5-2  
Figure 5-2 is a block diagram of a Loop 1 of a single loop controller and  
Loop 1 and Loop 2 of a dual loop controller.  
Functional Overview Block Diagram of a Single Loop (Loop #1) or Dual Loop  
Controller (Loop #1 and Loop #2)  
IN 1  
IN 2  
IN 3  
Ratio  
Bias  
Ratio  
Bias  
Ratio  
Bias  
•
•
•
1
2
3
•
•
•
•
•
•
To RSP  
•
•
IN 3  
In Alg1  
IN 2  
In Alg2  
To RSP  
To RSP  
PV  
Source  
Input 1  
Input 2  
Input 3  
INPUT  
ALGORITHM 1 or 2  
In Alg 1  
In Alg 2  
Output 1  
Output 2  
INPUT A  
OUT 2  
RSP  
Source  
FEEDFORWARD  
INPUT A ONLY  
To RSP  
Input 1  
Input 2  
Input 3  
PV  
In Alg 1  
In Alg 2  
Output 1  
Output 2  
INPUT B  
INPUT C  
Remote SP  
Local SP  
PID  
CONTROL  
ALGORITHM  
Loop 1 or Loop 2  
SP  
SP  
Source  
Input 1  
Input 2  
Input 3  
Output 1  
Output 2  
None  
SP  
3SP  
2SP  
FEEDFORWARD  
SUMMER OR  
MULTIPLIER  
Output  
without  
Feedforward  
or Manual  
Mode  
To Final  
Control  
Element  
OUTPUT  
24180  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internal cascade  
Figure 5-3  
Figure 5-3 is a block diagram of internal Cascade for a 2-loop controller.  
Functional Overview Block Diagram of Internal Cascade of a 2-loop Controller  
PRIMARY LOOP  
SECONDARY LOOP  
PV SOURCE  
PV SOURCE  
See Loop 2  
Block Diagram  
See Loop 1  
Block Diagram  
SETPOINT  
SOURCE  
PID  
CONTROL  
ALGORITHM  
PID  
CONTROL  
ALGORITHM  
SETPOINT  
SOURCE  
See Loop #2  
Block Diagram  
Loop #1  
Loop 2  
Loop 1  
SP  
INTERNAL  
OUTPUT  
SIGNAL  
Local Setpoint  
2SP  
3SP  
Remote Setpoint  
OUTPUT  
To Final  
Control  
Element  
INTERNAL CASCADE RULES  
• Loop #2 must be the primary loop.  
• Loop #1 must be the secondary (internal or slave) loop  
because all output forms exist on Loop 1.  
• Loop #1 Remote Setpoint is fixed as loop #2 output.  
24182  
Override rules  
The UDC 3300 allows you to select high or low output override. Refer to  
Section 3 - Configuration to select High or Low.  
The following rules apply for high/low override:  
• Only one physical output is required when override is enabled. It is the  
output from Loop 1 because Loop 2’s internal output is routed through  
the selector.  
• Loop 2 output can also be available at all times if desired.  
• In Manual mode, the Output may be overridden.  
• Does not apply for Three Position Step Control.  
• OTI on bottom display shows value of the internal Loop 1 output  
before any override.  
ATTENTION  
The output of the unselected loop tracks the selected loop  
to within 5 % when in Auto mode to eliminate windup. This tracking is  
done in the direction opposite to the Override Select configuration; i.e., for  
High Select, the unselected output tracks within 5 % of lower, and vice  
versa.  
174  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 5-4 is a block diagram of the Hi/Lo Override Selector.  
Figure 5-4  
Hi/Lo Override Selector  
OUTPUT 1 TERMINALS  
PV 1  
PV 2  
OUTPUT 1  
PID  
LOOP 1  
HI/LO  
OVERRIDE  
SELECTOR  
OUTPUT 2 TERMINALS  
IF DESIRED  
OUTPUT 2  
PID  
LOOP 2  
24183  
Two-loop restrictions  
Table 5-22  
Table 5-22 gives two-loop functionality and restrictions for controllers  
with one current output (Auxiliary output) and three relay outputs.  
Two-loop Functionality and Restrictions (Model DC330E-EE-2XX or  
Model DC330E-EE-5XX)  
Controller with One Current Output (Auxiliary Output) and Three Relay Outputs  
Output Type  
Current  
Auxiliary  
Relay #1  
Relay #2  
Relay #3  
Loop 1 is TIME SIMPLEX,  
Loop 2 is:  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Not used  
Loop 1 Output  
Loop 1 Output  
Loop 1 Output  
Loop 2 Output  
Alarm 2  
Alarm 1  
Time Simplex  
Loop 2 Output  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Current or Current Duplex (100 %)  
Current/Time or Time/Current  
Loop 2:  
Output 1 or 2  
Loop 2:  
Output 1 or 2  
Loop 1 is TIME DUPLEX/TPSC,  
Loop 2 is:  
—
—
—
—
—
Time Simplex (N/A)  
N/A  
—
Loop 2 Output  
—
Loop 1,Output 1 Loop 1,Output 2 Alarm 1  
Current or Current Duplex (100 %)  
Current/Time or Time/Current (N/A)  
—
—
—
Loop 1 is CURRENT OUTPUT or  
CURRENT DUPLEX – 100 %,  
Loop 2 is:  
N/A  
—
Loop 1 Output  
Loop 2 Output  
Alarm 2  
—
Alarm 1  
—
Time Simplex  
—
—
—
—
Current or Current Duplex (N/A)  
Current/Time or Time/Current (N/A)  
—
—
—
Loop 1 is TIME/CURRENT or  
CURRENT/TIME,  
Loop 2 is:  
N/A  
Loop 1:  
Output 1 or 2  
Loop 1:  
Output 1 or 2  
Loop 2 Output  
Alarm 1  
Time Simplex  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Current or Current Duplex (N/A)  
Current/Time or Time/Current (N/A)  
TWO-LOOP RESTRICTIONS:  
1. Time Duplex and Three Position Step Control are not available on Control Loop 2.  
2. Position Proportional Control is not available on Two-Loop or Cascade Controllers.  
3. If either Time Duplex or Three Position Step Control is selected as Control Loop 1 Output, then Time Simplex,  
Current/Time Duplex and Time/Current Duplex are not available for Control Loop 2 Output.  
4. Current Duplex 50 % is not available on Model No. DC330E-EE-2XX.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Two-loop restrictions  
Table 5-23  
Table 5-23 gives two-loop functionality and restrictions for controllers  
with two current outputs (including Auxiliary output) and two relay  
outputs.  
Two-loop Functionality and Restrictions (Model DC330E-KE-2XX or  
Model DC330E-KE-5XX)  
Controller with Two Current Outputs (including Auxiliary Output) and Three Relay Outputs  
Output Type  
Current  
Auxiliary  
Relay #1  
Relay #2  
Relay #3  
Loop 1 is TIME SIMPLEX,  
Loop 2 is:  
Not used  
Not used  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Loop 1 Output  
Loop 1 Output  
Loop 1 Output  
Loop 2 Output  
Alarm 1  
Time Simplex  
Not used  
Not used  
Loop 2 Output  
Current or Current Duplex (100 %)  
Current/Time or Time/Current  
Loop 2:  
Output 1 or 2  
Loop 2:  
Output 1 or 2  
Loop 1 is TIME DUPLEX/TPSC,  
Loop 2 is:  
—
—
—
—
—
Time Simplex (N/A)  
Not used  
—
Loop 2 Output  
—
N/A  
—
Loop 1,Output 1 Loop 1,Output 2  
Current or Current Duplex (100 %)  
Current/Time or Time/Current (N/A)  
—
—
Loop 1 is CURRENT OUTPUT or  
CURRENT DUPLEX – 100 %,  
Loop 2 is:  
Loop 1 Output  
Loop 1 Output  
Loop 1 Output  
Not used  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Loop 2 Output  
Alarm 2  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Time Simplex  
Loop 2 Ouptut  
Current or Current Duplex (100 %)  
Current/Time or Time/Current (N/A)  
Loop 2:  
Output 1 or 2  
Loop 2:  
Output 1 or 2  
Loop 1 is CURRENT DUPLEX – 50 %,  
Loop 2 is:  
Loop 1,Output 1  
Loop 1,Output 2  
N/A  
—
Loop 2 Output  
Alarm 1  
—
Time Simplex  
—
—
—
—
—
—
Current (N/A)  
—
—
Current/Time or Time/Current (N/A)  
Loop 1 is TIME/CURRENT or  
CURRENT/TIME,  
Loop 2 is:  
Loop 1:  
Output 1 or 2  
Not used  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Loop 1:  
Ouptut 1 or 2  
Loop 2 Output  
Alarm 1  
Time Simplex  
Loop 1:  
Output 1 or 2  
Loop 2 Output  
Loop 1:  
Output 1 or 2  
Current or Current Duplex (100 %)  
Current/Time or Time/Current  
Loop 1:  
Output 1 or 2  
Loop 2:  
Output 1 or 2  
Loop 1:  
Output 1 or 2  
Loop 2:  
Output 1 or 2  
TWO-LOOP RESTRICTIONS:  
1. Time Duplex and Three Position Step Control are not available on Control Loop 2.  
2. Position Proportional Control is not available on Two-Loop or Cascade Controllers.  
3. If either Time Duplex or Three Position Step Control is selected as Control Loop 1 Output, then Time Simplex,  
Current/Time Duplex and Time/Current Duplex are not available for Control Loop 2 Output.  
4. Current Duplex 50 % is not available on Model No. DC330E-EE-2XX.  
176  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13 Configuring Two Loops of Control  
Select 2-loop algorithm  
The procedure in Table 5-24 shows you how select the 2-loop algorithm.  
Table 5-24 Procedure for Selecting 2-loop Algorithm  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Select Algorithm  
Set Up Group  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Lower Display  
ALGORTHM  
2
Select the PID  
Loops  
to successively display the following  
constants:  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
Upper Display  
1 LOOP  
2LOOPS  
Lower Display  
ALGORTHM  
CASCAD  
To select two Loops or Cascade control.  
or  
Select the output  
algorithm for each loop  
See Section 5.12 for rules and regulations, then follow the procedure in  
Table 5-25.  
Table 5-25 Procedure for Selecting Output Algorithm  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Select Output  
Algorithm Set Up  
Group  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Lower Display  
OUT ALG  
2
Select Loop 1  
Algorithms  
to successively display the following  
constants:  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
Upper Display  
TIME  
CURRNT  
Lower Display  
OUT ALG  
POSITN  
TIME D  
CUR D  
CUR TI  
TI CUR  
to select Loop 1 algorithm.  
or  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step  
3
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Select Loop 2  
algorithms  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
NONE  
TIME  
Lower Display  
OUT2 ALG  
CURRNT  
CUR D  
CUR TI  
TI CUR  
to select Loop 2 algorithm.  
or  
Select control  
parameters for each  
loop  
The procedure in Table 5-26 shows you how select the 2 loop algorithm.  
Table 5-26 Procedure for Selecting Control Parameters  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Select Control  
Set Up Group  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Lower Display  
CONTROL  
Lower Display  
CONTROL2  
for Loop 1 or for Loop 2  
2
Refer to Section 5.12 for rules and  
restrictions and to Section 3 – Configuration  
to select the individual parameters.  
178  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select tuning  
parameters for each  
group  
The procedure in Table 5-27 shows you how select the Tuning  
Parameters.  
Table 5-27 Procedure for Selecting Tuning Parameters  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Select Tuning  
Set Up Group  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Lower Display  
TUNING  
Lower Display  
TUNING 2  
for Loop 1 or for Loop 2  
PID sets 1 and 2 (TUNING) are for Loop 1  
and single loop applications.  
PID sets 3 and 4 (TUNING 2) are for Loop 2  
in two-loop and cascade control applications.  
2
Select Tuning  
constants  
to successively display the following  
constants:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
The Tuning Constant Value  
Lower Display  
TUNING CONSTANTS for  
Primary Loop  
PROP BAND or GAIN  
RATE (MIN)  
RESET (MIN OR RPM)  
CYCLE  
PROP BAND2 or GAIN2  
RATE2 (MIN)  
RESET2 (MIN OR RPM)  
CYCLE2  
OR  
TUNING CONSTANTS for  
LOOP 2  
PROP BAND3 or GAIN3  
RATE3 (MIN)  
RESET3 (MIN OR RPM)  
CYCLE3  
PROP BAND4 or GAIN4  
RATE4 (MIN)  
RESET4 (MIN OR RPM)  
CYCLE4  
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration for  
detailed information.  
You can Autotune both sets on either loop.  
Refer to Section 5.21.  
Use the FUNCTION key to switch  
between loops.  
To change the values.  
or  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.14 Monitoring Two Loops of Control  
Introduction  
Monitoring two individual loops of control or internal Cascade is the same  
as a single loop except as indicated in Table 5-28.  
Table 5-28 Digital Display Indication—Two Loops  
Indicator  
Loop Indication  
Loop 1  
Definition  
none  
(two-loop)  
• Upper display shows the Process Variable  
(PV) for Loop 1  
I
• Lower display shows the Loop 1  
parameters and the PV and Output for  
Loop 2  
(cascade)  
• Controller setpoint annunciators show the  
setpoint currently being used for Loop 1  
L”  
Loop 2  
• Upper display shows the Process Variable  
(PV) for Loop 2  
• Lower display shows the Loop 2  
parameters and the PV and Output for  
Loop 1  
• Controller setpoint annunciators show the  
setpoint currently being used for Loop 2  
Loop display  
Display of Loop 1 or Loop 2 (if configured) is selected by toggling the  
FUNCTION / LOOP 1/2 key.  
Viewing each loop’s  
process variable  
Regardless of which loop is being displayed, 1 or 2, the process variable  
of the non-displayed loop can be shown in the lower display by repeated  
presses of the LOWER DISPLAY key until 1PVXXXX or 2PVXXXX  
is displayed.  
Internal cascade  
indication  
When internal Cascade has been configured, an “I” will appear on the left  
side of the upper display as long as Loop 1 is operating in the remote  
setpoint mode. Hold in the SETPOINT SELECT key until RSP appears  
in the lower display then release the key to select remote setpoint.  
Switching between automatic and manual mode on either loop will not  
affect the internal Cascade indication.  
180  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.15 Operating Two Loops of Control  
Loop operation  
Operation of two individual loops of control is identical to operating a  
single loop of control except that TUNING 2 group applies to Loop 2 only  
and two PID sets, 3 and 4, are available. TUNING group applies to Loop  
1 with PID sets 1 and 2 applicable.  
Operating modes and  
setpoint source  
The rules for Auto/Manual modes and changing setpoint sources are the  
same as single loop operation.  
Keyboard operation  
Note that the loop being displayed is the only loop affected by normal  
keyboard operation. However, either loop can be reconfigured when in the  
Set Up mode regardless of which is being displayed during normal  
operation.  
Accutune  
Two independent loops or cascaded loops can be tuned at the same time,  
if configured.  
Setpoint ramp or SP  
programming  
Either loop or both loops can be configured for a single setpoint ramp  
operation by enabling the desired loop or loops (see Section 3 –  
Configuration).  
An “H” or “R” will appear when applicable, depending upon which loop  
is being displayed.  
The RUN/HOLD operation is shown in Table 5-15 Procedure for Running  
a Setpoint Ramp.  
Digital inputs (remote  
mode switching)  
Digital Input 2 is dedicated to Loop 2 and Digital Input 1 is dedicated to  
Loop 1 when two loops or Cascade control is configured.  
Output override Hi/Lo  
select  
Output Override allows you to select the higher of Output 1 and Output 2  
(Hi Select) or the lower of Output 1 and Output 2 (Lo Select) to appear at  
Output 1 terminals to drive the final control element. Refer to Section 5.12  
for Override rules and block diagram.  
Override prompts appear under the Algorithm Set Up group, function  
prompt OUT OVRD.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.16 Three Position Step Control Algorithm  
Introduction  
The Three Position Step Control algorithm (Loop 1 only) allows the  
control of a valve (or other actuator) with an electric motor driven by two  
controller output relays; one to move the motor upscale, the other to move  
it downscale, without a feedback slidewire linked to the motor shaft.  
Accutune SP or SP+PV tuning does not function with this algorithm.  
Accutune TUNE will operate with this algorithm.  
Estimated motor  
position  
Models DC330X-EE-XXX-X0, DC330X-AA-XXX-X0  
The Three Position Step control algorithm provides an output display  
(OUT) which is an estimated motor position since the motor is not using  
any feedback. Although this output indication is only accurate to a few  
percent, it is corrected each time the controller drives the motor to one of  
its stops (0 % or 100 %).  
It avoids all the control problems associated with the feedback slidewire  
(wear, dirt, noise). When operating in this algorithm, the estimated “OUT”  
display is shown to the nearest percent (i.e. no decimal).  
Accurate motor  
position  
Models DC330X-EE-XXX-X2, DC330X-AA-XXX-X2  
In the event that an accurate and repeatable indication in motor position is  
required, Position Proportional model’s slidewire input can be used to  
read the motor position and display it on the lower display as “POS” while  
still operating in the Three Position Step control mode.  
The slidewire must be calibrated for this to operate correctly.  
Table 5-29 lists the procedure for displaying the motor position.  
Displaying the motor  
position  
Table 5-29 Procedure for Displaying the 3PSTEP Motor Position  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Access the  
displays  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
The PV value  
Lower Display  
POS = 3PStep motor position with  
slidewire connected  
or  
OUT = Estimated 3PStep motor  
position when no slidewire exists  
Power-up output  
When the controller powers up after a power outage, the position of the  
motor will correspond to whatever was configured at the Control Set Up  
function prompt PWR OUT, selection LAST or F’SAFE. Refer to Section  
4.10, Table 4-9 for definition of each selection.  
182  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.17 Input Math Algorithms  
Introduction  
If selected via Math options, this controller has two input algorithms  
available. Each algorithm can be configured to provide a derived  
(calculated) PV or a derived remote setpoint. Up to three inputs may be  
applied to the calculation. In addition, the two algorithms may be “linked”  
to combine two calculations by configuring one algorithm to be an input  
to the other algorithm.  
Standard functionality:  
• Basic models (DC330B) contain as standard: Weighted Average,  
Feedforward Summer, Feedforward Multiplier.  
• Expanded models (DC330E) provide as standard: Weighted Average,  
Feedforward Summer, Feedforward Multiplier, Relative Humidity.  
The Math option, which provides additional algorithms plus two  
Characterizers, Totalizer, and Gain Scheduling, is available only on  
Expanded Model DC330E-XX-XXX.  
Input algorithm  
selections  
Algorithm selections are made in Section 3 – Configuration. The  
following function prompts can be found in the Algorithm Set Up group:  
IN ALG1  
IN ALG2  
These selections include the following algorithms:  
Weighted Average  
Feedforward Summer  
Relative Humidity  
Summer  
Hi Select  
Lo Select  
√ Multiply Divide  
√ Multiply  
Multiply Divide  
Multiply  
Feedforward Multiplier  
Carbon Potential (several types)  
Dewpoint  
The formulas for these selections are given in Table 4-5 in Section 4 –  
Configuration Prompt Definitions.  
Input A, Input B, and Input C selections for these formulas are found in  
Section 4 – Configuration Prompt Definitions; Set Up group  
ALGORTHM, under the following function prompts:  
ALG1 INA  
ALG1 INB  
ALG1 INC  
ALG2 INA  
ALG2 INB  
ALG2 INC  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-segment  
characterization  
This is available as part of the Math Algorithm option. Two 8- selections  
can made in Section 3 – Configuration; Set Up group ALGORTHM,  
under function prompts:  
8SEG CH1  
Xn VALUE  
Yn VALUE  
8SEG CH2  
Xn VALU2  
Yn VALU2  
An 8-segment characterizer can be applied to either Input 1, Input 2,  
Output 1, or Output 2. When Input 1 or Input 2 is used, the selected  
input’s Ratio and Bias are applied to the Xn values.  
When one of the loop outputs is selected, the Xn Values are the output  
from the control algorithm, and the Yn Output is the final control element  
action.  
An example of 8-segment characterization is shown in Figure 4-2.  
Totalizer function  
A Flow Totalizer is available as part of the Math Algorithm option. This  
calculates and displays the total flow volume being measured by Input 1.  
Alternatively, it can be applied to either Input Algorithm 1 or Input  
Algorithm 2 to totalize the compensated flow rate being calculated by the  
algorithm.  
The totalizer displays the current totalized flow value (up to seven digits  
maximum). Seven scaling factors are available (from one to one million).  
The desired scaling factor is applied to the calculated value to extend the  
maximum total flow range that can be displayed.  
Five integration rates are available to match the totalizer rate to the rate  
of flow being measured. The rates are:  
Engineering units (EU) per second  
EU per minute  
EU per hour  
EU per day  
Millions of units per day  
The totalizer value is stored in nonvolatile memory once every eight  
hours. If power is lost while the totalizer is in operation, the current value  
of the totalizer will be lost. When power is restored, the totalizer will  
start operation for the last value stored in nonvolatile memory. The Σ  
(Sigma) display will blink to indicate this condition. Reset the totalizer.  
The totalizer can be reset from the keyboard whenever desired. The  
totalizer should always be reset to initialize the counters whenever it is  
enabled, otherwise, the “Σ” (Sigma) display will blink.  
Refer to Section 3 – Configuration, Set Up group ALGORTHM, function  
prompt TOTALIZER to select an application, and the function prompts  
that follow TOTALIZER to enter your scale factor and rate of integration.  
184  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alarm on totalizer  
value  
The alarm type configuration includes an Alarm on Totalizer value. This  
allows an alarm setpoint value to be used to cause an alarm when  
exceeded. The alarm setpoint represents the lowest four digits of the  
selected Totalizer Scale Factor and has a range from 0 to 9999 x Totalizer  
Scale Factor.  
Totalizer reset via  
digital input  
The digital input type configuration includes a Reset Totalizer that resets  
the accumulated totalizer value when the DI is closed.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.18 Digital Input Option (Remote Switching)  
Introduction  
The Digital Input option detects the state of external contacts for either of  
two inputs. On contact closure, the controller will respond according to  
how each digital input is configured. If the controller is configured for  
either 2-loop or Cascade control, then switch #1 operates only on Loop 1  
and switch #2 operates only on Loop 2.  
Make your selection under the Option Set Up group function prompt  
“DIG IN1” or “DIG IN2.” See Section 3 – Configuration .  
Action on closure  
Table 5-30 lists the configuration prompt selections, the “Action on  
Closure,” and the display indication for each selection available.  
Table 5-30  
Digital Input Option Action on Contact Closure  
Action on Contact Closure  
DIG IN1 or  
DIG IN2  
Selections  
Display Indication  
Returns (toggles) to original state when contact opens,  
unless otherwise noted.  
None  
DI 1 2 always off*  
MAN blinks  
No Digital Input selection  
*The Digital Input Annunciator will always show the Digital Input status.  
Puts the controller into manual mode. Contact open returns the  
controller to former mode unless MANUAL/AUTO key is pressed  
while digital input is active, then it stays in the manual mode.  
TO MAN  
TO LSP  
TO 2SP  
TO 3SP  
Puts the controller into local setpoint 1. When contact opens, the  
controller returns to former operation, local or remote setpoint, unless  
the SETPOINT SELECT key is pressed while digital input is active,  
then it stays in the local setpoint mode.  
RSP annunciator blinks  
RSP annunciator blinks  
Puts the controller into local setpoint 2. When contact opens, the  
controller returns to former operation, local or remote setpoint, unless  
the SETPOINT SELECT key is pressed while digital input is active,  
then it stays in the local setpoint 2 mode.  
Puts the controller into local setpoint 3. When contact opens, the  
controller returns to former operation, local or remote setpoint, unless  
the SETPOINT SELECT key is pressed while digital input is active,  
then it stays in the local setpoint 3 mode.  
TO DIR  
Selects direct controller action.  
ToHOLD  
H blinks  
Suspends setpoint program or setpoint ramp operation. Contact open  
runs the ramp/program from the Hold point unless the Ramp/Program  
was not previously started via the RUN/HOLD key. This selection  
applies to either loop.  
ToPID2  
PV 2IN  
PV 3IN  
RERUN  
PIDSET 2 in lower  
display  
Selects PID set 2.  
II  
IN  
(II blinks)  
(III blinks)  
Selects the PV to equal Input 2.  
Selects the PV to equal Input 3.  
III  
IN  
Resets the Setpoint program back to the beginning of the first segment  
in the program and leaves the program in the same Run or Hold mode  
that it was in when the DI closed. Opening the DI has no further affect.  
186  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIG IN1 or  
DIG IN2  
Selections  
Display Indication  
Action on Contact Closure  
Returns (toggles) to original state when contact opens,  
unless otherwise noted.  
TO RUN  
ToBEGN  
R indicator blinks  
Starts a stopped SP Program. Reopening contact puts the controller in  
Hold mode. This selection applies to either loop.  
Resets the Setpoint Program back to the beginning of the first segment  
in the program and places the program into the Hold mode. Reopening  
the contact has no effect. This selection applies to either loop.  
STOP I  
Disables PID Integral (I) action.  
MAN FS  
MAN blinks  
Unit goes to manual mode, output goes to the failsafe value. This will  
cause a bump in the output when switching from AUTO to MANUAL.  
The switch back from MANUAL to AUTO is bumpless.  
ToLOCK  
ToAout  
LOCKED when a key is  
pressed  
Disables all keys.  
Output is forced to value set at control prompt “AUTO OUT” when  
controller is in automatic mode. Reopening contact returns the  
controller to the normal output. This selection is only available on Loop  
1.  
TIMER  
Starts timer (momentary). Reopening switch has no effect.  
Timer clock (  
) and  
time appear in lower  
display.  
AM STA  
ToTUNE  
Causes switch to Auto Manual Station mode. Refer to Figure 5-5 in  
Section 5.19 for auto manual station information. This selection is only  
available on Loop 1.  
TUNE ON in lower  
Starts the Accutune process. Opening the switch has no effect.  
display  
SPinit  
TRACK1  
TRACK2  
ToOUT2  
TO RSP  
D L1/2  
Forces the SP to initialize at the current PV value.  
Allows Output 1 to track Input 2.  
O blinks  
O blinks  
Allows Output 2 to track Input 2.  
O blinks  
Allows Output 2 to override Output 1.  
Selects remote setpoint.  
RSP annunciator blinks  
Displays loop not being displayed at time of closure.  
RST FB  
Allows Input 2 to override the internal reset value, providing external  
reset feedback.  
ToPURG  
LoFIRE  
MAN LT  
MAN blinks and output  
value shows in lower  
display  
Forces loop to manual mode with the output values set to the Output  
High Limit configuration.  
MAN blinks and output  
value shows in lower  
display  
Forces loop to manual mode with the output set to the Output Low  
Limit configuration.  
Forces loop to manual mode. This is a momentary switch input,  
therefore no action occurs when the switch is opened.  
To return to automatic mode, press the MANUAL/AUTO key.  
REStot  
Resets the accumulated totalizer value. Opening the switch has no  
effect.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard operation  
Front panel keys have no effect on the digital input action in the closed  
state.  
Digital inputs 1 and 2  
combination selections  
The Digital Input combination selections listed in Table 5-31 can be used  
in combination with the digital inputs 1 and 2 listed in Table 5-30.  
Refer to Section 3 – Configuration and make your selections under the  
Options Set Up group function prompt “DIG 1 COMB” or “DIG 2  
COMB.”  
When 2-loop or cascade control is configured, digital input 1 operates on  
Loop 1 and digital input 2 operates on Loop 2, unless otherwise noted.  
Table 5-31  
Digital Input Combinations “DIG IN1” or “DIG IN2”  
Selections used in  
Combination with  
“DIG IN1” or  
Display Indication  
Action on contact closure  
Returns (toggles) to original state  
when contact opens.  
“DIG IN2”  
+PID2  
+ToDIR  
+ToSP2  
+DISAT  
+ToSP1  
+RUN  
PIDSET 2 in lower display  
Selects PID set 2.  
Puts the controller into direct controller action.  
Selects the second local setpoint.  
Disables Adaptive tune.  
RSP blinks  
T indicator is no longer lit  
Selects the local setpoint.  
R indicator blinks  
Starts or restarts RUN of SP Ramp/Program.  
Digital inputs 1 and 2  
combination operation  
There are five possible situations that can occur when working with  
digital input combinations. Table 5-32 lists these situations and the  
resulting action when the switch is active.  
In the table:  
Enabled  
means that the parameter is configured and the action  
will occur when the digital input is active.  
Action Disabled means that the digital input or digital combination  
parameter is configured but the action cannot occur  
when the digital input is active because the selected  
parameter is disabled.  
188  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5-32  
DIG COMB  
Digital Inputs 1 and 2 Combination  
Action  
DIG IN1  
NONE  
Example  
Any Selection  
No action will occur when the digital  
input is active.  
ENABLED  
DISABLED  
ENABLED  
The DIG IN condition will occur  
when the Digital Input is active.  
DIG IN1 = TO MAN  
DIG1 COM = DISABL  
Loop 1 will switch to MANUAL  
when digital input 1 is active.  
ACTION  
No action will occur when the digital DIG IN1 = ToPID2  
DISABLED  
input is active.  
PID SETS = 1 ONLY  
DIG1 COM = +ToSP2  
LSP’S = TWO  
DIG IN1 is action disabled  
because PID SETS is set to  
1 ONLY. Therefore, when digital  
input 1 is active, no action will  
occur even though DIG1 COM is  
enabled.  
ENABLED  
ACTION  
DISABLED  
Action is indeterminate when the  
digital input is active.  
DIG IN1 = ToPID2  
PID SETS = 2KEYBD  
DIG1 COM = +ToSP2  
LSP’S =1 ONLY  
Because DIG1 COM is action  
disabled, the action will be  
indeterminate when DIG IN1 is  
active.  
ENABLED  
ENABLED  
Both DIG IN and DIG COM action  
will occur.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.19 Auto/Manual Station  
Introduction  
When you select “AM STA” (auto manual station) under the Option Set  
Up group function prompt “DIG IN1” or “DIG IN2” (digital input option),  
contact closure on the selected digital input causes the controller to switch  
to Auto/Manual Station mode.  
Function  
As shown in Figure 5-5, State 2 is the “A/M Station mode” where the  
programmable logic controller (PLC) output is sent through the  
Auto/Manual Station. You can switch to manual and change the output at  
the controller. (It uses PID set 2.)  
State 1 is the “Backup PID mode” which is triggered by opening the  
digital input. (It uses PID set 1.)  
Figure 5-5  
Auto/Manual Station and Backup Control Feature  
PLC  
T/C  
PV  
SP  
T/C  
Control output  
4-20 mA  
DI #1 = "AM STA"  
OPEN  
(new  
CLOSED  
selection)  
IN1  
IN2  
PV  
State 1:  
State 2:  
DI #1: Open  
DI #1: Closed  
BACKUP  
PID  
CONTROL  
A/M STATION  
Alarm  
PV  
Output on  
Manual  
Mode  
(new  
selection)  
– Direct action  
– PD+MR  
– SP = 2SP  
– PV = IN2  
– PIDSET2  
LSP = 2SP  
LSP = SP1  
Aux  
Output  
PD+MR  
PID A  
SP1 =  
new  
PIDSET1  
selection  
P =  
I =  
D =  
same  
as  
PLC  
}
OUT1  
OUT1  
Configure  
State 2 per  
next page.  
Output 1  
4-20 mA  
To valve  
24184  
190  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description  
The “AM STA” selection of digital input creates a repeater station when  
the digital input is closed. This is accomplished by a multi-selection from  
the digital input menu.  
• “ACTION” is forced as “DIRECT”.  
• “CONT ALG” is forced as “PD+MR”.  
• Active setpoint is forced to 2SP.  
• The PV is switched to “PV 2IN”.  
• The tuning parameters used are the second set of parameters.  
When the switch is open the unit becomes a normal controller with  
“CONT ALG” of “PID A”, using tuning parameters set 1, SP, PV as IN1  
and “DIRECT” or “REVERSE” as selected by customer configuration.  
Input 1 is typically the PV of some upper controller and Input 2 is  
typically that controller’s output. If the upper control fails, the upper  
device or some watchdog opens the digital input switch and UDC 3300  
back-up PID A control is active.  
When the upper control reactivates, the digital input switch is closed and  
the Auto/Manual Station becomes a repeater station and allows the upper  
control output signal to pass through.  
Configuration  
There are some things to consider when configuring the controller.  
The PV range stays as the IN1 range, even while IN2 is the PV when the  
switch is closed; therefore:  
• The IN2 HI must be less than or equal to the IN1 HI.  
(Suggest: IN2 HI = 100.0)  
• The IN2 LO must be greater than or equal to the IN1 LO.  
(Suggest: IN2 LO = 0.0)  
• The TUNING GAIN2 must be equal to  
(IN1 HI – IN1 LO) / (IN2 HI – IN2 LO).  
Configuration  
Refer to Table 5-33 and set up the controller in the order shown.  
Table 5-33  
Auto/Manual Station Mode Configuration Procedure  
SET  
UP  
Press III  
FUNC  
Press  
Press  
Select  
to  
Step  
1
to Enter  
Value or  
Selection  
Remarks  
to Select Set  
Up Group  
Function  
Prompts  
Control  
PID SETS  
2KEYBD  
TWO  
Select other control parameters as needed by the  
application.  
LSP’S  
SP TRACK  
CONT ALG  
MAN RSET  
NONE  
PD+MR  
0
2
3
Algorithm  
Tuning  
This allows setting of the Manual Reset value.  
Manual reset of 0 for no output bias and requires  
LSP2 = 0 %. If bias is required, set MR to equal the  
desired output bias value.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET  
UP  
Press III  
to Enter  
Value or  
Selection  
FUNC  
Press  
Press  
to  
Step  
Remarks  
to Select Set  
Up Group  
Select  
Function  
Prompts  
4
5
Algorithm  
Tuning  
CONT ALG  
PID A  
Defines back-up control algorithm.  
Note 1. Set the Gain 2 equal to  
RSET2MIN  
GAIN2  
50.00  
See Note 1  
Input 1 Span  
Input 2 Span  
If “PB” is selected under the Control Set Up group  
function prompt “PBorGAIN”, set the PROP BD2 to  
Input 2 Span  
Input 1 Span  
100 x  
RATE2MIN  
0.00  
Select PIDSET 1 tuning parameters as needed by the  
application.  
6
Options  
DIG IN1 or  
DIG IN2  
AM STA  
CAUTION  
DO NOT SELECT  
• In the CONTROL set up list, do not select SP TRACK as PV or RSP.  
• In the SP RAMP set up list, do not select SP RATE as ENABLE.  
• In the ALGORTHM set up list, do not select CONT ALG as  
PID B, ON-OFF, or 3PSTEP.  
• In the Display menu when PIDSET # is displayed, DO NOT change the  
selection.  
Operation  
Set the local setpoint 2 to 0 % of the Input 2 range.  
These features work with the Auto/Manual Station.  
• In the SP RAMP set up list, SP PROG (acts on SP1 for backup  
operation).  
• In the SP RAMP set up list, SP RAMP (acts on SP1 for backup  
operation).  
• In the CONTROL set up list, ACTION as DIRECT or REVERSE for  
the backup PID A operation.  
The PD+MR action is forced to be DIRECT as required for the pass  
through of the output signal.  
192  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.20 Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression  
Introduction  
Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression minimizes overshoot after a setpoint change  
or a process disturbance. This is especially useful in processes which  
experience load changes or where even a small overshoot beyond the  
setpoint may result in damage or lost product.  
How it works  
The fuzzy logic observes the speed and direction of the PV signal as it  
approaches the setpoint and temporarily modifies the internal controller  
response action as necessary to avoid an overshoot. There is no change to  
the PID algorithm, and the fuzzy logic does not alter the PID tuning  
parameters. This feature can be independently enabled or disabled, as  
required by the application, to work with TUNE On-Demand tuning, the  
SP tuning algorithm, or Adaptive Tune.  
Configuration  
To configure this item, refer to Section 3 – Configuration:  
• Set Up Group ACCUTUNE  
• Function Prompt FUZZY  
• Select ENABLE or DISABL ( or  
)
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.21 Accutune  
Introduction  
There are several types of Accutune from which to choose:  
• (TUNE) Demand Tuning—Tuning is done on demand  
– by pressing the LOWER DISPLAY and I keys simultaneously,  
– by selecting prompt “TUNE” in the lower display,  
– via digital input.  
• (SP) Setpoint Tuning*—SP only tuning will continually adjust the  
Gain or Proportional Band (P), Reset (I), and Rate (D) tuning constants  
in response to setpoint changes.  
• (TUN+PV) Demand Tuning + PV Adapt—Provides TUNE On  
Demand tuning plus PV adaptive tuning whenever a PV process  
disturbance of 0.3 % span or greater occurs.  
• (SP+PV) Setpoint Tuning* + PV Adapt—Provides SP only tuning  
plus PV adaptive tuning whenever a PV process disturbance of 0.3 %  
span or greater occurs.  
*Not available on Basic Model DC330B  
Configuration  
To configure this item, refer to Section 3 – Configuration:  
• Set Up Group ACCUTUNE.  
• Function Prompt ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2 depending on which  
loop you are tuning.  
• Select DISABL, TUNE, SP, TUN+PV, or SP+PV. Use the I or I  
key.  
If SP is selected:  
– Enter the setpoint change value, function prompt SP CHANG or SP  
CHAN2.  
– Verify or change the process gain value, function prompt KPG or  
KPG 2.  
– Verify criteria, function prompt CRITERIA or CRITERA2.  
Two-loop and cascade  
operation  
Accutune can be used on either or both loops. However, while one loop is  
operating by SP tuning, the configuration of either loop cannot be  
changed. When one loop is operating by PV adaptive tuning, the other  
loop can have its configuration changed.  
194  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rules  
Table 5-34 is a list of rules for Accutune.  
Table 5-34  
Accutune Rules and Regulations  
Applicable Rule  
TUNE  
SP*  
X
TUNE On Demand tuning will work for all control algorithms except ON/OFF. Process  
line out is not required.  
X
TUNE On Demand tuning works for integrating processes.  
X
X
SP tuning will work only for algorithm PID a or PID B selections; i.e., it will NOT work  
with ON/OFF, Three Position Step, or PD+MR control algorithms.  
SP tuning can tune on all local or computer setpoints except ramping setpoints; i.e.,  
cannot be done during SP Ramp or SP Program or when using remote setpoint.  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Tuning is done in automatic mode.  
Tuning can be monitored or reconfigured using communications option.  
Tuning can be enabled via digital inputs.  
Tuning can be aborted by going to manual mode or disabling via configuration.  
When tuning is in progress, a large T appears in the upper display and disappears as  
soon as tuning is completed.  
X
X
X
Can tune two independent loops.  
Setpoint changes can be made during operation. The setpoint at the time tuning  
starts is captured and Tune runs until completion, then proceeds to the new SP value  
following the completion of tuning.  
*SP ADAPT not available on Basic Model DC330B  
How TUNE (demand)  
tuning works  
TUNE tuning provides virtually foolproof, trouble-free on-demand tuning  
in the UDC 3300 controller. No knowledge of the process is required at  
start-up. The operator simply enters the desired setpoint and initiates the  
tuning.  
The controller immediately starts controlling to the setpoint while it  
identifies the process, calculates the tuning constants and enters them into  
the Tuning group, and begins PID control with the correct tuning  
parameters. This works with any process, including integrating type  
processes, and allows returning at a fixed setpoint.  
The tuning sequence will cycle the controller’s output two full cycles  
between 0 % and 100 % (or configured output limits) while allowing only  
a very small process variable change above and below the SP during each  
cycle. The algorithm then calculates new tuning parameters and enters  
them into the Tuning group. A large T appears in the upper display while  
tuning is active.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting TUNE  
(demand) tuning  
After TUNE or TUN+PV has been enabled, use the procedure in Table  
5-35 to start tuning.  
Table 5-35 Procedure for Starting TUNE (Demand) Tuning  
Step  
Action  
Set the setpoint to the desired value.  
1
2
Switch to Automatic mode by pressing the MANUAL/AUTO key.  
3
Initiate Tuning by:  
• pressing the I key when the lower display prompt = TUNE-OFF,  
• pressing the LOWER DISPLAY and I keys simultaneously, or  
• using the digital input, if configured.  
Aborting tuning  
If it is necessary to stop or abort the tuning process, press the  
MANUAL/AUTO key and the controller will return to manual mode.  
You can also disable TUNE or TUN+PV in the ACCUTUNE or  
ACCUTUN2 Set Up group.  
TUNE for duplex  
(heat/cool)  
TUNE can be done for applications using duplex (heat/cool) control.  
During tuning, Accutune requires that setpoint 1 will cause a Heating  
demand, and then the calculated tuning parameters will be automatically  
entered as PID set 1. Likewise, it requires that tuning at local setpoint 2  
will cause a Cooling demand, and then the cooling parameters will be  
entered as PID set 2.  
The tuning sequence will cycle the controller’s output two full cycles  
between the high output limit and 50 % for HEAT or between 50 % and  
the low output limit for COOL while allowing only a small process  
variable change above and below the setpoint during each cycle.  
Configuring TUNE for  
duplex (heat/cool)  
To configure this item, refer to Section 3 – Configuration:  
• Set Up Group ACCUTUNE  
• Function Prompt ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2  
• Select TUNE or TUN+PV, using either I or I.  
196  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using TUNE at start-up  
for duplex (heat/cool)  
After TUNE or TUN+PV has been enabled, use the procedure in Table  
5-36 to use TUNE at start-up for duplex (heat/cool) control.  
Table 5-36 Procedure for Using TUNE at Start-up for Duplex  
Step  
1
Action  
Heat Zone:  
• Adjust Local Setpoint 1 to a value within the Heat zone.  
• Put the controller in Automatic mode.  
• Press the LOWER DISPLAY and I keys simultaneously to initiate  
Heat tuning.  
The output will cycle between 50 % and 100 % (or high output limit). A large  
T appears in the upper display until tuning is completed and final Heat  
parameters are entered for PID set 1 in the Tuning group.  
2
Cool Zone:  
• Adjust Local Setpoint 2 to a value within the Cool zone.  
• Put the controller in Automatic mode.  
• Press the LOWER DISPLAY and I keys simultaneously to initiate  
Cool tuning.  
The output will cycle between 0 % and 50 % (or low output limit). A large T  
appears in the upper display until tuning is completed and final Cool  
parameters are entered for PID set 2 in the Tuning group.  
How SP tuning works  
SP tuning will continually adjust the Gain or Proportional Band (P), Reset  
(I), and Rate (D) tuning constants in response to setpoint changes.  
ATTENTION  
SP tuning is not available on Basic Model DC330B.  
SP tuning handles all Local and Computer setpoint changes. It uses time  
domain analysis, and the rule based expert system techniques to identify  
the two most dominant process lags plus any dead time. It then  
automatically readjusts the PID parameters as necessary. It does this while  
controlling to setpoint in automatic (closed loop) control mode.  
These calculated PID values can be changed, if desired, whenever the  
tuning is not active. Tuning can be aborted by pushing the  
MANUAL/AUTO key to return to the manual mode.  
Two criteria are available—Normal and Fast—through configuration.  
Setpoint changes  
During start-up, or whenever the setpoint changes beyond the “SP  
Change” value, SP tuning employs time domain analysis to tune the  
process at any desired setpoint without any prior initialization or process  
knowledge.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using SP tuning at  
start-up  
After SP or PV+PV has been enabled, use the procedure in Table 5-37 to  
use SP tuning at start-up.  
Table 5-37 Procedure for Using SP Tuning at Start-up  
Step  
1
Action  
Put the controller in manual mode by pressing the MANUAL/AUTO key.  
2
3
4
Let the PV stabilize.  
Adjust the setpoint to the desired value.  
Put the controller in automatic mode by pressing the MANUAL/AUTO  
key.  
The controller will switch to automatic mode and the process will start to  
move toward the setpoint and will line out with the proper tuning constants.  
A large T appears on the left side of the upper display to indicate that SP  
tuning is in progress.  
SP tuning for duplex  
(heat/cool)  
SP tuning can be done for applications using duplex (heat/cool) control.  
Configuring SP tuning  
for duplex (heat/cool)  
To configure this item, refer to Section 3 – Configuration:  
• Set Up Group ACCUTUNE  
• Function Prompt ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2  
• Select SP or SP+PV, using either I or I.  
• Enter the Setpoint Change Value, Function Prompt SP CHANG or  
SP CHAN2.  
– Verify the Process Gain Value to be 1.0, Function Prompt KPG or  
KPG 2.  
– Verify Criteria selected is FAST, Function Prompt CRITERIA or  
CRITERA2.  
198  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using SP tuning at  
start-up for duplex  
(heat/cool)  
After SP or SP+PV has been enabled, use the procedure in Table 5-38 to  
use SP tuning at start-up for duplex (heat/cool) control.  
Table 5-38 Procedure for Using SP Tuning at Start-up for Duplex  
Step  
1
Action  
Put the controller into manual mode— MANUAL/AUTO key.  
Heat Zone:  
2
• Adjust the Output to a value above 50 % and at least 5 % lower than the  
normal heating setpoint value.  
• Let the PV stabilize.  
• Press the MANUAL/AUTO key to start tuning for Heat zone.  
The controller will switch to automatic mode and the process will start to  
move toward the setpoint and will line out with the proper Heat tuning  
constants. A large T appears on the left side of the upper display to indicate  
that SP tuning is in progress.  
When the T disappears, tuning is completed and final values are entered for  
PID set 1 parameters in the Tuning group.  
3
Cool Zone:  
• Adjust the Output to a value below 50 % and at least 5 % above the  
normal cooling setpoint value.  
• Let the PV stabilize.  
• Press the MANUAL/AUTO key to start tuning for Cool zone.  
The controller will switch to automatic mode and the process will start to  
move toward the setpoint and will line out with the proper Cool tuning  
constants. A large T appears on the left side of the upper display to indicate  
that SP tuning is in progress.  
When the T disappears, tuning is completed and final values are entered for  
PID set 2 parameters in the Tuning group.  
SP tuning after start-up  
SP tuning will occur whenever the controller is in automatic mode and a  
setpoint change occurs which is greater than the previously configured  
minimum setpoint change value.  
The controller will delay using any setpoint changes for 30 seconds to  
enable it to calculate whether to SP tune or not. But if the controller is  
toggled between LSP1 and LSP2 or if any other key (such as LOWER  
DISPLAY) is pressed, the setpoint change is immediate.  
A large T is displayed in the upper display whenever tuning is in progress.  
During this time, no changes to the configuration parameters, including  
the setpoint, are permitted.  
Aborting SP tuning  
If it is necessary to stop or abort the tuning:  
• Press the MANUAL/AUTO key to return to manual mode. This will  
cause an immediate abort of tuning.  
• Disable SP or SP+PV in the Accutune Set Up group at function prompt  
ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Retuning  
The controller will evaluate current tuning as SP changes occur. When  
retuning is required, the controller operates in automatic mode and  
identifies new tuning constants. At the point, the T appears and tuning  
values are entered and used until retuning occurs again.  
TUN+PV or SP+PV  
(process variable  
disturbance)  
The TUNE demand tuning or the SP tuning portions of these selections  
work as stated previously.  
During process variable (PV) disturbances which result from  
nonlinearities, process dynamics, load changes, or other operating  
conditions, PV adapt tuning will occur whenever a PV disturbance of  
0.3 % span or larger occurs. When this condition exists, the controller  
monitors the process response to determine whether there has been a true  
process change or a momentary upset. It will take 1 and 1/2 process cycles  
around the setpoint before any process recognition can occur to an  
oscillating process.  
However, if no oscillation occurs, Adaptive may alter the parameters to  
speed up or slow down the process response, if it determines the time to  
return to the SP is excessive or too fast (overshoot occurs).  
For this configuration, the controller operates with only one set of tuning  
parameters for each loop. The second set, normally used for duplex output  
or for keyboard, PV or SP switching, is not used because Adaptive tune  
continually updates the tuning parameters based on the PV deviation.  
PV tuning indications  
A small t is displayed in the upper display whenever PV adapt mode is in  
progress. During this time, changes to the configuration parameters are  
permitted. Whenever the t is displayed it signifies that the process  
response is being monitored and this may or may not result in parameter  
retuning.  
The selection of Fast or Normal criteria has no effect on PV adaptive  
tuning.  
Aborting PV adaptive  
tuning  
If it is necessary to stop or abort the tuning:  
• Press the MANUAL/AUTO key to return to manual mode. This will  
cause an immediate abort of tuning.  
• Disable TUN+PV or SP+PV in the Accutune Set Up group at function  
prompt ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2.  
Error prompt accessing  
procedure  
When an error is detected in the Accutune process, the message AT  
ABORT will appear in the lower display.  
In order to determine what is causing the error:  
• Select ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2 Set Up Group.  
• Access Function Prompt AT ERROR or AT ERR 2 for error prompt.  
200  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error prompt  
Table 5-39 lists the Accutune error prompts and their definitions.  
Table 5-39  
Accutune* Error Prompt Definitions  
Action to Take  
Upper Display  
Prompt Definition  
Prompt  
NONE  
No errors  
None  
OUTLIM  
SP Adapt step is greater than high output  
limit or less than low output limit  
• Check the output limits under Control Set  
Up group function prompts OUTHiLIM and  
OUTLoLIM in Section 3 – Configuration.  
Output step insufficient to get to SP value  
• Verify the Process Gain Value, function  
prompt KPG or KPG 2.  
IDFAIL  
ABORT  
Process Identification Failure  
An illegal value of gain, rate, or reset was  
calculated.  
Try to SP tune again. Insure the process is at  
line-out prior to initiation of SP tune.  
• Manual abort has occurred  
– Accutune will abort if the  
MANUAL/AUTO key is pressed  
during tuning  
Try to TUNE or SP tune again.  
(Only error code  
available for TUNE)  
• Digital input detected  
• Automatic abort has occurred  
– Accutune will automatically abort when  
a PV oscillation has been detected  
during SP adapt, whenever any SP  
values are changed during a PV adapt  
tune, or when Accutune is disabled.  
LOW PV  
RUNING  
PV not changed sufficiently or the PV has  
increased by more than 4 % and dead  
time not determined.  
NONE—After a period of about five minutes,  
the SP adaptive tuning will be retried  
automatically with a larger output step.  
Informational prompt indicating that SP  
tune is still active checking process gain  
even though T is not lit. It does not affect  
the keyboard operation.  
NONE  
*Does not apply to PV Adapt.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.22 Carbon Potential  
Introduction  
Figure 5-6 shows a UDC 3300 controller being used to control the carbon  
potential of a furnace’s atmosphere. A carbon probe consisting of a ZrO2  
sensor and a thermocouple (to measure the temperature at the sensor)  
provides two inputs to the controller. The microprocessor-based controller  
computes the atmosphere’s actual carbon potential from these two inputs  
and compares the computed value with the desired setpoint. As an on-off  
or PID control algorithm determines the controller output necessary to  
keep the actual carbon potential at the setpoint. Usually only one output is  
used to add more or less enriching gas (typically natural gas) to the  
furnace’s base atmosphere, which has a relatively low carbon potential.  
The enriching gas then raises the carbon potential to the desired level;  
however, there are occasions when it is necessary to add dilution air to  
lower the carbon potential instead of enriching gas to raise it. In those  
instances, a second output from the controller provides this function.  
When proportional control is used, a different set of PID tuning constants  
is used for the dilution air than those used for the enriching gas.  
Features  
•
Direct calculation of carbon percentage with seven different  
manufacturers’ probes  
– Advanced Atmosphere Control Corporation (AACC)  
– Corning  
– Cambridge Instruments  
– Marathon Monitors  
– Furnace Control Corporation  
– MacDhui (Barber Colman)  
– Bricesco  
• ± 0.02 % accuracy  
• No nomographs—no mistakes  
• Two controller outputs are available for duplex control.  
• Probe temperature input type is selectable from complete input menu.  
• Three different local setpoints—standard feature  
• Duplex control with second set of PID constants for dilution air control  
• Process factor adjustment capability  
• Automatic sooting warning via flashing display  
• New Dewpoint algorithm is available. Range: –50 °F to +100 °F  
• New % Oxygen algorithm is available. Range: 0 % to 40 %  
202  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagram  
Figure 5-6 is a diagram illustrating the application of the UDC 3300 for  
carbon potential control.  
Figure 5-6  
Carbon Potential Control  
Carbon  
Probe  
millivolts  
O2  
Sensor  
T/C  
Input 2  
f(x)  
Input 1  
f(x)  
Carburizing  
Furnace  
Input 3—  
Optional Online  
CO Compensation  
CP  
%
Carbon  
Calc.  
%
Carbon  
PV  
• SP  
PID  
• 2SP  
• 3SP or  
RSP  
UDC 3300  
Output  
CV  
E/P  
Enrichment Gas  
24185  
ATTENTION  
• For Carbon control, set Input Algorithm 1 to the proper carbon sensor  
used and set the PV source to IN AL 1. Input 1 will automatically  
become CARBON.  
• For % Oxygen control, set Input Algorithm 1 to OXYGEN. Input 1 will  
automatically become OXYGEN.  
• For Dewpoint control, set Input Algorithm 1 or Input Algorithm 2 to  
DEW PT. Input 1 will automatically become CARBON. The  
availability of Dewpoint on Input Algorithm 2 provides the capability  
of controlling Carbon Potential on Loop 1 and also reading the  
Dewpoint value from the same probe.  
• CO Compensation—Receives external CO transmitter signal via Input  
3 to provide online compensation fo the carbon calculation. Requires  
that the Input 2 temperature signal be a transmitter type input.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.23 HealthWatch  
Introduction  
The HealthWatch feature puts diagnostic data at your fingertips so you  
can monitor vital performance status to improve your process, predict  
failures, and minimize downtime.  
Valuable data regarding maintenance and diagnostic selections can be  
read by operator-accessed displays. Alarms can be configured to activate  
when the desired threshold is reached.  
See Section 4.18 Maintenance for details on using the various  
HealthWatch timers and counters. See Section 4.15 Alarms for details on  
HealthWatch maintenance alarms.  
204  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6 – Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming Option  
6.1 Overview  
What is programming?  
The term “programming” is used here to identify the process for selecting  
and entering the individual ramp and soak segment data needed to  
generate the required setpoint versus time profile (also called a program).  
A segment is a ramp or soak function which together make up a setpoint  
program. Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming lets you configure 6 ramp  
and 6 soak segments to be stored for use as one program or several small  
programs. You designate the beginning and end segments to determine  
where the program is to start and stop.  
Review program data  
and configuration  
While the procedure for programming is straightforward, and aided by  
prompts, we suggest that you read “Program Contents” in this section as  
well as “Section 3 - Configuration” before doing the setpoint  
programming.  
Fill out the worksheet  
What’s in this section  
Draw a Ramp/Soak Profile on the worksheet provided and fill in the  
information for each segment. This will give you a record of how the  
program was developed.  
The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section.  
Topic  
See Page  
205  
6.1  
6.2  
6.3  
6.4  
6.5  
Overview  
Program Contents  
206  
Drawing a Ramp/Soak Profile  
Entering the Setpoint Program Data  
Run/Monitor the Program  
209  
211  
214  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.2 Program Contents  
What you will configure  
Basically, you will configure all the data that is relevant to each ramp and  
soak segment for a given setpoint versus time profile. The controller will  
prompt you through the sequence of segments and associated functions.  
Ramp segments  
A ramp segment is the time it will take to change the setpoint to the next  
setpoint value in the program.  
Ramps are odd number segments. Segment #1 will be the initial ramp  
time.  
Ramp time is determined in either:  
TIME* - Hours.Minutes  
or  
Range = 0-99hr.59 min.  
Range = 0 to 999  
RATE* - EU/MIN or EU/HR  
* This selection of time or rate is made at prompt “RAMP UNIT”.  
Set this prompt before entering any Ramp.  
ATTENTION  
Entering “0” will imply an immediate step change in  
setpoint to the next soak.  
Soak segments  
A soak segment is a combination of soak setpoint (value) and a soak  
duration (time).  
Soaks are even number segments.  
Segment 2 will be the initial soak value and soak time.  
The soak setpoint range value must be within the setpoint high and low  
range limits in engineering units.  
SOAK TIME is the duration of the soak and is determined in:  
TIME - Hours.Minutes  
RANGE = 0-99hr.59 min.  
Start segment number  
End segment number  
This designates the number of the first segment (odd number).  
Range = 1 to 11  
This designates the number of the last segment. It must be a soak segment  
(even number).  
Range = 2 to 12  
Recycle number  
This number allows the program to recycle a specified number of times  
from beginning to end.  
Range = 0 to 99  
206  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guaranteed soak  
Each soak segment can have a deviation value of from 0 to ± 99 which  
guarantees the value for that segment.  
Guaranteed soak segment values >0 guarantee that the segments process  
variable is within the ± deviation for the configured soak time. Whenever  
the ± deviation is exceeded, soak timing is frozen.  
There are no guaranteed soaks whenever the deviation value is configured  
to 0; i.e., soak segments start timing soak duration as soon as the soak  
setpoint is first reached, regardless of where the process variable remains  
relative to the soak segment.  
The value is the number in engineering units, above or below the setpoint,  
outside of which the timer halts. The range is 0 to 99.  
The decimal location corresponds to input 1 decimal selection.  
Program state  
This selection determines the program state after completion.  
The selections are:  
DISABL = Program is disabled  
HOLD = Program on hold (RUN key restarts the program.)  
Program termination  
state  
This function determines the status of the controller upon completion.  
The selections are:  
LASTSP = controls to last setpoint and last control mode  
F SAFE = manual mode, failsafe output  
ATTENTION  
If power is lost during a program, upon power-up the  
controller will be in hold and the setpoint value will be the setpoint value  
prior to the beginning of the setpoint program. The program is placed in  
hold at the beginning of the first segment in the program.  
Hot Start  
This function determines whether LSP1 or PV is used as the setpoint  
when the program is initially changed from HOLD to RUN.  
The selections are:  
DISABL = When the program is initially changed from HOLD to  
RUN the present LSP1 value is captured as the default setpoint. If the  
program is terminated or the power cycled before the program has  
completed, the LSP1 is used as the control setpoint. The beginning  
segment uses this value as the initial ramp setpoint.  
ENABL = When the program is initially changed from HOLD to  
RUN the present PV value is captured and used as the beginning setpoint  
value for the ramp segment. If the program is terminated before  
completion, the setpoint value will revert back to the PV value captured at  
the initial HOLD to RUN transition. If the power is cycled before  
program completion, upon power-up the setpoint is set to the PV value at  
power-up and when the program is restarted that setpoint value is used  
initially.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ramp unit  
This determines the engineering units for the ramp segments.  
The selections are:  
TIME = Hours.Minutes  
RATE = EU/MIN or EU/HR  
ATTENTION  
This selection cannot be changed while a program is in  
operation.  
The Accutune TUNE selection will operate during setpoint programming.  
When it is initiated during a program, it places the program into Hold  
until it completes, then returns it to either Run or Hold depending what  
the state was before Tuning started.  
ATTENTION  
208  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.3 Drawing a Ramp/Soak Profile  
Ramp/Soak Profile  
example  
Before you do the actual configuration, we recommend that you draw a  
Ramp/Soak profile in the space provided on the “Program Record Sheet”  
(Figure 6-2) and fill in the associated information. An example of a  
Ramp/Soak Profile is shown in Figure 6-1.  
Figure 6-1  
Ramp/Soak Profile Example  
SEG 8  
500  
SEG 9  
SEG 4  
400  
SG 10  
SEG 7  
SEG 5  
°F  
SEG 3  
SG 11  
SEG 2  
300  
200  
SEG 6  
SEG 1  
SG 12  
Time/  
Hours 0  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17  
22624  
Prompt  
Function  
Segment  
Value  
1
Prompt  
Function  
Segment  
Value  
1 hr.  
STRT SEG Start Seg.  
END SEG End Seg.  
SEG4TIME Soak Time  
SEG5RAMP Ramp Time  
4
5
6
12  
1 hr.:30 min.  
250  
RAMP UNIT Engr. Unit for  
TIME  
SEG6 SP  
Soak SP  
Ramp  
RECYCLES Number of  
2
0
SEG6TIME Soak Time  
SEG7RAMP Ramp Time  
6
7
3 hr.:0 min.  
2 hr:30 min.  
500  
Recycles  
SOAK DEV Deviation  
Value  
PROG END Controller  
LAST SP  
HOLD  
SEG8 SP  
Soak SP  
8
Status  
STATE  
Controller  
SEG8TIME Soak Time  
SEG9RAMP Ramp Time  
8
0 hr.:30 min.  
0
State at end  
KEYRESET Reset SP  
DISABL  
DISABL  
9
Program  
HOT  
START  
PV Hot Start  
Program  
SG10 SP  
Soak SP  
10  
400  
Initialization  
or power up  
in SPP  
SEG1RAMP Ramp Time  
SEG2 SP Soak SP  
1
2
2
3
4
1 hr.  
300  
SG10 TIME Soak Time  
SG11RAMP Ramp Time  
10  
11  
12  
12  
0 hr.:30 min.  
3 hr:30 min.  
200  
SEG2TIME Soak Time  
SEG3RAMP Ramp Time  
SEG4 SP Soak SP  
1 hr.:30 min.  
1 hr.  
SG12 SP  
Soak SP  
SG12TIME Soak Time  
0 hr.:30 min.  
400  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Program Record Sheet  
Draw your ramp/soak profile on the record sheet shown in Figure 6-2 and  
fill in the associated information in the blocks provided. This will give  
you a permanent record of your program and will assist you when entering  
the Setpoint data.  
Figure 6-2  
Program Record Sheet  
22625  
Prompt  
Function  
Segment  
Value  
Prompt  
Function  
Segment  
Value  
STRT SEG Start Seg.  
END SEG End Seg.  
SEG4TIME Soak Time  
SEG5RAMP Ramp Time  
4
5
6
RAMPUNIT Engr. Unit for  
SEG6 SP  
Soak SP  
Ramp  
RECYCLES Number of  
SEG6TIME Soak Time  
SEG7RAMP Ramp Time  
6
7
Recycles  
SOAK DEV Deviation  
Value  
PROG END Controller  
SEG8 SP  
Soak SP  
8
Status  
STATE  
Controller  
State at end  
SEG8TIME Soak Time  
SEG9RAMP Ramp Time  
8
KEYRESET Reset SP  
9
Program  
HOT  
START  
PV Hot Start  
Program  
SG10 SP  
Soak SP  
10  
Initialization  
or power up  
in SPP  
SEG1RAMP Ramp Time  
SEG2 SP Soak SP  
1
2
2
3
4
SG10 TIME Soak Time  
SG11RAMP Ramp Time  
10  
11  
12  
12  
SEG2TIME Soak Time  
SEG3RAMP Ramp Time  
SEG4 SP Soak SP  
SG12 SP  
Soak SP  
SG12TIME Soak Time  
210  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.4 Entering the Setpoint Program Data  
Introduction  
The procedure listed in Table 6-1 tells you what keys to press and what  
prompts you will see when entering the setpoint program data. Follow the  
prompt hierarchy listed in Table 6-2 when selecting the functions for  
setpoint programming.  
ATTENTION  
Make sure SP RAMP and SP RATE are disabled first.  
Table 6-1  
Action  
Setpoint Program Data Entry Procedure  
Press Result  
Step  
1
Select SP PROG  
Group  
until you see  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
ENABLE  
ENABL2  
ENAB12  
Lower Display  
SP PROG  
to enable the setpoint programming option on Loop 1, Loop 2,  
or both.  
or  
2
Select the functions  
This accesses the function prompts SP Programming.  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
Shows the current value for each  
prompt.  
Lower Display  
The individual function prompts within  
the setpoint program group are shown.  
Successive presses of the [FUNCTION] key will sequentially  
display all the functions and their values or selections. Follow  
the prompt hierarchy shown in Table 6-2.  
3
Change the value or  
selection of a function  
prompt  
This changes the value or selection in the upper display. If the  
display blinks, you are trying to select an unacceptable value.  
or  
4
5
Enter value or  
selection into memory  
This enters the value or selection and goes to another prompt.  
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each function you want to change.  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
Exit configuration  
This exits from the configuration mode.  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
Alarms on the setpoint  
program  
You can configure an event to go ON or OFF at the beginning or end of  
any segment. Refer to Section 3 - Configuration under “Alarms  
Parameters Group” for details.  
Prompt hierarchy  
Table 6-2 lists all the function prompts for Setpoint Program data  
configuration in the order of their appearance. Follow the procedure in  
Table 6-1 to transfer the data from your setpoint Ramp/Soak profile into  
the controller. All parameters may be changed while the program is  
disabled or in HOLD.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 6-2  
Prompt Hierarchy and Available Selections  
Prompt  
(Lower  
Definition  
Value or Selection (use ▲ or ▲)  
(Upper Display)  
Display)  
SP RAMP  
SP RATE  
SP PROG  
Setpoint Ramp Selection  
Setpoint Rate of Change  
Selections:  
SP RAMP must be disabled to allow  
Setpoint Programming.  
DISABL  
Selections:  
SP RATE must be disabled to allow  
Setpoint Programming.  
DISABL  
Setpoint Ramp/Soak  
Programmer  
Selections:  
DISABL  
ENABLE—Loop 1  
ENABL2—Loop 2  
ENAB12—Loops 1 and 2  
SP PROG must be enabled to view  
the remaining prompts.  
STRT SEG  
END SEG  
Start Segment Number  
End Segment Number  
Enter Value:  
Enter Value:  
1 to 11  
2 to 12  
Always end in a soak Segment  
(2,4,.....12)  
RAMPUNIT  
Engineering Units from  
Ramp Segments  
Selections:  
TIME  
EU/MIN  
EU/HR  
RECYCLES  
SOAK DEV  
Number of Program  
Recycles  
Enter Value:  
0 to 99 recycles  
Guaranteed Soak Deviation Enter Value:  
0 to +99.00  
Value  
The number selected will be  
0 to 99 ± from setpoint.  
PROG END  
Program Termination State Selections:  
LASTSP—Hold at  
last setpoint in the  
program  
F SAFE—Manual  
mode/Failsafe  
output  
STATE  
Program State at Program  
End  
Selections:  
Selections:  
DISABL  
HOLD (hold mode)  
KEYRESET  
Reset/rerun SP Program  
DISABL  
RERUN  
TOBEGN  
PV Hot Start  
Program Initialization or  
power up in SPP  
HOTSTART  
Selections:  
DISABL—LSP1 is  
used as the initial  
ramp setpoint.  
ENABL—PV value is  
used as the initial  
ramp setpoint.  
SEG1RAMP  
or  
SEG1RATE  
Segment #1 Ramp Time  
or  
Segment #1 Ramp Rate  
Enter Value:  
Ramp Time = 0-99hr.0-59min, or  
Ramp Rate = Engineering units/min  
or Engineering units/hr  
Select TIME, EU/MIN, or EU/HR at  
prompt “RAMP UNIT”. All ramps will  
use the same selection.  
212  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Prompt  
(Lower  
Definition  
Value or Selection (use ▲ or ▲)  
(Upper Display)  
Display)  
SEG2 SP  
Segment #2 Soak Setpoint  
Value  
Enter Value:  
Within the Setpoint  
limits  
SEG2TIME  
Segment #2 Soak Duration Enter Value:  
Segment #3 Ramp Time or Enter Value:  
0-99hr.0-59min  
SEG3RAMP  
or  
SEG3RATE  
Segment #3 Ramp Rate  
Ramp Time = 0-99hr:0-59min, or  
Ramp Rate = EU/MIN or EU/HR  
SEG4 SP  
Segment #4 Soak Setpoint  
Value  
Enter Value:  
Within the Setpoint  
limits  
SEG4TIME  
Segment #4 Soak Duration Enter Value:  
Segment #5 Ramp Time or Enter Value:  
0-99hr.0-59min  
SEG5RAMP  
or  
SEG5RATE  
Segment #5 Ramp Rate  
Ramp Time = 0-99hr.0-59min, or  
Ramp Rate = EU/MIN or EU/HR  
SEG6 SP  
Segment #6 Soak Setpoint  
Value  
Enter Value:  
Within the Setpoint  
limits  
SEG6TIME  
Segment #6 Soak Duration Enter Value:  
Segment #7 Ramp Time or Enter Value:  
0-99hr.0-59min  
SEG7RAMP  
or  
SEG7RATE  
Segment #7 Ramp Rate  
Ramp Time = 0-99hr.0-59min, or  
Ramp Rate = EU/MIN or EU/HR  
SEG8 SP  
Segment #8 Soak Setpoint  
Value  
Enter Value:  
Within the Setpoint  
limits  
SEG8TIME  
Segment #8 Soak Duration Enter Value:  
0-99hr.0-59min  
SEG9RAMP  
or  
SEG9RATE  
Segment #9 Ramp Time  
or  
Segment #9 Ramp Rate  
Enter Value:  
Ramp Time = 0-99hr.0-59min, or  
Ramp Rate = EU/MIN or EU/HR  
SG10 SP  
Segment #10 Soak Setpoint Enter Value:  
Value  
Within the Setpoint  
limits  
SG10TIME  
Segment #10 Soak  
Duration  
Enter Value:  
Enter Value:  
Ramp Time = 0-99hr.0-59min, or  
Ramp Rate = EU/MIN or EU/HR  
0-99hr.0-59min  
SG11RAMP  
or  
SG11RATE  
Segment #11 Ramp Time  
or  
Segment #11 Ramp Rate  
SG12 SP  
Segment #12 Soak Setpoint Enter Value:  
Value  
Within the Setpoint  
limits  
SG12TIME  
Segment #12 Soak  
Duration  
Enter Value:  
0-99hr.0-59min  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.5 Run/Monitor the Program  
Introduction  
Make sure all the “SP PROG” function prompts under the Set Up group  
“SP RAMP” have been configured with the required data.  
An “H” will appear in the upper display indicating that the program is in  
the HOLD state.  
Run/monitor functions  
Table 6-3 lists all the functions required to run and monitor the program.  
Table 6-3  
Press  
Run/Monitor Functions  
Result  
Function  
Set the Local  
Setpoint  
You will see  
Upper Display  
SETPOINT  
SELECT  
Lower Display  
SP  
Local Setpoint Value  
to set the Local Setpoint value to where you  
want the program to start out.  
or  
Run State  
Hold State  
Initiates the setpoint program.  
RUN  
HOLD  
An “R” appears in the upper display  
indicating that the program is running.  
Holds the setpoint program. An “H” appears  
in the upper display indicating that the  
program is in the HOLD state.  
RUN  
HOLD  
The setpoint holds at the current setpoint.  
External Hold  
DI = “To Hold”  
If Remote Switching (Digital Input option) is  
present on your controller, contact closure  
places the controller in the HOLD state, if the  
setpoint program is running. The “H” in the  
upper display will blink indicating external  
hold is in effect.  
ATTENTION  
The keyboard takes  
priority over external switch for the  
RUN/HOLD function.  
Contact reopening runs program.  
Changing a Segment  
while in Hold  
These keys will operate and allow you to  
change the segment number while in HOLD.  
If a different segment is selected, it will be  
started at the beginning when placed in  
RUN. If the original segment is brought back,  
the program will continue from the point  
placed in HOLD.  
or  
NOTE: Changing a segment number may  
affect the alarms/events.  
214  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function  
Press  
Result  
External Program  
Reset  
If Remote Switching (Digital Input option) is  
present on your controller, contact closure  
resets the SP Program back to the start of  
the first segment.  
“To Begin”  
Program cycle number is not affected.  
Reopening the contact has no effect and  
places the program in HOLD mode.  
The setpoint is changed to what the setpoint  
was when the program was first started.  
restarts the Setpoint Program  
RUN  
HOLD  
Keyboard Reset  
until you see  
Upper Display  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
Lower Display  
ToBEGIN  
Press [▲] key to reset program to beginning  
at Hold state.  
Viewing the present  
ramp or soak  
segment number  
and time  
until you see  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
Upper Display  
“R” and the PV value  
Lower Display  
For Ramp segments:  
# RA XX.XX  
Ramp Time - Hours.Minutes or  
Ramp Rate - EU/MIN or EU/HR  
Indicates Ramp segment  
Segment Number (odd only)  
For Soak segments:  
# SK XX.XX  
Time remaining in segment in  
Hrs.Minutes including current  
partially completed minute  
Indicates Soak segment  
Segment Number (even only)  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function  
Press  
Result  
Viewing the number  
of cycles left in the  
program  
until you see  
Upper Display  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
“R” and the PV value  
Lower Display  
RECYC XX  
Remaining Cycles 0 to 99  
This number does not  
include the current partially  
completed cycle.  
End Program  
When the final segment is completed, the “R”  
in the upper display either changes to “H” if  
configured for HOLD state, or disappears if  
configured for disable of setpoint  
programming.  
The controller operates at the last setpoint in  
the program in automatic or will be in manual  
mode at the failsafe output.  
Power-up state  
The program will be placed in HOLD mode at the beginning of the  
program at the local setpoint value prior to the beginning of the program.  
216  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SP programming tips  
Table 6-4 gives procedures for restarting, advancing, and changing the  
current segment time or setpoint of a running setpoint program.  
Table 6-4  
Function  
Procedures for Changing a Running Setpoint Program  
Press  
Result/Action  
Restarting a running  
SP program  
to place SP PROG into HOLD mode.  
RUN  
HOLD  
until you see X RA XXX or X SK XX.XX in  
LOWER  
the lower display.  
DISPLAY  
until you see 1 RA XX.XX in the lower  
display.  
If the lower display already reads 1 RA  
XX.XX then press the [▲] key before  
pressing the [▲] key.  
to place SP PROG into RUN mode.  
RUN  
HOLD  
Advancing a running  
SP program  
to place SP PROG into HOLD mode.  
RUN  
HOLD  
until you see X RA XXX or X SK XX.XX in  
LOWER  
the lower display.  
DISPLAY  
to select the segment number to advance to.  
and  
together  
EXAMPLE: Change 2 SK XX.XX to 3 RA  
XX.XX.  
to place SP PROG into RUN mode.  
RUN  
HOLD  
Changing the  
current segment  
time or setpoint in a  
running SP program  
to place SP PROG into HOLD mode.  
RUN  
HOLD  
Enter SP PROG configuration and change  
the segment to the new time or setpoint  
desired.  
until you see X RA XXX or X SK XX.XX in  
LOWER  
the lower display.  
DISPLAY  
then  
to place SP PROG into RUN mode.  
RUN  
HOLD  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7 – Input Calibration  
7.1 Overview  
Introduction  
This section describes the field calibration procedures for Input 1 and  
Input 2. Every UDC 3300 controller contains all input actuation ranges  
fully factory calibrated and ready for configuration to range by the user.  
However, these procedures can be implemented if the factory calibration  
of the desired range is not within specifications.  
Note that the field calibration will be lost if a change in input type  
configuration is implemented at a later time. The original factory  
calibration data remains available for later use after a field calibration is  
done.  
What’s in this section  
This section contains the following topics:  
Topic  
See Page  
219  
7.1  
7.2  
7.3  
Overview  
Minimum and maximum range values  
220  
Preliminary Information  
• Disconnect the field wiring  
• Equipment needed  
221  
221  
222  
7.4  
Input 1, 2, or 3 Set Up Wiring  
223  
223  
224  
225  
226  
• Thermocouple inputs using an ice bath  
• Thermocouple inputs using a precision resistor  
• RTD (Resistance Thermometer Device) inputs  
• Radiamatic, Millivolts, or Volts except 0-10 Volts  
inputs  
• 0 to 10 Volts input  
• 4-20 Milliamps input  
227  
228  
7.5  
7.6  
Input 1, 2, or 3 Calibration Procedure  
Restoring Factory Calibration  
229  
231  
!
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD  
INPUT CALIBRATION MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO  
HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE  
PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-  
ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE CALIBRATION.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.2 Minimum and Maximum Range Values  
Select the range values  
You should calibrate the controller for the minimum (0 %) and maximum  
(100 %) range values of your particular sensor. If you have a two-input  
controller, calibrate each input separately.  
Select the Voltage or Resistance equivalent for 0 % and 100 % range  
values from Table 7-1. Use these value when calibrating your controller.  
Table 7-1  
Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0 % and 100 % Range Values  
PV Input Range  
Range Values  
Sensor Type  
° F  
° C  
0 %  
100 %  
Thermocouples  
0 to 3300  
–18 to 1816  
–0.100 mV  
13.769 mV  
B
E
-454 to 1832  
-200 to 1100  
0 to 1600  
20 to 770  
0 to 2400  
–20 to 1000  
32 to 2500  
32 to 1260  
32 to 2500  
32 to 1260  
0 to 2372  
0 to 3100  
0 to 3100  
-300 to 700  
-200 to 500  
0 to 4200  
0 to 2240  
–270 to1000  
–129 to593  
–18 to871  
–7 to410  
–9.835 mV  
–6.472 mV  
–0.886 mV  
–0.334 mV  
–0.692 mV  
–1.114 mV  
0.000 mV  
0.000 mV  
0.000 mV  
0.000 mV  
–0.461 mV  
–0.090 mV  
–0.092 mV  
–5.341 mV  
–4.149 mV  
–0.234 mV  
–0.234 mV  
76.373 mV  
44.455 mV  
50.060 mV  
22.400 mV  
52.952 mV  
22.255 mV  
71.330 mV  
31.820 mV  
71.773 mV  
31.825 mV  
47.513 mV  
20.281 mV  
17.998 mV  
19.097 mV  
12.574 mV  
37.075 mV  
22.283 mV  
E (low)  
J
J (low)  
K
K (low)  
–18 to1816  
–29 to538  
0 to1371  
NiNiMoly (NNM68)  
NiNiMoly (low)  
NiMo-NiCo (NM90)  
NiMo-NiCo (low)  
Nicrosil Nisil (Nic)  
R
0 to682  
0 to1371  
0 to682  
–18 to1300  
–18 to1704  
–18 to1704  
–184 to371  
–129 to260  
–18 to2315  
–18 to1227  
S
T
T (low)  
W5W26  
W5W26 (low)  
Honeywell Radiamatic  
0 to 3400  
–18 to1871  
0.00 mV  
0.00 mV  
57.12 mV  
60.08 mV  
Type RH  
Type RI*  
0 to 9999 max.  
–18 to 9999 max.  
RTD  
(IEC Alpha=0.00385)  
100 ohms  
100 ohms (low)  
200 ohms  
-300 to 1200  
-300 to 300  
-300 to 1200  
-300 to 1200  
–184 to649  
–184 to149  
–184 to649  
–184 to649  
25.18 ohms  
25.18 ohms  
50.36 ohms  
125.90 ohms  
329.13 ohms  
156.90 ohms  
658.26 ohms  
1645.65 ohms  
500 ohms  
Linear  
4 to 20 mA  
0 to 20 mA  
4.00 mA  
0.00 mA  
20.00 mA  
20.00 mA  
Milliamps  
Millivolts  
Volts  
0 to 10 mV  
0 to 50 mV  
0.00 mV  
0.00 mV  
10.00 mV  
50.00 mV  
1 to 5 Volts  
0 to 5 Volts  
0 to 10 Volts  
1.00 Volts  
0.00 Volts  
0.00 Volts  
5.00 Volts  
5.00 Volts  
10.00 Volts  
Carbon  
Oxygen  
0 to 1250 mV  
–30 to 510 mV  
0.00 mV  
1250 mV  
–30.00 mV  
510.00 mV  
*User must enter the range manually per RI type and application.  
ATTENTION  
Thermocouple voltages are for a reference junction temperature of 32 °F (0 °C).  
220  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.3 Preliminary Information  
Calibration steps  
Use the following steps when calibrating an input.  
Step  
1
Action  
Find the minimum and maximum range values for your PV input range from  
Table 7-1.  
2
3
4
Disconnect the field wiring and find out what equipment you will need to  
calibrate. DO NOT remove external resistor assemblies (if present).  
Wire the calibrating device to your controller according to the Set Up wiring  
instructions for your particular input.  
Follow the calibration procedure given for Input #1, Input #2, or Input #3,  
after the controller has warmed up for a minimum of 15 minutes.  
Disconnect the field  
wiring  
Depending on which input (#1, #2, or #3) you are going to calibrate, tag  
and disconnect any field wiring connected to the input terminals on the  
rear of the controller.  
Figure 7-1 shows the wiring terminal designations for Input #1, Input #2,  
and Input #3.  
Figure 7-1  
Inputs #1, #2, and #3 Wiring Terminals  
L1  
L2/N  
R
+
22  
+
–
R
Input 2  
connections  
Input 3  
connections  
23  
–
24  
25  
26  
27  
Input 1  
connections  
+
–
24173  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Equipment needed  
Table 7-2 lists the equipment you will need to calibrate the specific types  
of inputs that are listed in the table. You will need a screwdriver to  
connect these devices to your controller.  
Table 7-2  
Equipment Needed  
Equipment Needed  
Type of Input  
Thermocouple Inputs  
(Ice Bath)  
• A calibrating device with ± 0.02 % accuracy for use  
as a signal source such as a millivolt source.  
• Thermocouple extension wire that corresponds with  
the type of thermocouple that will be used with the  
controller input.  
• Two insulated copper leads for connecting the  
thermocouple extension wire from the ice baths to  
the precision calibrator.  
• Two containers of crushed ice.  
Thermocouple Inputs  
(Precision Resistor)  
• A calibrating device with ± 0.02 % accuracy for use  
as a signal source such as a millivolt source.  
• Two insulated copper leads for connecting the  
calibrator to the controller.  
• A precision 500 ohm resistor ± 0.1 % connected  
across input #1 terminals 25 (R) and 27 (–) or input  
#2 terminals 22 (R) and 24 (–).  
RTD (Resistance Thermometer • A decade box, with ± 0.02 % accuracy, capable of  
Device)  
providing stepped resistance values over a  
minimum range of 0 to 1400 ohms with a resolution  
of 0.1 ohm.  
• Three insulated copper leads for connecting the  
decade box to the controller.  
Milliampere, Millivolt, Volts, and • A calibrating device with ± 0.02 % accuracy for use  
Radiamatic  
as a signal source.  
• Two insulated copper leads for connecting the  
calibrator to the controller.  
• Place current source at zero before switching ON.  
• Do not switch current sources OFF/ON while  
connected to the UDC 3300 input.  
222  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.4 Input #1, #2, or #3 Set Up Wiring  
Thermocouple inputs  
using an ice bath  
Referring to Figure 7-2, wire the controller according to the procedure  
given in Table 7-3.  
Table 7-3  
Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using an  
Ice Bath  
Step  
Action  
1
2
Connect the copper leads to the calibrator.  
Connect a length of thermocouple extension wire to the end of each copper  
lead and insert the junction points into the ice bath.  
3
4
Connect the thermocouple extension wires to the terminals for Input #1 or  
Input #2. See Figure 7-2.  
Connect a cold junction resistor to terminals 25 and 27 for Input #1 or  
terminals 22 and 24 for Input #2. See Figure 7-2.  
Figure 7-2  
Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs  
Using an Ice Bath  
10  
11  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
L1  
L2/N 12  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
+
–
Input 2  
+
–
Input 1  
T/C Extension Wire  
C/J Resistor  
+
–
Millivolt  
Source  
Copper Leads  
Ice Bath  
24174  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thermocouple inputs  
using a precision  
resistor  
Referring to Figure 7-3, wire the controller according to the procedure  
given in Table 7-4.  
Table 7-4  
Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs  
Using a Precision Resistor  
Step  
Action  
1
2
3
Connect the copper leads to the calibrator.  
Disconnect the cold junction resistor.  
Install a 500-ohm precision resistor across Input 1 terminals 25 (R) and  
27 (–) or Input 2 terminals 22 (R) and 24 (–). See Figure 7-3.  
4
Subtract the millivolt value for 77 °F (25 °C) from the zero and span value for  
your range (see Table 7-1 for zero and span values) and use the adjusted  
value when calibrating.  
Figure 7-3  
Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs  
Using a Precision Resistor  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
L1  
L2/N  
R
+
–
R
+
–
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
Input 2  
Input 1  
1
Precision 500 Ohm Resistor  
Millivolt  
Copper Leads  
–
Source  
+
1
Caution: The accuracy of the controller is directly affected by the  
accuracy of this resistor. At a minimum, use a 0.1%, 25ppm resistor.  
24175  
224  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RTD inputs  
Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of  
Input #1 or #2. See Figure 7-4.  
Figure 7-4  
Wiring Connections for RTD  
10  
11  
1
L1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
L2/N 12  
R
+
–
R
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Input 2  
Input 1  
+
–
Decade  
Resistance  
Box  
Copper Leads  
equal length  
24176  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radiamatic, millivolts,  
or volts (except 0 to 10  
volts) inputs  
Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of  
Input #1, #2, or #3. See Figure 7-5.  
Figure 7-5  
Wiring Connections for Radiamatic, Millivolts, or Volts  
(except 0 to 10 Volts)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
L1  
L2/N  
22  
Input 3*  
(0-5, 1-5  
volts only)  
+
+
–
23  
Input 2*  
24  
25  
+
–
26  
Input 1  
27  
–
+
Millivolt/Volt  
Source  
24177  
Copper Leads  
*Terminals for Input 3 are 22 (+) and 24 (–).  
Terminals for Input 2 are 23 (+) and 24 (–).  
226  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0 to 10 volt inputs  
Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of  
Input #1 or #2. See Figure 7-6.  
Figure 7-6  
Wiring Connections for 0 to 10 Volt Inputs  
10  
11  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
L1  
L2/N 12  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
100K  
Input 2  
Input 1  
100K  
100K  
100K  
–
+
0 to 10  
Volt  
Source  
24178  
Copper Leads  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 to 20 mA inputs  
Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of  
Input #1, #2, or #3. See Figure 7-7.  
Figure 7-7  
Wiring Connections for 4 to 20 mA inputs  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
L1  
L2/N  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
+
–
Input 2  
250Ω  
resistor  
assy  
+
–
Input 1  
Copper Leads  
–
+
4 to 20 mA  
Source  
Input 3—Wire terminals as shown below.  
+
22  
250 ohm  
23  
–
24  
–
+
4 to 20 mA  
Source  
24179  
228  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.5 Input #1, #2, or #3 Calibration Procedure  
Introduction  
Apply power and allow the controller to warm up for 15 minutes before  
you calibrate. Read “Set Up Wiring” before beginning the procedure.  
Make sure you have LOCKOUT set to NONE. See Section 3 –  
Configuration.  
CAUTION  
For linear inputs, avoid step changes in inputs. Vary smoothly  
from initial value to final 100 % value.  
Procedure  
The Calibration procedure for Input #1, #2, or #3 is listed in Table 7-5.  
Table 7-5  
Input #1, #2, or #3 Calibration Procedure  
Step  
1
Description  
Enter Calibration Mode  
Press  
Action  
until you see  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
CALIB  
Lower Display  
INPUT n  
n = 1, 2, or 3  
You will see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
DISABL  
Lower Display  
CAL IN n  
n = 1, 2, or 3  
The calibration sequence is enabled and you will see:  
Upper Display  
or  
BEGIN  
Lower Display  
CAL IN n  
n = 1, 2, or 3  
At the completion of the sequence, the selection  
automatically reverts to disable.  
2
Calibrate 0 %  
You will see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
APPLY  
Lower Display  
INn ZERO  
n = 1, 2, or 3  
Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to  
the 0 % range value for your particular input sensor. See  
Table 7-1 for Voltage or Resistance equivalents.  
Wait 15 seconds, then go to the next step.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step  
3
Description  
Calibrate 100 %  
Press  
Action  
You will see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
APPLY  
Lower Display  
INn SPAN  
n = 1, 2, or 3  
Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to  
the 100 % range value for your particular input sensor.  
See Table 7-1 for Voltage or Resistance equivalents.  
Wait 15 seconds, and  
If…  
Then…  
you are calibrating a  
thermocouple input  
(Input 1 or 2)  
Go to step 4  
you are calibrating other  
than a thermocouple input  
Go to step 5  
4
Check the Cold Junction  
Temperature  
The calculations for zero and span are now stored and  
you will see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
The cold junction  
temperature at the  
rear terminals  
CAUTION  
The  
accuracy of the controller  
is directly affected by the  
accuracy of this value.  
Change this value only if  
the zero and span  
calibration procedures did  
not bring the controller  
within the specified  
Lower Display  
C-J TEMP  
The value in the upper display is in the tenths of a degree.  
It is the current reading of the temperature as measured at  
the thermocouple terminals and recognized by the  
controller. You can change this value, if it is in error, using  
or  
accuracy requirements.  
the  
key.  
ATTENTION  
When calibrating T/C inputs using a  
precision 500-ohm resistor, calibrate the cold junction as  
77°F (25°C).  
5
Exit the Calibration Mode  
The controller will store the calibration constants and exit  
calibration mode.  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
230  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.6 Restoring Factory Calibration  
How to restore it  
The factory calibration constants for all the input actuation types that can  
be used with the controller are stored in its nonvolatile memory. Thus,  
you can quickly restore the “Factory Calibration” for a given input  
actuation type by simply changing the actuation type to another type and  
then changing it back to the original type. See Table 7-6 for the procedure.  
Procedure  
Table 7-6 lists the procedure for restoring factory calibration.  
Table 7-6  
Operation  
Restoring Factory Calibration  
Press Action/Result  
Step  
1
Set LOCKOUT  
to CALIB or  
NONE  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SET  
UP  
Lower Display  
TUNING  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
One of the following  
NONE  
CALIB  
+CONF  
+VIEW  
MAX  
Lower Display  
LOCKOUT  
Until CALIB or NONE is in the upper display.  
or  
2
Enter  
INPUT 1 or 2  
Setup Group  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
SET  
UP  
Lower Display  
INPUTn  
n = 1, 2, or 3  
until you see:  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
Upper Display  
Current Selection  
Lower Display  
IN nTYPE  
n = 1, 2, or 3  
to change the current selection to another  
selection.  
or  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step  
Operation  
Press  
Action/Result  
until the lower display rolls through the rest  
of the functions and returns to  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
Upper Display  
New Selection  
Lower Display  
IN nTYPE  
n = 1, 2, or 3  
until you change the input selection in the  
upper display back to the proper selection.  
You will see:  
or  
Upper Display  
Original input  
selection that  
matches your  
type of sensor.  
Lower Display  
IN nTYPE  
n = 1, 2, or 3  
3
Return to  
to return to Normal operating mode.  
LOWER  
normal  
operating mode  
DISPLAY  
The factory calibration will be restored. If the  
problem is not corrected, contact the  
Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.  
1-800-423-9883 USA and Canada  
CAUTION  
A restored factory calibration overwrites any previous field calibration  
done for the input and may change the High and Low Range Limits. Be  
sure to protect any field calibration from accidental overwrites by  
configuring the appropriate LOCKOUT selection after calibration. See the  
Section 3 - Configuration for specific instructions to set the lockout.  
232  
UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8 – Output Calibration  
8.1 Overview  
Introduction  
This section describes the field calibration procedures for the following  
types of outputs:  
• Current Output  
• Position Proportional and 3 Position Step Output  
• Auxiliary Output  
What’s in this section  
This section contains the following topics:  
Topic  
See Page  
8.1  
8.2  
Overview  
233  
Current Proportional Output Calibration  
• Introduction  
234  
234  
234  
234  
235  
• Equipment Needed  
• How to Connect the Calibrator  
• Calibration Procedure  
8.3  
8.4  
Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output  
Calibration  
236  
• Position Proportional Control  
• 3 Position Step Control  
• Equipment Needed  
• What connection to make  
• Calibration Procedure  
236  
236  
236  
236  
237  
Auxiliary Output Calibration  
• Introduction  
240  
240  
240  
240  
241  
• Equipment Needed  
• How to Connect the Calibrator  
• Calibration Procedure  
!
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD  
OUTPUT CALIBRATION MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO  
HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE  
PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-  
ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE CALIBRATION.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.2 Current Proportional Output Calibration  
Introduction  
Calibrate the controller so that the output provides the proper amount of  
current over the desired range. The controller can provide an output  
current range of from 0 to 21 milliamperes and can be calibrated at 4 mA  
for 0 % of output and 20 mA for 100 % of output or any other values  
between 0 mA and 21 mA.  
Equipment needed  
You will need a standard shop type milliammeter, with whatever accuracy  
is required, capable of measuring 0 to 20 milliamps.  
Calibrator connections  
Referring to Figure 8-1, wire the controller according to the procedure  
given in Table 8-1.  
Table 8-1  
Step  
Set Up Wiring Procedure Current Proportional Output  
Action  
1
2
3
Apply power and allow the controller to warm up 15 minutes before you  
calibrate.  
Tag and disconnect the field wiring, at the rear of the controller, from  
terminals 2 (+) and 3 (–). See Figure 8-1.  
Connect a milliammeter across these terminals.  
Figure 8-1  
Wiring Connections for Calibrating Current Proportional Output  
Milliammeter  
+
–
10  
11  
L2/N 12  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+
–
L1  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
22635  
234  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure  
The procedure for calibrating the Current Proportional Output is listed in  
Table 8-2. Make sure LOCKOUT in the Tuning Set Up group is set to  
NONE. See Section 3 – Configuration.  
Table 8-2  
Current Proportional Output Calibration Procedure  
Step  
1
Description  
Press  
Action  
Enter Calibration Mode  
until you see  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
CALIB  
Lower Display  
CURRENT  
2
3
4
Calibrate 0 %  
You will see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
a value between 1 and 2048  
Lower Display  
ZERO VAL  
until the desired 0 % output is read on the milliammeter.  
Use the values shown below depending on the action of  
your valve.  
or  
0 mA  
20 mA For 0 to 20 mA Reverse Action  
4 mA For 4 to 20 mA Direct Action  
For 0 to 20 mA Direct Action*  
20 mA For 4 to 20 mA Reverse Action  
Calibrate 100 %  
This stores the 0 % value and you will see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
a value between 1 and 2048  
Lower Display  
SPAN VAL  
until the desired 100 % output is read on the milliammeter.  
Use the values shown below depending on the action of  
your valve.  
or  
20 mA For 0 to 20 mA Direct Action  
0 mA  
20 mA For 4 to 20 mA Direct Action  
4 mA For 4 to 20 mA Reverse Action  
For 0 to 20 mA Reverse Action*  
Exit the Calibration Mode  
The controller will store the span value.  
To exit the calibration mode.  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
or  
SET UP  
*When attempting to achieve 0 mA, always adjust the output to about 0.5 mA, and slowly decrease until the  
output just goes to zero. Further decrementing will not change the output current (since the circuit cannot  
produce negative current) but will affect the accuracy of the output by creating a dead zone where no  
current flows.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.3 Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output Calibration  
Position proportional  
control  
When the UDC 3300 controller has a Position Proportional control output,  
calibrate the controller so that the increase and decrease relays operate  
properly with respect to the position of the external feedback slidewire.  
Three position step  
control  
Three Position Step Control Output Models with Motor Position  
Indication  
(Model Numbers DC330X-EE-XXX-X2, DC330X-AA-XXX-02)  
This model must have its output calibrated per the entire procedure to  
ensure the displayed output (slidewire position) agrees with the final  
control element position.  
Three Position Step Control Output Models without Motor Position  
Indication  
(Model Numbers 330X-EE-XXX-X0, DC330X-AA-XXX-X0)  
This model only requires that the “Motor Time” be entered as shown in  
the calibration procedure. FULL CALIBRATION IS NOT REQUIRED.  
Equipment needed  
None  
Connections  
Apply power and allow the controller to warm up 30 minutes before you  
calibrate. Leave all field wiring connected to the rear terminals.  
Auto mode vs manual  
mode  
There are two ways in which to calibrate Position Proportional or 3  
Position Step control:  
AUTO mode or MANUAL mode.  
Rules for auto mode vs  
manual mode  
The Auto-mode selection must be done at least once before the manual  
mode will operate properly. Failure to use the Auto-mode procedure will  
prevent the controller from going into automatic control mode.  
Displayed values  
During the Auto-mode calibration procedure, the values being displayed  
are used only to indicate if the motor is still traveling. To view the actual  
calibration value, use the manual mode after the Auto-mode is completed.  
These values can be changed for purposes of tweaking the calibration.  
236  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure  
The procedure for calibrating the Position Proportional output and  
3 Position Step control output is listed in Table 8-3. Make sure  
LOCKOUT in Tuning Set Up group is set to NONE. See Section 3 –  
Configuration.  
For Three Position Step Control Output models without Motor Position  
Indication, do steps 1 and 2 only.  
For Position Proportional Output and Three Position Step Control Output  
models with Motor Position Indication, follow the entire calibration  
procedure.  
ATTENTION  
These prompts only appear when position OUT ALG is  
selected. If motor position for 3PSTEP is desired, first configure unit for  
“position.” After calibration the unit can be switched to 3PSTEP.  
Table 8-3  
Position Proportional and 3 Position Step Output Calibration Procedure  
Step  
1
Description  
Press  
Action  
Enter Calibration Mode  
until you see  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
CALIB  
Lower Display  
POS PROP  
2
Set Motor Traverse Time  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
NOTE: This is the time it  
takes the motor to travel  
from 0 % to 100 %.  
a value  
Lower Display  
MTR TIME  
until the proper motor stroke time is reached (see the  
motor specs or measure the time)  
or  
Range of setting = 5 to 1800 Seconds  
3
Select Automatic or  
Manual Calibration  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
DISABLE  
Lower Display  
POS PROP  
You can calibrate the controller output manually or let the  
controller calibrate the output automatically.  
If the slidewire has never been calibrated, you must use  
DO AUTO first. In the “Automatic Calibration Mode” (DO  
AUTO), the controller relays automatically move the motor  
in the proper direction.  
If desired, however, the motor may be manually positioned  
to 0 % and 100 % positions. Disconnect the relay wires.  
Use DO MAN. In the “Manual Calibration Mode” (DO  
MAN), the motor does not move. Instead, the existing 0 %  
and 100 % values may be changed with the ▲ or ▲ key.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step  
Description  
Press  
Action  
to select automatic or manual calibration.  
Upper Display  
or  
DO AUTO  
or  
Lower Display  
DO MAN  
POS PROP  
If you select…  
DO AUTO  
Then…  
go to Step 4  
go to Step 6  
DO MAN  
ATTENTION  
When calibration is terminated, this  
selection reverts to DISABL.  
4
5
6
DO AUTO  
Set 0 % value  
The decrement relay is turned on to move the motor to  
0 % position.  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
counts of feedback  
slidewire (0 to 3000)  
Lower Display  
ZERO VAL  
When the motor stops, the display should stop counting,  
then go to the next step.  
DO AUTO  
Set 100 % value  
The increment relay is turned on to move the motor to  
100 % position.  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
Upper Display  
counts of feedback  
slidewire (0 to 3000)  
Lower Display  
SPAN VAL  
When the motor stops, the display should stop counting,  
then, go to Step 8.  
DO MAN  
Set 0 % value  
You will see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
The existing zero  
calibration value  
in counts.  
Lower Display  
ZERO VAL  
until the desired zero value is reached in the upper  
display.  
or  
Upper Display  
The desired zero  
value  
Lower Display  
ZERO VAL  
7
DO MAN  
Set 100 % value  
The controller will store the 0 % value and you will see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
The existing span  
calibration value  
in counts  
Lower Display  
SPAN VAL  
238  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step  
Description  
Press  
Action  
until the desired span value is reached in the upper  
display.  
or  
Upper Display  
The desired span  
value  
Lower Display  
SPAN VAL  
For manual calibration, the motor does not move from its  
position prior to the start of Position Proportional  
calibration.  
8
Exit the Calibration Mode  
The controller will store the 100 % value.  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
To exit the calibration mode.  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
or  
SET UP  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8.4 Auxiliary Output Calibration  
Introduction  
Calibrate the controller so that the Auxiliary output provides the proper  
amount of current over the desired range. The controller can provide an  
auxiliary output current range of from 0 to 21 milliamperes and can be  
calibrated at 4 mA for 0 % of output and 20 mA for 100 % of output or  
any other values between 0 mA and 21 mA.  
Equipment needed  
You will need a standard shop type milliammeter with whatever accuracy  
is required, capable of measuring 0 to 20 milliamps.  
Calibrator connections  
Referring to Figure 8-2, wire the controller according to the procedure  
given in Table 8-4.  
Table 8-4  
Set Up Wiring Procedure for Auxiliary Output  
Action  
Step  
1
Apply power and allow the controller to warm up 30 minutes before you  
calibrate.  
2
3
Tag and disconnect the field wiring, at the rear of the controller, from  
terminals 16 (+) and 17 (–). See Figure 8-2.  
Connect a milliammeter across these terminals.  
Figure 8-2  
Wiring Connections for Calibrating Auxiliary Output  
Milliammeter  
+
–
10  
11  
L2/N 12  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
L1  
22  
23  
24  
25  
13  
14  
15  
16  
+
26 –17  
27  
22636  
240  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure  
The procedure for calibrating the Auxiliary Output is listed in Table 8-5.  
Make sure LOCKOUT in the Tuning Set Up group is set to NONE. See  
Section 3 – Configuration.  
Table 8-5  
Description  
Enter Calibration Mode  
Auxiliary Output Calibration Procedure  
Step  
1
Press  
Action  
until you see  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
CALIB  
Lower Display  
AUX OUT  
2
3
4
Calibrate 0 %  
You will see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
a value between 0 and 4095  
Lower Display  
ZERO VAL  
until the desired 0 % output is read on the milliammeter.  
Use the values shown below depending on the action of  
your valve.  
or  
0 mA  
20 mA For 0 to 20 mA Reverse Action  
4 mA For 4 to 20 mA Direct Action  
For 0 to 20 mA Direct Action *  
20 mA For 4 to 20 mA Reverse Action  
Calibrate 100 %  
This stores the 0 % value and you will see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
a value  
Lower Display  
SPAN VAL  
until the desired 100 % output is read on the milliammeter.  
Use the values shown below depending on the action of  
your valve.  
or  
20 mA For 0 to 20 mA Direct Action  
0 mA  
20 mA For 4 to 20 mA Direct Action  
4 mA For 4 to 20 mA Reverse Action  
For 0 to 20 mA Reverse Action*  
Exit the Calibration Mode  
The controller will store the span value.  
To exit the calibration mode.  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
LOWER  
DISPLAY  
or  
SET UP  
*When attempting to achieve 0 mA, always adjust the output to about 0.5 mA, and slowly decrease until the output just  
goes to zero. Further decrementing will not change the output current (since the circuit cannot produce negative  
current) but will affect the accuracy of the output by creating a dead zone where no current flows.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
242  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 9 – Troubleshooting / Service  
9.1 Overview  
Introduction  
Instrument performance can be adversely affected by installation and  
application problems as well as hardware problems. We recommend that  
you investigate the problems in the following order:  
• installation related problems  
• application related problems  
• hardware and software related problems  
and use the information presented in this section to solve them. If a  
replacement of any part is required, follow the procedures listed under  
“Parts Replacement Procedures.”  
What’s in this section?  
The following topics are covered in this section.  
Topic  
See Page  
9.1  
9.2  
Overview  
243  
Troubleshooting Aids  
• Overall Error Messages  
• Controller Failure Symptoms  
• Customer Support  
• Determining the Software Version Number  
245  
245  
246  
246  
246  
9.3  
9.4  
9.5  
9.6  
9.7  
Power-up Tests  
247  
248  
250  
252  
Status Tests  
Background Tests  
Controller Failure Symptoms  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
• Power Failure  
253  
253  
254  
255  
256  
257  
258  
259  
260  
• Current Proportional Output Failure  
• Position Proportional Output Failure  
• Time Proportional Output Failure  
• Time/Current - Current/Time Proportional Output Failure  
• Alarm Relay Output Failure  
• Keyboard Failure  
• Communications Failure  
9.8  
Parts Replacement Procedures  
• How to remove the chassis  
261  
262  
263  
264  
265  
266  
266  
267  
268  
269  
• How to replace the display/keyboard assembly  
• How to remove printed wiring boards from the chassis  
• Printed wiring board identification  
• 2nd input board replacement procedure  
• Power input board replacement procedure  
• Digital input board replacement procedure  
• Aux. output/commun. board replacement procedure  
• MCU/output board replacement procedure  
9.9  
Maintenance  
270  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation related  
problems  
Read the Installation section in this manual to make sure the UDC 3300  
has been properly installed. The installation section provides information  
on protection against electrical noise, connecting external equipment to  
the controller, and shielding and routing external wiring.  
ATTENTION  
System noise induced into the controller will result in  
diagnostic error messages recurring. If the diagnostic error messages can  
be cleared, it indicates a “soft” failure and is probably noise related.  
If system noise is suspected, completely isolate the controller from all  
field wiring. Use calibration sources to simulate PV and check all  
controller functions; i.e. Gain, Rate, Reset, Output, Alarms, etc.  
Application related  
problems  
Review the application of the controller; then, if necessary, direct your  
questions to the local sales office.  
Hardware and software  
related problems  
Use the troubleshooting error message prompts and controller failure  
symptoms to identify typical failures which may occur in the controller.  
Follow the troubleshooting procedures to correct them.  
244  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.2 Troubleshooting Aids  
Overall error messages  
An error message can occur  
• at power-up,  
• during continuous background tests while in normal operation,  
• when the Status Tests are requested.  
Table 9-1 lists all the error message prompts that you could see, the reason  
for the failure, and under what test group the prompt could appear. Refer  
to Tables 9-3 (Power-up), 9-5 (Status), and 9-6 (Background) for the  
particular test group indicated.  
Table 9-1  
Error Message Prompts  
Test Group  
Error Message  
(lower display)  
Reason for Failure  
Auto calibration never performed.  
Calibration test failure  
Refer to Table  
CAL MTR  
CAL TEST  
CONF ERR  
CONFTEST  
Power-up and  
Background  
9-3  
9-6  
Power-up or Status  
9-3  
9-5  
Low limit greater than high limit for PV, SP,  
Reset, or Output  
Background  
9-6  
Configuration test failure  
Power-up or Status  
9-3  
9-5  
E E FAIL  
Unable to write to nonvolatile memory  
Factory Calibration Cyclic Redundancy  
Controller in Failsafe  
Background  
Status  
9-6  
9-5  
FACT CRC  
FAILSAFE  
or  
FAILSF2 (Loop 2)  
Power-up, Background,  
or Status  
9-3  
9-5  
9-6  
INP1FAIL  
INP2FAIL  
INP3FAIL  
INP1 RNG  
INP2 RNG  
INP3 RNG  
PV LIMIT  
Two consecutive failures of Input 1 integration  
Two consecutive failures of Input 2 integration  
Two consecutive failures of Input 3 integration  
Input 1 out of range  
Background  
Background  
Background  
Background  
Background  
Background  
Background  
Power-up or Status  
9-6  
9-6  
9-6  
9-6  
9-6  
9-6  
9-6  
Input 2 out of range  
Input 3 out of range  
PV out of range  
RAM TEST  
RAM test failed  
9-3  
9-5  
RV LIMIT  
SEG ERR  
SOOTING  
SW FAIL  
Remote Variable out of range  
Background  
Background  
Background  
Background  
9-6  
9-6  
9-6  
9-6  
Start segment greater than ending segment  
Percent Carbon falls outside sooting boundary  
Position Proportional slidewire input failure  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controller failure  
symptoms  
Other failures may occur that deal with the Power, Output, or Alarms.  
Refer to the controller failure symptom in Table 9-7 to determine what is  
wrong and the troubleshooting procedures to use to correct the problem.  
Check Installation  
Customer support  
If a set of symptoms still persists, refer to Section 2 - Installation and  
ensure proper installation and proper use of the controller in the system.  
If you cannot solve the problem using the troubleshooting procedures  
listed in this section, you can get technical assistance by contacting us.  
Refer to the contact information in the front of this manual. An engineer  
will discuss your problem with you. Please have your complete model  
number, serial number, and Software version available. The model  
and serial numbers can be found on the chassis nameplate. The software  
version can be viewed under Setup Group “Status.” See Table 9-2.  
Determining the  
software version  
Table 9-2 lists the procedure for identifying the software version number.  
Table 9-2  
Procedure for Identifying the Software Version  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Action  
Select  
STATUS  
Set Up Group  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
READ  
Lower Display  
STATUS  
2
Read the  
software version  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
Software  
version  
Number  
Lower Display  
VERSION  
Please give this number to the Customer  
Support person. It will indicate which version  
of UDC 3300 you have and help them  
determine a solution to your problem.  
246  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.3 Power-up Tests  
What happens at  
power-up  
When the controller is powered-up, three tests are run by the UDC 3300  
software to ensure memory integrity. As the tests are run, the displays will  
appear as shown in Table 9-3.  
Table 9-3  
Power-up Tests  
Upper Display  
Lower Display  
RAM TEST  
CONFTEST  
CAL TEST  
PASS or FAIL  
PASS or FAIL  
PASS or FAIL  
Test failures  
If any of these three tests fail, FAIL will appear momentarily in the upper  
display, then a display test is run, after which the controller will go into  
manual mode and you will see:  
Upper Display  
PV value  
Lower Display  
FAILSAFE  
(blinking)  
Refer to “Status Tests” to determine which tests have failed and how to  
correct them.  
Position proportional  
or 3 position step test  
failures  
For controller configured for Position Proportional or 3 Position Step  
control with motor position indication and Auto-cal has never been done,  
a prompt CAL MTR will appear suggesting that the controller be  
calibrated.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.4 Status Tests  
Introduction  
When required, the results of these tests can be checked to determine the  
reason the controller has gone to Failsafe.  
How to check the  
status tests  
The procedure in Table 9-4 tells you how to display the results of the  
status tests. Table 9-5 lists the tests, the reason for the failure, and how to  
correct the problem.  
Table 9-4  
Procedure for Displaying the Status Tests Results  
Step Operation  
Press  
Action  
1
2
Select  
STATUS  
Set Up Group  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
READ  
Lower Display  
STATUS  
Read the status  
tests results  
until you see:  
Upper Display  
FUNCTION  
LOOP 1/2  
NO orYES  
YES indicates  
a failure  
Lower Display  
FAILSAFE  
Successive presses of the [FUNCTION] key  
will display the results of the status tests in  
the following order:  
RAM TEST  
CONF TEST  
CAL TEST  
FACT CRC  
Identify the problem and correct the failure  
as shown in Table 9-5.  
248  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Tests  
Table 9-5 lists the Status tests, the reason for their failure, and how to  
correct the failure.  
Table 9-5  
Status Tests  
Test  
Definition  
Upper  
Reason for Failure  
How to Correct the Failure  
(Lower  
Display)  
Display  
FAILSAFE  
Failsafe Fault  
NO  
No Failure  
Burnout configured for none 1. Step through the rest of the STATUS  
FAILSF2  
(Loop 2)  
YES  
and input fails.  
check to identify the particular failure.  
–RAM TEST failed  
–CONFTEST failed  
–CALTEST failed  
Also see Table 9-6, Background tests  
RAM TEST RAM test run at PASS  
No Failure  
RAM Failure  
No Failure  
RAM test passed.  
power-up  
FAIL  
1. Power cycle to see if the error clears.  
Configuration checksum passed.  
CONF  
TEST  
Configuration  
Checksum  
PASS  
FAIL  
Configuration data is in  
error.  
1. Step through STATUS tests – the  
controller will recalculate the  
checksum.  
2. Check all configuration prompts for  
accuracy. See Section 3 -  
Configuration  
CAL TEST  
Working  
Calibration  
PASS  
FAIL  
No Failure  
Working calibration checksum passed.  
The working calibration  
constants in the controller  
are in error.  
1. If the controller has not been field  
calibrated, see Section 3 -  
Configuration and change the input to  
a different type. Enter it, loop through  
the status tests, then return the input  
type to the original one.  
2. If the controller has been field  
calibrated, recalibrate the controller.  
FACT CRC  
Factory  
calibration test  
PASS  
FAIL  
No Failure  
Factory calibration cyclic redundancy test  
passed  
Factory set input constants  
have been changed due to  
the change in input type.  
1. Cycle through Status to clear the error.  
2. Check the calibration. Make sure 0 %  
and 100 % are correct values.  
3. Recalibrate if step 1 is unsatisfactory.  
Refer to Section 7 - Input Calibration.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.5 Background Tests  
Introduction  
The UDC 3300 performs on-going background tests to verify data and  
memory integrity. If there is a malfunction, an error message will be  
displayed (blinking) in the lower display.  
Background tests  
In the case of more than one simultaneous malfunction, only the one with  
the highest priority will appear in the lower display. Table 9-6 lists these  
background tests, the reason for their failure, and how to correct the  
problem.  
Table 9-6  
Background Tests  
How to Correct the Problem  
Lower  
Display  
Reason for Failure  
EE FAIL  
Unable to write to non-volatile memory.  
Anytime you change a parameter and it is  
not accepted, you will see EE FAIL.  
1. Check the accuracy of the parameter and re-enter.  
2. Try to change something in configuration.  
3. Run through STATUS tests to re-write to  
EEPROM.  
FAILSAFE  
or  
FAILSF2  
(Loop 2)  
This error message shows whenever the  
controller goes into a failsafe mode of  
operation. This will happen if:  
• RAM test failed  
1. Run through STATUS check to determine the  
reason for the failure.  
2. Press the SET UP key until STATUS appears in  
the lower display.  
• Configuration test failed  
• Calibration test failed  
• Burnout configured for none and  
the input failed.  
3. Press the FUNCTION key to see what tests  
pass or fail, then run through the STATUS codes a  
second time to see if the error cleared.  
Correct according to the recommendations given  
in Table 9-5.  
INP1FAIL  
Two consecutive failures of input 1  
integration. i.e., cannot make analog to  
digital conversion. This will happen if:  
• Upscale or Downscale burnout is  
selected  
1. Make sure the actuation is configured correctly.  
See Section 3 - Configuration.  
2. Make sure the input is correct.  
3. Check for gross over-ranging.  
4. Replace factory calibration. See Section 7.6.  
5. Replace the cold junction assembly.  
• Input not configured correctly  
INP2FAIL  
INP3FAIL  
SW FAIL  
Two consecutive failures of input 2  
integration. i.e., cannot make analog to  
digital conversion.  
Same as INP1FAIL above.  
Two consecutive failures of input 3  
integration, i.e., cannot make analog to  
digital conversion.  
Same as INP1FAIL above.  
Position Proportional input slidewire failure 1. Check motor slidewire connections.  
2. Recalibrate the slidewire motor position. see the  
calibration section (Section 8.3).  
CAL MTR  
Position Proportional or 3 Position Step  
Control with Motor Position Indication,  
Auto Cal never performed.  
1. Calibrate the controller for Position Proportional  
output. Refer to Subsection 8.3 – Position  
Proportional and 3 Position Step Output  
Calibration.  
CONF ERR  
• PV low limit is > PV high limit  
• SP low limit is > SP high limit  
• Output low limit > Output high limit  
1. Check the configuration for each item and  
reconfigure if necessary.  
250  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower  
Reason for Failure  
How to Correct the Problem  
Display  
INP1 RNG  
Input 1 out of range. The process input is  
outside the range limits.  
1. Make sure the range and actuation are configured  
properly.  
2. Check the input source.  
3. Restore the factory calibration. (See Section 7.6.)  
4. Field calibrate. See Section 7 - Input Calibration.  
Same as INP1 RNG above.  
INP2 RNG  
INP3 RNG  
PV LIMIT  
Input 2 out of range. The remote input is  
outside the range limits.  
Input 3 out of range. The remote input is  
outside the range limits.  
Same as INP1 RNG above.  
PV out of range.  
PV = INP1 + INP1 BIAS  
1. Make sure the input signal is correct.  
2. Make sure the Bias setting is correct  
3. Recheck the calibration. Use Bias of 0.0  
1. Make sure the input signal is correct.  
2. Make sure the Ratio and Bias settings are correct.  
RV LIMIT  
The result of the formula shown below is  
beyond the range of the remote variable.  
RV = INP2 X RATIO + BIAS  
3. Recheck the calibration. Use a Ratio of 1.0 and a  
Bias of 0.0.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.6 Controller Failure Symptoms  
Introduction  
In addition to the error message prompts, there are failure symptoms that  
can be identified by noting how the controller displays and indicators are  
reacting.  
Symptoms  
Compare your symptoms with those shown in Table 9-7 and refer to the  
troubleshooting procedure indicated to correct the problem.  
Table 9-7  
Controller Failure Symptoms  
Upper  
Display  
Lower Indicators  
Display  
Controller  
Output  
Probable  
Cause  
Trouble-  
shooting  
Procedure  
Blank  
OK  
Blank  
Off  
OK  
None  
Power Failure  
1
2
Current  
Proportional  
Output  
OK  
OK  
Position  
Proportional  
Output  
3
Displayed  
Output  
disagrees  
with Controller  
Output  
Controller  
Output  
disagrees  
with Displayed  
Output  
OK  
OK  
OK  
OK  
Time Proportional  
Output  
4
5
Current/Time  
Proportional  
Output  
OK  
OK  
OK  
External Alarm  
function does  
not operate  
properly  
Malfunction in  
alarm output  
6
Display does not function when a key is pressed  
Keyboard  
Malfunction  
7
8
Controller fails to go into “Slave” operation during communications  
Communications  
Failure  
Other symptoms  
If a set of symptoms or prompts other than the one you started with  
appears while troubleshooting, re-evaluate the symptoms. This may lead  
to a different troubleshooting procedure.  
If the symptom still persists, refer to the installation section in this manual  
to ensure proper installation and proper use of the controller in your  
system.  
252  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.7 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Introduction  
The troubleshooting procedures are listed in numerical order as they  
appear in Table 9-7. Each procedure lists what to do if you have that  
particular failure and how to do it or where to find the data needed to  
accomplish the task.  
!
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD  
TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO  
HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE  
PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. MORE  
THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE  
UNIT BEFORE SERVICING.  
Equipment needed  
You will need the following equipment in order to troubleshoot the  
symptoms listed in the tables that follow:  
• DC Milliammeter – mAdc  
• Calibration sources – T/C, mV, Volt, etc.  
• Voltmeter  
Procedure #1  
Table 9-8 explains how to troubleshoot power failure symptoms.  
Table 9-8  
Troubleshooting Power Failure Symptoms  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Check the AC line voltage.  
Use a voltmeter to measure the AC  
voltage across terminals L1 and L2 on  
the rear terminal panel of the  
controller.  
Check the earth ground connection.  
2
3
Make sure the chassis plugs into  
the rear of the case properly.  
Withdraw the chassis and visually  
inspect the controller board and the  
inside of the case.  
Check the system for Brown-outs,  
heavy load switching, etc., and  
conformance to installation  
instructions.  
Refer to Section 2 - Installation.  
4
5
Change PS/Input board.  
Refer to Table 9-20.  
Refer to Table 9-23.  
Change MCU/Output board.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure #2  
Table 9-9 explains how to troubleshoot Current Proportional Output  
failure symptoms.  
Table 9-9  
Step  
Troubleshooting Current Proportional Output Failure  
What to do  
How to do it  
1
Make sure the controller is  
configured for Current output.  
Make Algorithm Set Up group function  
prompt OUT ALG or OUT2 ALG =  
CURRNT.  
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration.  
2
3
Check the field wiring.  
Output impedance must be less than  
or equal to 1000 ohms.  
Make sure all the configurable  
tuning constants, limits, and  
configuration data stored in the  
controller are correct. Reconfigure,  
if necessary.  
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration to  
check all this data and how to  
reconfigure.  
4
Check the output.  
Put the controller into Manual mode  
and change the output from 0 % to  
100 % (4-20 mA). Use a DC  
milliammeter at the rear terminals to  
verify the output.  
5
6
Recalibrate the Current Proportional Refer to Section 8 - Output Calibration  
output.  
for details.  
Change MCU/Output board.  
Refer to Table 9-23.  
254  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure #3  
Table 9-10 explains how to troubleshoot Position Proportional Output  
failure symptoms.  
Table 9-10 Troubleshooting Position Proportional Output Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Make sure the controller is  
Make Output Algorithm Set Up group  
configured for Position Proportional function prompt OUT ALG = POSITN.  
output.  
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration.  
2
3
4
5
Check the field wiring.  
Refer to Section 2 - Installation for  
Position Proportional Wiring  
information.  
Check the output.  
Put the controller into Manual mode  
and change the output from 0 % to  
100 %.  
Check whether the motor drives in  
both directions. If it does go to Step calibration procedure in Section 8 for  
6.  
See the Position Proportional  
motor slidewire calibration.  
Check whether the motor drives in  
either direction. If the motor drives  
in one direction, check the  
slidewire. If the motor does not  
drive in either direction, check the  
motor.  
Refer to the motor instructions.  
6
7
Check the output voltage to the  
slidewire.  
Should equal from 1.3 to 1.0 volts.  
See wiring in the installation section  
for terminal designations. The  
feedback slidewire output voltage  
must vary with the valve position.  
Make sure the output relays are  
actuating properly.  
Put the controller into Manual mode.  
Vary the output above and below the  
present value. Observe “OUT”  
indicator on the operator interface.  
If they are not working properly, check  
the field wiring, then go to Step 5.  
If they are, go to Step 8.  
8
9
Recalibrate the controller.  
Change MCU/Output board.  
Refer to Section 8 - Output  
Calibration.  
Refer to Table 9-23.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure #4  
Table 9-11 explains how to troubleshoot Time Proportional Output  
failure.  
Table 9-11 Troubleshooting Time Proportional Output Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Make sure the controller is  
configured for Time Proportional  
output.  
Make Output Algorithm Set Up group  
function prompt OUT ALG = TIME or  
TIME D or function prompt OUT2 ALG  
= TIME.  
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration.  
2
3
Check the field wiring.  
Make sure the NO or NC contact  
wiring is correct at the rear terminals.  
Refer to Section 2 - Installation for  
details.  
Make sure all the configurable  
tuning constants, limits, and  
configuration data stored in the  
controller are correct. Reconfigure,  
if necessary.  
Refer to Section 3- Configuration to  
check all this data and how to  
reconfigure.  
4
5
Check the output.  
Put the controller into Manual mode.  
Vary the output above and below the  
present value. Observe OUT indicator  
on the operator interface.  
Change MCU/Output board.  
Refer to Table 9-23.  
256  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure #5  
Table 9-12 explains how to troubleshoot Current/Time or Time/Current  
Proportional Output failure.  
Table 9-12 Troubleshooting Time/Current or Current/Time Proportional  
Output Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Make sure the controller is  
configured for Time/Current or  
Current/Time Proportional output.  
Make Output Algorithm Set Up group  
function prompt OUT ALG or OUT2  
ALG = TI CUR or CUR TI.  
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration.  
2
3
Check the field wiring.  
Make sure the NO or NC contact  
wiring is correct at the rear terminals.  
Refer to Section 2 - Installation for  
details.  
Make sure all the configurable  
tuning constants, limits, and  
configuration data stored in the  
controller are correct. Reconfigure,  
if necessary.  
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration to  
check all this data and how to  
reconfigure.  
4
5
Check the relay output.  
Put the controller into Manual mode.  
Vary the output above and below the  
present value. Observe OUT indicator  
on the operator interface.  
Check the Current Proportional  
Output.  
Put the controller into Manual mode  
and change the output from 0 % to  
100 % (4-20 mA). Use a DC  
milliammeter at the rear terminals to  
verify the output.  
6
7
Recalibrate the controller.  
Change MCU/Output board.  
Refer to Section 8 - Output Calibration  
for details.  
Refer to Table 9-23.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure #6  
Table 9-13 explains how to troubleshoot Alarm Relay Output failure.  
Table 9-13 Troubleshooting Alarm Relay Output Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Check the alarm configuration data. Reconfigure if necessary.  
If it is correct, check the field wiring. Refer to Section 3 - Configuration for  
details.  
2
Check that the applicable alarm  
relay actuates properly depending  
on what you have set at prompt  
AxSxTYPE.  
If the alarm type is set for PV, place  
the controller in manual mode. Vary  
the input to raise and lower the PV  
around the setpoint. Listen for a click  
from the relay as the PV moves in  
either direction and note that the  
proper ALM1 or ALM2 is lit.  
If it does, check the field wiring.  
EXAMPLE: If the alarm is set for  
MANUAL, put the controller into  
manual mode. The alarm light is ON.  
Put the controller into automatic mode  
and the alarm light is OFF.  
3
4
Check the field wiring.  
Make sure the NO or NC contact  
wiring is correct on the alarm output  
terminals.  
Refer to Section 2 - Installation for  
details.  
Change MCU/Output board.  
Refer to Table 9-23.  
258  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure #7  
Table 9-14 explains how to troubleshoot a Keyboard failure.  
Table 9-14 Troubleshooting a Keyboard Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Make sure the keyboard is  
connected properly to the  
MCU/output and power/input  
boards.  
Withdraw the chassis from the case  
and visually inspect the connection.  
2
3
Controller Keyboard or specific keys Use your four-digit security code  
may be LOCKED OUT via the  
security code.  
number to change the lockout level.  
Refer to Section 3 – Configuration.  
ATTENTION  
Using “1000” as a  
security code number will override the  
4-digit code previously entered.  
Run the keyboard test.  
Press the [SET UP] key and hold in,  
then press the [FUNCTION] key at the  
same time. The controller will run a  
display test. Then you will see:  
Upper Display  
KEYS  
Lower Display  
TRY ALL  
Press each key. If it works, the key  
name will appear in the lower display.  
4
Replace the display/keyboard if any Refer to “Parts Replacement  
keys are shorted out.  
Procedures” in this section.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure #8  
Table 9-15 explains how to troubleshoot a Communications failure.  
Table 9-15 Troubleshooting a Communications Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Check the field wiring and  
termination resistor.  
Depending on the protocol used, refer  
to the proper communications manual  
installation section.  
2
3
Make sure the Communications  
Printed Wiring Board is installed  
properly in the controller.  
Withdraw the chassis from the case  
and inspect the board. See the  
exploded view (Figure 10-1) for  
location of the board. Return the  
chassis to the case.  
Determine if the Communications  
board is faulty by running a LOCAL  
LOOPBACK TEST.  
Run the Local Loopback Test.  
Press [SET UP] until you see:  
Upper Display  
If the test fails, replace the board.  
SET UP  
Lower Display  
COM  
Press [FUNCTION] until you see:  
Upper Display  
DISABL  
Lower Display  
LOOPBACK  
Press ▲ or ▲, you will see:  
Upper Display  
ENABLE  
Lower Display  
LOOPBACK  
The test will run until the operator  
disables it here.  
260  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.8 Parts Replacement Procedures  
Introduction  
These procedures tell you how to access and replace the following printed  
wiring boards in your controller.  
• Display/Keyboard  
• MCU/Output  
• Power/Input  
• 2nd Input  
• Digital Input  
• Auxiliary Output  
• DMCS Communications  
• RS422/485 Communications  
• Modbus Communications  
Equipment needed  
To accomplish the procedures that follow, you will need the following  
equipment:  
• Phillips Head Screwdriver  
• Flat Bladed Screwdriver  
•
Small Pliers  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to remove the  
chassis  
Refer to Figure 9-1 for steps and follow the procedure listed in Table  
9-16.  
Table 9-16 How to Remove the Chassis  
Step  
Action  
Loosen the screw on the front face.  
1
2
Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver into the hole on the top of the case as shown  
in Figure 9-1 and pry chassis forward slightly until the chassis connectors  
separate from the back of the case.  
3
Grasp the bezel and pull the chassis out of the case.  
Figure 9-1  
Chassis Removal  
2
Insert screwdriver  
and pry forward  
3
Grasp bezel  
and pull  
chassis out  
1
Loosen screw  
22637  
262  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to replace the  
display/keyboard  
assembly  
Refer to Figure 9-2 and follow the procedure listed in Table 9-17.  
Table 9-17 Display/Keyboard Assembly Replacement Procedure  
Step  
Action  
1
2
3
Remove the chassis from the case as shown in Figure 9-1.  
Peel the rubber bezel and display window off the chassis assembly.  
Separate the chassis frame at the four release points shown in Figure 9-2  
and wiggle each printed wiring board out of its socket on the  
display/keyboard assembly. Pull out slightly.  
4
5
6
Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into each of the display/keyboard  
release points (Figure 9-2) and pry out the board.  
Install the new board, bottom end in first, and push in the top until it clicks  
into place.  
Reinstall the printed wiring boards into the rear of the display board  
making sure that the boards click into their release points.  
7
8
Replace the bezel and window assembly.  
Reinstall chassis into case. Press in hard, then tighten the screw.  
Figure 9-2  
Display/Keyboard Replacement  
Display keyboard  
release points  
Pull printed  
wiring boards  
out slightly  
Printed wiring  
boards  
release points  
Display/keyboard  
Chassis assembly  
Rubber bezel  
and window  
22638  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to remove the  
printed wiring boards  
from the chassis  
To remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis, refer to Figure 9-3  
and follow the procedure in Table 9-18.  
Table 9-18 Printed Wiring Board Removal from Chassis  
Step  
Action  
1
2
Remove the chassis from the case as shown in Figure 9-1.  
Separate the chassis frame at the release points shown in Figure 9-3 and  
wiggle each printed wiring board out of its socket on the display/keyboard  
assembly. Pull both boards out of the chassis assembly.  
Figure 9-3  
Removing the Printed Wiring Boards  
Pull printed  
wiring boards out  
of chassis  
Printed wiring  
boards  
release points  
Chassis assembly  
Rubber bezel  
and window  
22639  
264  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printed wiring board  
identification  
Figure 9-4 identifies each of the printed wiring boards that can be  
replaced. Refer to this drawing when following the replacement  
procedures for each of the boards, since you have to remove all of them  
from the chassis to replace the one you want.  
In order to lay boards flat, remove the transformer lead from the Auxiliary  
Output/Communications board and the Digital Input board.  
Refer to the specific procedure table to remove the desired board.  
•
•
•
•
•
2nd Input Board—Table 9-19  
Power Input Board—Table 9-20  
Digital Input Board—Table 9-21  
Auxiliary Output/Communications Board—Table 9-22  
MCU/Output Board—Table 9-23  
Figure 9-4  
Printed Wiring Board Identification  
WG connectors  
on Digital Input and  
MCU/Output boards  
Digital  
input  
board  
MCU/  
output  
board  
Aux.out/  
communications  
board  
2nd input  
board  
Power/input  
board  
W1/W2  
jumper  
1
1
Note: the transformer connectors are  
polarized and will only go on one way  
PROM  
24279  
1
2-Pin Transformer connections are interchangeable. Either may be used on Digital Input Board or the second Input Board.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2nd input board  
Follow the procedure listed in Table 9-19 to replace the Second Input  
board—P/N 30756715-501.  
Table 9-19 Second Input Board Replacement Procedure  
Step  
Action  
1
2
3
4
5
Remove the chassis from the case. See Figure 9-1.  
Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis. See Figure 9-3.  
Lay the boards flat and identify the 2nd Input board. See Figure 9-4.  
Remove the transformer plug from connector J14.  
The 2nd Input board is attached to the Power Input board by three  
mounting posts. Locate these posts under the power input board.  
6
7
Use a small pliers and squeeze the ends of each post together and push it  
up through the board. Remove 2nd Input board.  
Orient the new 2nd Input board onto the Power Input board and push the  
mounting posts down through the Power Input board until they click into  
place.  
8
9
Replace the transformer plug onto connector J14. Make sure the Input 2  
jumper (W1/W2) is in the correct position. (Refer to Table 2-4.)  
Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis. Make sure the  
connections to the display/keyboard assembly are made and that the  
release points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards.  
10  
Reinstall the chassis into the case. Push in hard, then tighten screw.  
Power input board  
Follow the procedure listed in Table 9-20 to replace the Power Input  
board—P/N 51309404-502 (90 to 264 Vac) or 51309404-501 (24 Vac/dc).  
Table 9-20 Power Input Board Replacement Procedure  
Step  
Action  
1
2
3
4
Remove the chassis from the case. See Figure 9-1.  
Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis. See Figure 9-3.  
Lay the boards flat and identify the Power Input board. See Figure 9-4.  
Remove the 2nd Input board, if present. See procedure in  
Table 9-19.  
5
6
Remove the transformer connections to the Digital Input board and  
Auxiliary Output/Communications board, if present.  
Remove the connector from plug WG if present (current output models  
only). Slide a small screwdriver under the connector and lift the release.  
7
8
Replace the Power Input board.  
Reinstall WG connector and transformer connections to Digital Input board  
and Auxiliary Output/Communications board, if present.  
9
Reinstall the 2nd Input board. See procedure in Table 9-19.  
10  
Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis. Make sure the  
connections to the display/keyboard assembly are made and that the  
release points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards.  
11  
Reinstall the chassis into the case. Push in hard, then tighten screw.  
266  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital input board  
Follow the procedure listed in Table 9-21 to replace the Digital Input  
board—P/N 30756696-501.  
Table 9-21 Digital Input Board Replacement Procedure  
Step  
Action  
1
2
3
4
5
Remove the chassis from the case. See Figure 9-1.  
Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis. See Figure 9-3.  
Lay the boards flat and identify the Digital Input board. See Figure 9-4.  
Remove the transformer plug from connector J9.  
The Digital Input board is attached to the MCU/output board by three  
mounting posts. Locate these posts under the MCU/output board.  
6
7
Use small pliers and squeeze the ends of each post together and push it  
up through the board. Remove the Digital Input board.  
Orient the new Digital Input board onto the MCU/Output board and push  
the mounting posts down through the MCU/Output board until they click  
into place.  
8
9
Replace the transformer plug onto connector J9.  
Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis. Make sure the  
connections to the display/keyboard assembly are made and that the  
release points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards.  
10  
Reinstall the chassis into the case. Push in hard, then tighten the screw.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Aux.Out/  
communications board  
Follow the procedure listed in Table 9-22 to replace the following boards:  
•
•
•
•
Auxiliary Output Board—P/N 30756687-501  
Auxiliary Output/RS422/485 Board—P/N 30756687-502  
DMCS Communications Board—P/N 30756690-502  
RS422/485 Communications Board—P/N 30756693-502 (Basic)  
or P/N 30756693-503 (Expanded)  
Table 9-22 Aux.Out/Communications Board Replacement Procedure  
Step  
Action  
1
2
3
Remove the chassis from the case. See Figure 9-1.  
Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis. See Figure 9-3.  
Lay the boards flat and identify the Auxiliary Output or the  
Communications board. See Figure 9-4.  
4
5
Remove the transformer plug from connector J8.  
The Aux.Out/Communications board is attached to the MCU/Output board  
by three mounting posts. Locate these posts under the MCU/Output  
board.  
6
7
Use small pliers and squeeze the ends of each post together and push it  
up through the board. Remove the Aux.Out/Communications board.  
If you are replacing a Communications Board, a new PROM is supplied  
with the board. Locate the PROM (shown in Figure 9-4) and gently pry out  
the old PROM. Orient the new PROM supplied and gently press into  
place.  
8
Orient the new Aux.Out/Communications board onto the MCU/Output  
board and push the mounting posts down through the MCU/Output board  
until they click into place.  
9
Replace the transformer plug onto connector J8.  
10  
Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis. Make sure the  
connections to the keyboard assembly are made and that the release  
points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards.  
11  
Reinstall the chassis into the case. Push in hard, then tighten the screw.  
268  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MCU/output board  
Follow the procedure listed in Table 9-23 to replace the following  
MCU/output boards:  
Basic  
•
•
Current Output—P/N 51309401-504  
Relay Output—P/N 51309401-505  
Expanded  
•
•
Current Output—P/N 51309401-504  
Relay Output—P/N 51309401-505  
Table 9-23 MCU/Output Board Replacement Procedure  
Step  
Action  
1
2
3
4
Remove the chassis from the case. See Figure 9-1.  
Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis. See Figure 9-3.  
Lay the boards flat and identify the MCU/Output board. See Figure 9-4.  
Each option board is held onto the MCU/Output board with three posts.  
Locate these posts under the MCU/Output board.  
5
6
Use small pliers and squeeze the ends of each post together and push it  
up through the board. Remove the option boards present.  
Remove the transformer connections to the Digital Input board and the  
Auxiliary Output/Communications board, if present.  
7
8
Remove the Digital Input Board, if present. See Table 9-21.  
Remove the Auxiliary Output/Communications board, if present. See  
Table 9-22.  
9
Remove the connector from plug WG. Slide a small screwdriver under the  
connector and lift the release.  
10  
11  
Replace the MCU/Output board.  
Reinstall the Digital Input board, if present, onto the new MCU/Output  
board.  
12  
13  
14  
Reinstall the Auxiliary Output/Communications board, if present, onto the  
new MCU/Output board.  
Reinstall the WG connector and the transformer connectors to the Digital  
Input board and Auxiliary Output/Communications board, if present.  
Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis. Make sure the  
connections to the display/keyboard assembly are made and that the  
release points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards.  
15  
Reinstall the chassis into the case. Push in hard, then tighten the screw.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.9 Maintenance  
Cleaning  
If you find it necessary to clean the elastomer bezel, use mild soapy water.  
270  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 10 – Parts List  
10.1 Exploded View  
Introduction  
Figure 10-1 is an exploded view of the UDC 3300 Controller. Each part is  
labeled with a key number. The part numbers are listed by key number in  
Table 10-1. There is a list of parts not shown in Table 10-2.  
Figure 10-1  
UDC 3300 Exploded View  
6
7
8
9
24186  
5
1
2
4
3
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts identification  
Table 10-1 lists the part numbers for the key numbers shown in the  
exploded view.  
Table 10-1  
Parts Identification  
Description  
Key  
Part Number  
Quantity  
Number  
1
2
3
30756667-526  
30756672-501  
Bezel Assembly—Gray  
1
1
1
Display/Keyboard Printed Wiring Assembly  
30756687-501  
30756687-502  
30756690-502  
39656693-502  
30756693-503  
Auxiliary Output Printed Wiring Board  
Auxiliary Output/Half Duplex RS422/485 Communications Board  
DMCS Communications Printed Wiring Board  
RS422/485 Communications Printed Wiring Board—includes Basic Prom  
RS422/485 Communications Printed Wiring Board (Full or Half Duplex)—  
includes Expanded Prom  
4
51309404-502  
51309404-501  
Power/Input Printed Wiring Board 90-264 Vac  
Power/Input Printed Wiring Board 24 Vac/dc  
1
5
6
30756715-501  
2nd Input Printed Wiring Board  
1
1
51309401-504  
51309401-505  
Current Output/MCU Printed Wiring Board  
Relay Output/MCU Printed Wiring Board  
7
30755306-501  
30756725-501  
30756679-501  
Relay, Electromechanical  
Relay, Solid State 1 Amp  
Open Collector Output  
1
per kit  
8
9
30756696-501  
30756721-501  
Digital Input Printed Wiring Board  
Case Assembly  
1
1
FIELD UPGRADE SOFTWARE KITS:  
51309713-501  
51309714-501  
51309715-501  
51309716-501  
51309717-501  
Upgrade DC330B to SPP + Carbon  
Upgrade DC330E to SPP + Math + HealthWatch  
Upgrade DC330E to SPP + 2 Loops + HealthWatch  
Upgrade DC330E to SPP + Math + 2 Loops + HealthWatch  
Upgrade DC330D to SPP  
Parts not shown  
Table 10-2 lists the part numbers of the parts not show in the exploded  
view.  
Table 10-2 Parts Not Shown  
Part Number  
30731996-506  
30754465-501  
Description  
Quantity  
4-20 mA Resistor Assembly, 250 ohms  
0-10 Volt Input Resistor Assembly, 100K Pair  
1
1
1
30732481-501  
30732481-502  
Varistor, 120 V  
Varistor, 240 V  
30755050-501  
30756764-002  
Mounting Kit  
1
1
1
Rear Cover Kit  
30755223-002  
30755223-003  
DIN Adapter Kit, Blue  
DIN Adapter Kit, Gray  
30757088-501  
30756018-003  
30756683-001  
30757215-001  
Cold Junction Resistor Kit  
1
1
External Relay, Solid State 10 Amp  
NEMA3 Gasket (Panel to case)  
NEMA4 Front Face Kit  
1
272  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 11 – Appendix A – Manual Tuning  
11.1 Overview  
Introduction  
When you tune a controller, there are some things to consider:  
• Process Characteristics - Gain, Time Constants, etc.  
• Desired response - Minimal overshoot  
Basically, controller tuning consists of determining the appropriate values  
for the Gain (PB), Rate (Derivative), and Reset (Integral) time tuning  
parameters (control constants) that will give the control you want.  
Depending on the characteristics of the deviation of the process variable  
from the setpoint, the tuning parameters interact to alter the controller’s  
output and produce changes in the value of the process variable.  
Since each parameter responds to a specific characteristic of the deviation,  
you may not need a combination of all three. It depends on the process  
characteristics and the desired control response.  
Tuning technique  
You can estimate a starting point and the tuning parameters required to  
give the desired controller response and with some experience become  
proficient with this method.  
An alternate approach is to rely on a tuning technique. In practice, tuning  
techniques usually do not give exactly the type of response desired; thus,  
some final adjustments to the tuning parameters must be made.  
However, you should at least obtain a reasonable starting point from  
which the desired response characteristics can be obtained.  
Controller tuning  
procedures  
There are three procedures for tuning the controller:  
• Time, Position, or Current Proportional simplex control,  
• Duplex Time or Current Proportional control,  
• Two sets of tuning constants for single output operation.  
The suggested procedures describe how to establish and store values of  
Gain (PB), Rate, and Reset time constants for your process. You must  
know the type of control and algorithm your controller has.  
Tuning aids  
A graphic recorder (such as Honeywell model DPR, DR4500, or VP131)  
connected to the process variable will make it easier to determine when  
the oscillations are constant and also the time for one oscillation. If a  
recorder is not available, you can use a stopwatch to time the oscillation of  
the process variable displayed on the controller.  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11.2 Time, Position, or Current Proportional Simplex Control  
Procedure  
The procedure listed in Table 11-1 gives you the steps for manually tuning  
a controller with Time, Position, or Current proportional simplex control.  
Table 11-1 Manual Tuning Procedure for Simplex Control  
Step  
1
Action  
In Manual Mode, adjust the output to bring the PV (Process Variable) near  
the desired value.  
2
Set the Rate time to 0 minutes and set the Reset time to the maximum value  
(50.00 minutes) or set repeats/min to the minimum value to minimize reset  
action  
If applicable, set the CYCLE TIME to 4 seconds and DEADBAND  
to 0.5.  
3
4
5
Increase GAIN (decrease PB) significantly. Try a factor of 10.  
Adjust the local setpoint to equal PV and switch to Automatic control mode.  
Increase the setpoint by 5 or 10% and observe the process variable  
response.  
6
7
If the PV oscillates, continue to Step 7. If it does not oscillate, return to the  
original setpoint and increase GAIN (decrease PB) again by a factor of 2,  
and repeat Step 5.  
Compare the oscillations with the figure below:  
Pattern A  
Amplitude  
Pattern B  
Pattern C  
Time for one cycle  
Time  
20778  
• If the oscillation matches pattern A, go to Step 8.  
• If the oscillation matches pattern B, increase GAIN (decrease PB) by a  
factor of 2 and repeat Steps 4 to 6.  
• If the oscillation matches pattern C, decrease GAIN (increase PB) by a  
factor of 0.8 and repeat Steps 4 to 6  
The amplitude of the cycle is immaterial, but all of the elements of the loop  
must be within the operating range (i.e., the valve must not go full open or  
closed).  
8
9
Record the current value of GAIN (or PB) and measure and record the value  
of time for one completed oscillation of PV.  
Select the proper set of formulas from Table 11-2. Use the values of Gain (or  
PB) and time (in minutes) in the formulas to arrive at the controller’s tuning  
parameters settings.  
274  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step  
10  
Action  
Enter the values of GAIN (or PB), RATE, and RESET in minutes (or repeats  
per minute) into the UDC 3300 controller and verify that the PV response is  
adequate.  
Make additional trimming adjustments, if necessary, to fine tune the  
controller per the guidelines shown below:  
TO REDUCE OVERSHOOT  
Less Gain (more PB) perhaps a longer Rate time.  
TO INCREASE OVERSHOOT OR INCREASE SPEED OR RESPONSE  
More Gain (less PB), perhaps shorter Rate time.  
Manual tuning formulas  
Table 11-2 lists the formulas used in the procedure listed in Table 11-1.  
Table 11-2  
Manual Tuning Formulas  
Units  
GAIN  
% PROPORTIONAL BAND  
and  
and  
RESET TIME in  
Minutes  
Repeat  
RESET ACTION in  
Repeats  
Minutes  
Proportional (P) only  
GAIN = Measured Gain x 0.5  
RESET TIME = 50.00  
(minimum reset)  
%PB = Measured PB x 2  
RESET ACTION = 0.02  
(repeats/minute)  
Use PD+MR Algorithm  
(i.e. No Reset)  
RATE = 0  
RATE = 0  
Proportional + Reset  
(PI) (No Rate)  
GAIN = Measured Gain x 0.5  
RESET TIME = Measured Time  
%PB = Measured PB x 2.2  
RESET ACTION = 1.2  
Measured Time  
(M/R)  
1.2  
(R/M)  
RATE = 0  
RATE = 0  
Proportional + Reset + Rate  
(PID)  
GAIN = Measured Gain x 0.6  
RESET TIME = Measured Time  
2
%PB = Measured PB x 1.7  
RESET ACTION =  
2
Measured Time  
RATE = Measured Time  
8
RATE = Measured Time  
8
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11.3 Time Proportional Duplex or Current Proportional Duplex Control  
Introduction  
For HEAT/COOL applications.  
Tune the controller with the output above 50% for Heat and below 50%  
for Cool.  
HEAT/COOL prompts  
The “TUNING” function prompts for HEAT/COOL are:  
HEAT  
PB or GAIN  
COOL  
GAIN2  
RSETMIN or RSETRPM  
RATEMIN  
RSET2MIN or RSETRPM2  
RATE2MIN  
CYCSEC  
CYC2SEC  
11.4 Two Sets of Tuning Parameters for Single Output Operation  
Introduction  
You can use two sets of tuning constants for single output types and tune  
each set separately.  
TWO SETS prompts  
The “TUNING” function prompts for two sets are:  
PID SET 1  
PB or GAIN  
PID SET 2  
GAIN2  
RSETMIN or RSETRPM  
RATEMIN  
RSET2MIN or RSETRPM2  
RATE2MIN  
CYCSEC  
CYC2SEC  
276  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Current output/ universal output connections, 26  
Current proportional duplex, 276  
Current simplex, 109  
Current/time duplex, 110  
Cycle time (cool), 81  
Cycle time (heat), 81  
%
A
% Oxygen control, 203  
Aborting PV adaptive tuning, 200  
Accutune, 181  
Accutune, 194  
D
Deadband, 122, 127  
Demand Tuning, 47  
Dewpoint, 98  
Dewpoint control, 203  
Diagnostic error messages, 154  
Digital input combinations, 134  
Digital Input option, 186  
Digital input selections, 131  
Digital inputs (remote mode switching), 181  
Digital inputs 1 and 2 combination operation, 188  
Digital inputs 1 and 2 combination selections, 188  
Digital inputs connections, 29  
Digital output status, 111  
Accutune error prompts, 201  
Accutune Set Up group, 47  
Accutune Set Up Group, 88  
Adaptive tune, 89  
Adaptive tune error status, 91  
Advancing a running SP program, 217  
Alarm blocking, 142  
Alarm on totalizer value, 185  
Alarm setpoints, 171  
Algorithm Data Set Up Group, 92  
Auto bias, 120, 126  
Auto Manual Station mode  
backup control feature, 190  
Auto/Manual Station mode, 190  
Automatic mode, 158  
Automatic switchover value, 125  
Auxiliary otuput calibration, 240  
Auxiliary output, 129  
Auxiliary Output board, 268  
Auxiliary output connections, 29  
Auxiliary Output/RS422/485 board, 268  
Dimensions, 13  
Direct acting control, 121, 126  
Disconnect the field wiring, 221  
Display Parameters Set Up Group, 143  
Displays and indicators, 3  
DMCS Communications board, 268  
Duplex, 136  
Duplex Heat/Cool applications, 84  
B
Baud rate, 136  
Bias, 114  
E
Eight segment characterizer, 105, 106  
Eight segment characterizer, 104  
Eight-segment characterization, 184  
Electrical considerations, 15  
Electrical noise, 15  
Electromechanical Relay Output., 22  
Emissivity, 115  
End segment number, 206  
Burnout protection, 114  
C
Calibration mode, 229  
Calibration steps, 221  
Carbon control, 203  
Exploded view, 271  
External program reset, 215  
External setpoint program reset, 132  
Carbon potential, 99, 202  
Carbon potential selections, 97  
CE Conformity, 1  
Changing current segment time or setpoint in running SP  
program, 217  
Characterizer, 104, 105  
Cleaning, 270  
CO compensation, 203  
Cold junction temperature, 230  
Communication units, 137  
Communications option connections, 30  
Communications selection, 135  
Communications Set Up Group, 135  
Composite wiring diagram, 18  
Configuration Prompt Definitions, 79  
Control 2 algorithm, 94  
F
Failsafe mode, 122, 127  
Failsafe output value, 122, 128  
Feedforward multiplier, 97  
Feedforward summer, 96  
Filter, 114  
Flow totalizer, 184  
Function Prompts, 36  
Fuzzy overshoot suppression, 193  
Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression, 47  
Control algorithm, 92  
Controller dropoff value, 122, 127  
Controller failure symptoms, 246  
Current duplex, 110  
Current output 2, 129  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Mounting method, 14  
Mounting procedure, 14  
Multiplier, 97  
G
Gain, 80  
Gain 2, 81  
Gain scheduling, 119  
Gain Value for Gain Scheduling, 83  
grounding, 15  
Multiplier divider, 97  
Multiplier divider with square root, 97  
Multiplier with square root, 97  
Guaranteed soak, 207  
O
Open Collector Output Connections, 25  
Operating limits, 8  
Operating parameters, 153  
Operation of two-loop control, 181  
Operator interface, 3  
Options Set Up Group, 129  
Output algorithm, 109, 111  
Output change rate, 121, 127  
Output override, 181  
H
HealthWatch  
counters, 144  
timers, 144  
High output limit, 127  
High scaling factor, 98  
High select, 97  
Hysteresis (output relay), 122  
Output override (2 PID loops only), 153  
Output Override., 95  
Output rate down value, 121, 127  
Output rate up value, 121, 127  
Override selector, 175  
I, J  
Input 1 actuation type, 112  
Input 1 high range value, 113  
Input 1 low range value, 114  
Input 1/Input 2 connections, 20  
Input 2 actuation type, 116  
Input 3 actuation type, 117  
Input algorithm selections, 183  
Integration rates, 184  
Oxygen, 98  
P, Q  
Parity, 136  
PD with manual reset, 93, 95  
Percent carbon source, 99  
Physical considerations, 13  
PID A, 93, 95  
Internal Cascade control:, 172  
Internal cascade indication, 180  
PID B, 93, 95  
PID loop selection, 94  
K
Key functions, 4  
Position proportional backup mode, 159  
Position Proportional control output calibration, 236  
Position proportional output connections, 28  
Power up, 148  
Printed wiring board identification, 265  
Printed wiring board removal, 264  
Process gain Loop 2, 90  
Program record sheet, 210  
Program state, 207  
Program termination state, 207  
Prompt hierarchy, 36  
L
Line voltage wiring, 19  
Local setpoint source, 119, 125, 160  
Lockout, 82  
Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group, 118  
Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group, 80  
Loop break, 140  
Loopback, 138  
Low scaling factor, 98  
Low select, 97  
Lower display key, 153  
Proportional band, 80  
Proportional band 2, 81  
Proportional band units, 123  
Protective bonding, 15  
M, N  
Maintenance  
PV Tuning, 47  
counters, 71, 144  
timers, 71, 144  
Maintenance Group, 71  
Manual mode, 158  
R
Ramp segments, 206  
Ramp unit, 208  
Ramp/Soak profile, 205  
Ramp/Soak profile example, 209  
Ramp/Soak programming, 205  
Range values, 220  
Rate, 80  
Rate 2, 81  
Ratio, 114  
Recycle number, 206  
Relative humidity, 97, 99  
Manual reset, 81  
Manual tuning formulas, 275  
Manual tuning procedure, 274  
Manual/Auto key lockout, 82  
Mass flow orifice constant (K) for math selections, 98  
Math algorithms, 96, 183  
Monitoring two-loop control, 180  
Mounting  
Overall dimensions, 13  
278  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Relay Output, 22  
Remote mode switching, 181  
Remote setpoint, 162  
Remote setpoint source, 120, 126  
Remote switching, 186  
Reset, 81  
Reset 2, 81  
Reset totalizer value, 187  
Reset units, 123  
Restarting a running SP program, 217  
Restoring factory calibration, 231  
Restrictions for two-loop control, 175  
Reverse acting control, 121, 127  
RS422/485 Communications board, 268  
Run/Hold key lockout, 82  
Run/monitor SP program, 214  
T, U, V  
Three Position Step, 94  
Three Position Step Control algorithm, 182  
Time duplex, 109  
Time proportional output, 109  
Time simplex, 109  
Timer, 96  
Totalizer displays, 184  
Totalizer function, 107, 184  
Totalizer reset via digital input, 185  
Transmitter characterization, 113  
Tuning 2 Set Up group, 44  
Tuning constant values, 169  
Tuning parameter sets, 118  
Tuning parameter sets—Loop 2, 124  
Tuning parameters, 179  
Two HLAI replace second LLAI connections, 21  
S
Security code, 82  
Set Up Group, 36  
Setpoint high limit, 121, 126  
Setpoint low limit, 121, 126  
Setpoint ramp, 85  
W, X, Y, Z  
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD, 219, 233, 253  
Weighted average ratio, 98  
Wiring diagram, 18  
Setpoint ramp final setpoint, 86  
Setpoint Ramp Set Up group, 45  
Setpoint ramp time, 85  
Setpoint Ramp/Rate/Programming Set Up Group, 85  
Setpoint rate, 45, 86  
Setpoint Select key lockout, 82  
Setpoint selection indication, 162  
Setpoint tracking, 120  
Setpoint tracking, 126  
Shed controller mode and output level, 137  
Shed time, 136  
Shock hazard warning, 219, 233, 253  
Single Setpoint Ramp, 45  
Soak segments, 206  
Software version, 246  
Solid State Relay Output Connections, 23  
SP programming tips, 217  
SP Tuning, 47  
Start segment number, 206  
Summer with ratio and bias, 97  
4/00  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
280  
UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual  
4/00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sensing and Control  
Honeywell  
11 West Spring Street  
Freeport, IL 61032  
51-52-25-55 Rev. D 0400 Printed in USA  
www.honeywell.com/sensing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Grace Network Card GDI IRP600 User Manual
Grindmaster Coffeemaker LCD2 1 User Manual
Heatiator Indoor Fireplace IDV4833IT User Manual
Honeywell Carbon Monoxide Alarm RFR200 User Manual
Hotpoint Dishwasher BFV620 User Manual
Hotpoint Range RGB735DEP User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Network Card FC1142 User Manual
Icom Two Way Radio IGM1600 User Manual
Ikelite Camera Accessories 687107 User Manual
Imation MP3 Player 3503 User Manual